0% found this document useful (0 votes)

12 views358 pages

Chaine Et Pignon Modulaire

Uploaded by

hicham sk3

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

12 views358 pages

Chaine Et Pignon Modulaire

Uploaded by

hicham sk3

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 358

siegling prolink

modular belts

ENGINEERING
MANUAL

Siegling – total belting solutions

Traditional conveyor belts are often intended for generic use, but
the design features of Siegling Prolink modular belts are aimed at
providing specific processing and application benefits. This is why
the Siegling Prolink modular belts are a perfect addition to Forbo
Movement Systems existing wide range of belting products.
Our vast experience in conveying and processing applications,
combined with our line of highly specialized belts ensure that we
can offer optimized conveying solutions regardless of the applica-
tion. The Forbo Movement Systems name is synonymous with
not only superior product quality, but also with professional
technical support and quality service.

I-2 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

INTRODUCTION
TO MODULAR BELTING

Modular means adaptable Benefits of modular belting

Siegling Prolink offer a wide product range with many Modular belts are robust and durable and can handle
different module designs. Modules within individual conveying and processing tasks which may not be
product series can easily be combined. possible with conventional conveyor belting materials
and types.
Because of this, Siegling Prolink modular belts can be
customized to suit individual conveying and processing When assembled and installed, modular belts are end-
tasks. We will help you identify the optimal solution for less, but if damage occurs, individual modules can quick-
your specific needs. ly be replaced, thereby minimizing down time and main-
tenance costs. Modular belts can be supplied in any
Siegling Prolink is used successfully in a broad range of length and width and if needed, functional modules can
applications in industries such as: be added at any time so belt properties can be changed
if required.
– fruit and vegetable processing
– baked goods manufacturing The Siegling Prolink System – Every belt is a “specialist”!
– meat, poultry and seafood processing
– automotive and tire manufacturing
– logistics

In these areas, Siegling Prolink modular belts often

play a significant role beyond conveying.

I-3 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SIEGLING PROLINK

Wide range of modules available

By working closely with end users and equipment manu-
facturers, our R&D department ensures that all module
types in the Siegling Prolink product line can be relied
upon for exceptional performance.

Our belt series include approx. 100 different types of

modules that can handle most conveying and processing
tasks, ranging from light to heavy duty.

Individual modules are easily assembled as endless belts

by connecting them with hinge pins. This means that
modular belts:
– can be made to any length and width
– are easy to repair Functionality
– require less expenditure on spare parts
Custom belts are available using profiles, side
Existing conveyors equipped with other types of belting guards and other accessories such as mod-
can easily be converted to accommodate Siegling Prolink ules with different surface patterns, openings
modular belting. In addition to a wide range of standard or friction pads for most Siegling Prolink belt
colors, many other colors can be supplied on request. series.
Please inquire if you have a specific color request.
Special modules and accessories for custom-
Data sheets with additional technical information about ized uses are also available or can be devel-
individual belt series and materials are available online. oped according to customer specifications.
Please be aware that some of the module types shown Please contact us if you have a specific
may not be available in all surface pattern, material, and request requiring a customized conveying
color combinations as standard products. Please inquire solution.
if you need additional information or have specific
requirements.

I-4 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

Materials HACCP requirements
Apart from the individual module and sprocket New regulatory requirements are forcing food
designs, selecting the optimal material is a way manufacturers to adopt increasingly stringent
to customize a belt to suit a specific conveying hygiene standards and sanitation procedures.
or processing task. Conventional conveyor and processing belts
often cannot comply with these requirements,
All materials are tried and tested in the most but Siegling Prolink modular belts are designed
varied of industrial environments. The specific to effectively support your HACCP concept.
properties of the individual materials guaran-
tee they can handle a wide range of applica-
tions.

The Siegling Prolink modular belt series are

available in several standard materials (see
each series for more information) and most of
them can be made from any of the materials
shown in chapter 2.

I-5 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 Product portfolio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-8 2 Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . II-1
1.1 Modular belt series – Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-10 2.1 Plastic materials (Properties). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . II-3
Type key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-16 Belt material orientation chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . II-5
Legend. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-17 Use of materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . II-5
Straight running belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-18 Temperature ranges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . II-7
Side flexing belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-23 Color codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . II-9
1.2 Detailed series information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-25 Friction factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . II-10
Series 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-26 Declaration of compliance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . II-11
Series 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-38 Siegling Prolink material identification test. . . . . . II-12
Series 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-50 Fire warning for Siegling Prolink
Series 4.1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-60 plastic modular belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . II-12
Series 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-70 Cleaning agent compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . II-13
Series 6.1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-94 Chemical resistance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . II-13
Series 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-112 2.2 Other Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . II-18
Series 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-124 High-grip materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . II-18
Series 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-142 Shore hardness scale for High-grip materials. . . . II-18
Series 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-152 Metals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . II-18
Series 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-166
Series 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-176
Series 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-184
3 Engineering guidelines. . . . . . . . . . . . III-1
Series 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-194 3.1 Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III-3
Series 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-200 Factors affecting belt life. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III-3
Series 18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-206 General conveyor considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III-3
1.3 Retainer rings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-216 Basic terms and dimension definitions. . . . . . . . . . III-4
1.4 Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-218 3.2 Conveyor design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III-5
Fruit and vegetable processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-218 Sprockets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III-5
Meat and poultry processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-220 Belt support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III-7
Baked goods manufacturing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-222 Shaft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III-12
Seafood processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-224 Drive configurations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III-13
Automotive/tire manufacturing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-226 3.3 Conveyor layouts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III-15
Logistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-227 Straight running. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III-16
Other applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-228 Incline/Decline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III-17
Decline conveying. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III-17
Hold Down Tabs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III-18
Side-flexing belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III-20
Guideline for curve direction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III-39
Spiral conveyors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III-45

I-6 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

4 Calculations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IV-1 5.5 Maintenance and repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V-18

4.1 Four step method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IV-3 5.6 Cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V-19

Calculate effective belt pull FU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IV-4 5.7 Preventive maintenance and troubleshooting. . . V-20
Calculate adjusted belt pull Fadj . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IV-5 The belt is not tracking properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V-20
Calculate admissible belt pull Fadm . . . . . . . . . . . . . IV-6 Sprockets do not engage correctly. . . . . . . . . . . . . V-20
Validation of belt selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IV-6 Excessive sprocket wear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V-21
4.2 Calculation example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IV-7 Excessive belt wear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V-21

4.3 Shaft calculations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IV-10 Belt stretching; excessive catenary sag. . . . . . . . . . V-22
Hinge pins are migrating out of the belt. . . . . . . . V-22
4.4 Temperature influence on belt dimensions. . . . . IV-14

5 Operating instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . V-1 6 Appendix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VI-1

6.1 Glossary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VI-3
5.1 Preparing for the installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V-3
6.2 Glossary of symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VI-6
5.2 Sprocket installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V-4
6.3 Additional tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VI-9
5.3
Joining belt sections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V-9
Shaft dimensions for molded sprockets . . . . . . . . VI-9
Series 1, 2, 3, 4.1, 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V-9
Bore size dimensions at Prolink sprockets. . . . . . . VI-10
Series 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V-9
Groove dimensions for circlips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VI-11
Series 5 ST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V-10
Minimum design radii. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VI-13
Combo belts (S5 ST and S11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V-10
Load index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VI-15
Series 6.1, 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V-10
General material data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VI-15
Series 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V-11
Dimension deviation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VI-16
Series 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V-11
Dimension tolerance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VI-17
Series 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V-11
Drainage capacity/flow rate of Prolink belts . . . . VI-17
Series 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V-12
Series 13 ProSnap (PSP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V-12 6.4 Conversion table metric/imperial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VI-19

Series 14, 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V-13 6.5 Questionnaire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VI-20

Series 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V-13 Bent profiles – Specification sheet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . VI-21
Series 18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V-14 Application check list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VI-22
Small plugs for extruded or steel pins Spiral data form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VI-24
(Series 4.1 and 8). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V-14 6.6 Notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VI-27
Belts with more than one pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V-15 6.7 Legal notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VI-28

Alternativ option for belts with more than
one pin per hinge Series 4.1, 6.1, 8, 10, 13. . . . . . . . V-15
5.4 Installing a modular belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V-16
General belt travel direction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V-16
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V-17

I-7 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

I-8 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024
1 PRODUCT
PORTFOLIO

1.1 Modular belt series – Overview

1.2 Detailed series information
1.3 Retainer rings
1.4 Applications

I-9 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

1.1 MODULAR BELT SERIES – OVERVIEW

Siegling Prolink offers following different belt series to match your conveying needs.

Series Pitch Description

1 50 mm (2 in) Medium to heavy-duty belt for industrial conveying tasks. Closed hinge design.

2 25 mm (1 in) Light-duty belt for food, container handling and industrial use. Open hinge design.

3 50 mm (2 in) Medium-duty belt for food use. Easy to clean. Open hinge design.

Light to medium-duty belt for food and non-food use. Small pitch allows tight product transfers using nose bars
4.1 14 mm (0.55 in)
or sprockets. Open hinge design.

Light to medium-duty radius and spiral belt with stainless steel hinge pins. Exceptionally strong and versatile
5 25 mm (1 in)
side flexing belt with large open area.

Medium to heavy-duty belt designed specifically for tasks requiring the highest hygiene standards in meat, poultry
6.1 50 mm (2 in)
and seafood processing, including cutting, deboning and skinning lines. Easy to clean. Open hinge design.

Heavy-duty belt with superior pull strength and excellent durability for industrial applications. Designed for
7 40 mm (1.6 in)
heavy loads, such as worker belts for the automotive industry, vehicle conveying, etc. Closed hinge design.

8 25.4 mm (1 in) Medium to heavy-duty belt for industrial applications. Closed hinge design.

Medium to heavy-duty radius and spiral belt with stainless steel hinge pins. Exceptionally strong and versatile
9 50 mm (2 in)
side flexing belt with large open area.

10 25.4 mm (1 in) Light to medium-duty belt for hygiene-sensitive products. Easy to clean. Open hinge design.

Side flexing belt for conveying lightweight products. This lightweight belt has an exceptionally low turn radius
11 25 mm (1 in)
of 1.4 x belt width.

13 8 mm (0.31 in) Light-duty micro pitch belt for food and non-food tight-transfer nose bar use. Open hinge design.

Medium-duty belt for food and non-food use. Small pitch allows tight product transfers.
14 12.7 mm (0.5 in)
Bottom design optimized for nose bars. Strong closed hinge design.

15 12.7 mm (0.5 in) Light-duty belt for food applications utilizing 12.7 mm (0.5 in) nose bars

17 25.4 mm (1 in) Medium to heavy-duty belt for industrial applications. Closed hinge design.

18 25.4 mm (1 in) Light to medium-duty belt for food and non-food applications

Each belt series is offered in several different surfaces types such as Flat Top, Grid Top, Nub Top, Cone Top, Non skid and
Friction Top combined with variations in the open area. The availability of so many different options guarantees that specific
requirements can be met.

The following tables will help you choose the right series.

I-10 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

Belt surface options

Use/requirement Key Explanation

Standard FLT Flat top

conveying Smooth flat surface for general conveying
with no specific surface requirements.
Flat top surfaces can have openings.

Extra grip CTP Cone top

Small cones that grip soft products, such as meat,
to ensure efficient conveying, even in light incline
applications.

FRT Series 1 & 7 Series 5 & 11 Friction top

Rubber inlays create more friction between the
belt surface and the conveyed product. The style
and design of the rubber inlays vary by series.
Series 4.1 Series 8

Series 10 Series 18

Conveying people NSK Non skid

Specially designed non skid surface provides
extra grip and prevents slipping even in wet and
dirty environments.

SRS Slip resistant surface

Convenient surface for conveying people where
minimal slip resistance is required.

Superior product NPY Negative pyramid pattern

release and Reduced contact area for better release of soft
minimum surface products, e.g. sticky dough.
contact

RAT Radius top

Raised, rounded edges reduce the contact area to
ensure improved product release combined with
improved product cooling and reduced friction.

NTP Nub top

Small nubs significantly reduce the contact area
between the belt and the product. Superior surface
for non-stick uses, e.g. leafy vegetables.

RSA Reduced surface area

Reduced surface area will lift products to the surface
to ensure superior airflow

Continued on next page

I-11 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

1.1 MODULAR BELT SERIES – OVERVIEW

Continued from previous page

Use/requirement Key Explanation

Dewatering GRT Grid top

and cooling Flat surface with large openings (> 45 %)

FLT Flat top

Flat surface with large openings

RRB Raised rib

Used with finger transfer plates to eliminate
product tippage

CUT Curved top

Reduce movements of conveyed products. Can be
used with belt scrapper at the drive due to circumfer-
ence that’s created when flexing over sprockets.

Better transport LRB Lateral rib

incline For incline uses when conveying delicate products.

Reduced surface RTP A90 RTP A90

friction prepen- Roller Top A90 for cross shifting materials from or onto
dicular to belt a belt 90° from running direction
travel

Save floor space HDK High Deck

and allow Allows utilization of entire belt width and beyond
uninterrupted
side transfer

I-12 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

Available surfaces for each series

Series
Surface pattern
1 2 3 4.1 5 6.1 7 8 9 10 11 13 14 15 17 18
CTP (Cone top) ● ●
CUT (Curved top) ●
FLT (Flat top) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
FRT (Friction top) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
GRT (Grid top) ● ● ● ● ● ●
GRT G (Grid top guided) ● ● ●
GRT RG (Grid top reverse guided) ●
GRT HD (Grid top Hold Down caps) ●
GRT ST (Grid top strong) ●
HDK (High Deck) ●
LRB (Lateral rib) ● ●
NPY (Negative pyramid) ● ●
NSK (Non skid) ● ● ●
NTP (Nub top) * ● ● ● ● ●
RAT (Radius top) ●
RRB (Raised rib) ●
RSA (Reduced surface area) ●
SRS (Slip-resistant surface) ● ● ● ●
RTP (Roller top) ●

* on request

Available open percentage for each series

Series
Belt opening
1 2 3 4.1 5 6.1 7 8 9 10 11 13 14 15 17 18
0 % (Closed) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
1 % – 10 % ●
11 % – 20 % ● ● ●
21 % – 30 % ● ● ● ● ●
31 % – 40 % ● ● ● ● ●
> 40 % ● ● ● ● ● ●

The percentage indicates the relation of bright area to shadow, if the module is beamed with light

I-13 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

1.1 MODULAR BELT SERIES – OVERVIEW

Accessories available for each series

Series
Accessories
1 2 3 4.1 5 6.1 7 8 9 10 11 13 14 15 17 18
FLT GT (Flat top with guiding tabs) ●
Profiles ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
– Scooped molded ●
– Scooped bent * * * * * * * * * * *
Side guards ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Finger plates ●
Hold Down Tabs ● ● ●
Adjustable inner radius (F2 – F8) ●
Ball-bearing modules ●
PRR (Pin retained rollers) * * * * * ● ● ● * * ●
Wheelstopper ●
ProSnap ●

* on request

I-14 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

I-15 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024
1.1 MODULAR BELT SERIES – OVERVIEW

Type key*

Series ➀
Open area/Sprocket size ➁
Surface pattern ➂
Type ➃
Style ➄
Material ➅
Color ➆
Height/Diameter/Bore size and style ➇
Length/Width ➈
Cap material and color ➅ ➆

1 S6.1 - Z10 SPR PA LG SQ40mm (page I-102)

2 S4.1 - 0 NPY PP BL (page I-63)
3 S9 - 45 GRT SMR SG POM UC H25 W50 (page I-151)
4 S11 - 45 GRT CCW POM-CR WT (POM WT/BL) (page I-171)

* Not every product requires all characteristics (within the designation). If there is an irrelevant characteristic,
this category will be ignored and replaced by the following one.

1 3

2 4

I-16 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

Legend

➀ Series ➃ Type ➅ Material ➆ Color*

S1 … S18 BPU Bucket profile PA Polyamide AT Anthracite
Pin lock & belt edge Polyamide high BG Beige
CAP PA-HT
➁ Open area/Sprocket size sealing temperature BK Black
Percentage open area CCW Counter clockwise Polybutylentere- BL Blue
PBT
Format: xx CLP Clip phthalate
DB Dark blue
E.g. 20 = 20 % CM Center module PE Polyethylene
GN Green
For sprockets: number of teeth CW Clockwise PE-I PE impact resistant
LB Light blue
Format: “Z”xx PE-MD PE metal detectable
FPL Finger plate LG Light gray
E.g. Z12 = 12 teeth
HDT Hold Down Tab Wear & impact
PLX OR Orange
improved polymer
IDL Idler RE Red
➂ Surface pattern Polyoxymethylene
PIN Coupling rod POM TQ Turquoise
BSL Base module for slider (Polyacetal)
PMC Profile module center UC Uncolored
CTP Cone top POM-CR POM cut resistant
PMU Profile module universal WT White
CUT Curved top POM highly
PSP ProSnap POM-HC
FLT Flat top (smooth) conductive YL Yellow
RI High Grip insert POM-MD POM metal detectable
Friction top without
FRT-OG RTR Retaining ring
High Grip insert POM side modules + ➇H eight/Diameter/
POM-PE
Friction top SG Module with sideguard PE center modules Bore size and style
FRT(X)
(Design X) SLI Slider POM side modules + Height in mm (in)
POM-PP
GRT Grid top SML Side module, left PP center modules Format: Hxxx
HDK High Deck SMR Side module, right PP Polypropylene Pin diameter in mm (in)
PP-MD PP metal detectable Format: Dxxx
LRB Lateral rib Side module,
SMU Bore size: SQ (= square)
Modified module universal/both sides PP steam and hot
MOD PP-SW or RD (= round)
shape SPR Sprocket water resistant
either in mm or inches
NCL No cling TPL Turning panel, left Self-extinguishing
Format: SQxxMM or RDxxIN
PXX-HC highly conductive
NPY Negative pyramid TPR Turning panel, right
material
NSK Non skid UM Universal module ➈ Length/Width
R1 TPE 80 Shore A, PP
Non skid, WSC Wheel Stopper Center Pins Length in mm (in)
NSK2 EPDM 80 Shore A,
nonwoven variant WSS Wheel Stopper Side R2 Format: Lxxx
vulcanized
NTP Nub top (round studs) Module width in mm (in)
R3 TPE 70 Shore A, POM
PRR Pin Retained Rollers Format: Wxxx
➄ Style R4 TPE 86 Shore A, PP
RAT Radius top 1.7 1.7 collapse factor R5 TPE 52 Shore A, PP
RRB Raised rib 2.2 2.2 collapse factor R6 TPE 63 Shore A, POM
RSA Reduced surface area 2.2 collapse factor,
2.2 G R7 TPE 50 Shore A, PP
RTP Roller top guided R8 TPE 55 Shore A, PE
SRS Slip-resistant surface Angle 90° to
A90 SER Self-extinguishing TPE
conveying direction
SS Stainless steel
BT Bearing tab
Themoplastic
DR Double row sprocket TPC1
Copolyester
F1, F2, Supports the HACCP
Collapse factor modules -HA
F3 … concept
G Guided High Wear resistant
GT Guiding tabs -HW
material
HD Hold Down
Ixx xx = indent in mm
RG Reversed guided
* For each series’ standard colors please refer to the table of materials for
SG Side guard
each belt (chapter 1.2). A number of other colors are available on request.
SP Split sprocket
Colors can vary from the original due to the print, production processes
ST Strong or material used.

I-17 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

1.1 MODULAR BELT SERIES – OVERVIEW

Straight running belts

Pitch 8 mm (0.31 in)

S13 | 34 % open | Flat Top

Pitch 12.7 mm (0.5 in)

S14 | 0 % open | FLT with PRR

I-18 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

Pitch 14 mm (0.55 in)

S4.1 | 21 % open | Nub Top S4.1 | 0 % open | Friction Top 1

Pitch 25 mm (1 in)

Continued on next page

I-19 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

1.1 MODULAR BELT SERIES – OVERVIEW

Straight running belts

Pitch 25 mm (1 in)

S8 | 25 % open | Radius Top S2 | 0 % open | Friction Top 1 S8.1 | 0 % open | Slip-resistant

I-20 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

Pitch 40 mm (1.6 in)

S7 | 0 % open | Flat Top S7 | 6 % open | Flat Top S7 | 0 % open | Slip-resistant

S7 | 0 % open | Non Skid S7 | 6 % open | Non Skid S7 | 0 % open | Friction Top 1

S7 | 0 % open | FLT with PRR

I-21 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

1.1 MODULAR BELT SERIES – OVERVIEW

Straight running belts

Pitch 50 mm (2 in)

S6.1 | 0 % open | Nub Top S1 | 0 % open | Slip-resistant S1 | 0 % open | Non Skid

S1 | 0 % open | Friction Top 1 S6.1 | 0 % open | FLT with PRR

I-22 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

Side flexing belts
Pitch 25 mm (1 in)

S5 | 45 % open | Bearing Tab Module

I-23 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

1.1 MODULAR BELT SERIES – OVERVIEW

Side flexing belts

Pitch 50 mm (2 in)

I-24 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

1.2 DETAILED SERIES INFORMATION

In this chapter each belt type is described in detail with all There is a dedicated section for each individual belt series.
necessary information such as surface type, opening per- An introduction page provides the general features of the
centage, dimensions, stock availability and specific conveyor series, followed by single page presentations of all existing
design parameters. types of the series. At the end of the section for each series,
the available accessories are shown.

SERIES 1 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink

modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 50 mm (1.97 in)

S1-0 FRT1 | 0 % Opening | Friction top (Design 1)

Closed surface | Friction top with replaceable rubber pads for increased grip
Belt type naming

p Variant specific dimensions [mm (in)]

hm 20 (0.79)

dpin
Belt-specific properties,
hpin

picture and drawing

53.1 (2.09)
Winc
Wmin

Belt dimensions
p dpin hm hpin hs Wmin Winc Wtol
Width
Minimum flex radii1)
Main dimensions,
Pin Width Width r1

design recommendations
Pitch Pin Ø Thickness Height tolerance r2 r3 r4 r5
position min. Increment Cc x WB
[%]
mm 50.0 6.0 16.0 8.0 3.0 250.0 10.0 ±0.2 – 50.0 100.0 150.0 50.0
inch 1.97 0.24 0.63 0.31 0.12 9.84 0.39 ±0.2 – 1.97 3.94 5.91 1.97

Available standard materials 3)

Belt Pin Rubber

Nominal belt pull,
straight
Weight
Width
deviation
Temperature Certificates2)
Belt materials and color,
Material
POM
Color
WT
Material
PBT
Color
UC
Material
R2
Color
BK
[N/mm] [lb/ft]
40 2741
[kg/m2] [lb/ft2]
15.0
[%]
3.07 -0.75 -45/90
[°C] [°F]
-49/194
FDA
–
EU
– basic physical properties,
compliances

BK (Black), UC (Uncolored), WT (White)

All measurements and tolerances apply at 21 °C; for temperature deviations please see Prolink manual chapter 4.4 “Temperature influence“.
All imperial dimensions (inches) are rounded off.
1) Flex radii: r1 = side flex, r2 = front flex on roller, r3 = back flex on load bearing roller, r4 = back flex on Hold Down shoe, r5 = back flex on roller
2) Complies with FDA 21 CFR | Complies with (EU) 10/2011 and (EC) 1935/2004 regulations regarding the raw materials used and the migration
thresholds | Complies with Japanese MHLW Notification 370
● = available | – = not available | empty cells = not tested
3) More materials and colors on request

I-32 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

Note: Please be aware that belt widths can be achieved and are calculated using minimum belt widths and multiples of
width increments only. Furthermore, belt widths vary depending on the choice of material.
All dimensions are measured at 21° Celsius (69.8° Fahrenheit). Always consider the thermal expansion coefficient of the
material. Belt widths change with temperature. For actual belt widths under your specific operating conditions, request
information from your local Forbo Movement Systems representative. More information is given in Section 4.4.

Note: Dimensions r1 to r5 refer to the minimum design radius of belt turns and support rollers.
Dimensions are as follows: r1 = side flex radius, r2 = front flex on roller, r3 = back flex on load bearing roller,
r4 = back flex on hold-down shoe, r5 = back flex on roller. For further explanations see “Minimum design radii“ in
Appendix 6.3.

Dimensions in mm and inches (in). All imperial dimensions (inches) are rounded off.

I-25 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

1.2 DETAILED SERIES INFORMATION

siegling prolink
modular belts

SERIES 1
Straight running belts
Pitch 50 mm (1.97 in)

I-26 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 1 | OVERVIEW siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belts | Pitch 50 mm (1.97 in)

Belts for medium to heavy-duty industrial conveying applications

Side view scale 1:1 Available surface pattern and opening area

S1-0 FLT
Closed, smooth surface

50 (1.97)
S1-0 SRS
Closed, slip-resistant surface

Design characteristics
– Narrow, closed hinge design S1-18 FLT
provides high belt pull capacity Open (18 %), smooth surface

– Rigid module design makes belt

suitable for long conveyors S1-0 NSK
– Closed solid edge design Closed surface and non skid pattern

Basic data S1-0 FRT1

Pitch 50 mm (1.97 in) Closed surface with friction top

Belt width min. 50 mm (1.97 in)

250 mm (9.8 in) for belts with FRT-pattern
(side modules only available without
FRT-pattern)
Width increments 10 mm (0.4 in)
Hinge pins 6 mm (0.24 in) made of plastic (PBT, PP, PE).
One-piece up to a belt width of 1200 mm
(47 in).

Sprockets Profiles Side guards

in different sizes with round in different heights and designs in different heights for retention
or square bore for inclines of bulk products

I-27 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 1 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 50 mm (1.97 in)

S1-0 FLT | 0 % Opening | Flat top

Closed, smooth surface | Flat top surface

dpin

hpin
Winc
Wmin
Belt dimensions
p dpin hm hpin hs Wmin Winc Wtol Minimum flex radii1)
Width
Pin Width Width r1
Pitch Pin Ø Thickness Height tolerance r2 r3 r4 r5
position min. Increment Cc x WB
[%]
mm 50.0 6.0 16.0 8.0 0.0 50.0 10.0 ±0.2 – 50.0 100.0 150.0 50.0
inch 1.97 0.24 0.63 0.31 0.0 1.97 0.39 ±0.2 – 1.97 3.94 5.91 1.97

Available standard materials 3)

Nominal belt pull, Width
Belt Pin Weight Temperature Certificates2)
straight deviation
Material Color Material Color [N/mm] [lb/ft] [kg/m2] [lb/ft2] [%] [°C] [°F] FDA EU
PE WT PE UC 18 1233 10.1 2.07 -0.35 -70/65 -94/149 ● ●
POM WT PBT UC 40 2741 14.4 2.95 -0.75 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
POM AT PBT UC 40 2741 14.4 2.95 -0.75 -45/90 -49/194
PP WT PP WT 30 2056 9.4 1.93 0.0 5/100 41/212 ● ●
PP AT PP WT 30 2056 9.4 1.93 0.0 5/100 41/212

AT (Anthracite), BK (Black), UC (Uncolored), WT (White)

All measurements and tolerances apply at 21 °C; for temperature deviations please see Prolink manual chapter 4.4 “Temperature influence“.
All imperial dimensions (inches) are rounded off.
1) Flex radii: r1 = side flex, r2 = front flex on roller, r3 = back flex on load bearing roller, r4 = back flex on Hold Down shoe, r5 = back flex on roller
2) C omplies with FDA 21 CFR | Complies with (EU) 10/2011 and (EC) 1935/2004 regulations regarding the raw materials used and the migration
thresholds | Complies with Japanese MHLW Notification 370
● = available | – = not available | empty cells = not tested
3) More materials and colors on request

I-28 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 1 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 50 mm (1.97 in)

S1-0 SRS | 0 % Opening | Slip-resistant surface

Closed surface | Slip-resistant surface, pleasant to walk and kneel on

dpin

Mold to order belts 3)

Nominal belt pull, Width
Belt Pin Weight Temperature Certificates2)
straight deviation
Material Color Material Color [N/mm] [lb/ft] [kg/m2] [lb/ft2] [%] [°C] [°F] FDA EU
POM AT PBT UC 40 2741 14.4 2.95 -0.75 -45/90 -49/194
POM-HC AT PBT UC 40 2741 14.8 3.03 -0.75 -45/90 -49/194 – –
PXX-HC BK PBT UC 20 1370 10.3 2.11 0.0 5/100 41/212 – –

AT (Anthracite), BK (Black), UC (Uncolored)

All measurements and tolerances apply at 21 °C; for temperature deviations please see Prolink manual chapter 4.4 “Temperature influence“.
All imperial dimensions (inches) are rounded off.
1) Flex radii: r1 = side flex, r2 = front flex on roller, r3 = back flex on load bearing roller, r4 = back flex on Hold Down shoe, r5 = back flex on roller
2) C omplies with FDA 21 CFR | Complies with (EU) 10/2011 and (EC) 1935/2004 regulations regarding the raw materials used and the migration
thresholds | Complies with Japanese MHLW Notification 370
● = available | – = not available | empty cells = not tested
3) More materials and colors on request

I-29 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 1 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 50 mm (1.97 in)

S1-18 FLT | 18 % Opening | Flat top

Open version (18 %) for excellent air circulation and drainage | 66 % contact area (Largest opening: 4.6 x 6 mm/0.18 x 0.24 in) |
Flat top surface | Smooth surface

p Variant specific dimensions [mm (in)]

4.6 (0.18)
dpin

hpin
6 (0.24)

Winc
Wmin

Available standard materials 3)

UC (Uncolored), WT (White)

I-30 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 1 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 50 mm (1.97 in)

S1-0 NSK | 0 % Opening | Non skid

Closed surface | Non skid surface for increased safety when walking on belt

p Variant specific dimensions [mm (in)]

hs
hm

10 (0.39)
dpin

hpin
Winc
Wmin

Available standard materials 3)

Nominal belt pull, Width
Belt Pin Weight Temperature Certificates2)
straight deviation
Material Color Material Color [N/mm] [lb/ft] [kg/m2] [lb/ft2] [%] [°C] [°F] FDA EU
POM AT PBT UC 40 2741 16.0 3.28 -0.75 -45/90 -49/194
POM-HC AT PBT UC 40 2741 16.0 3.28 -0.75 -45/90 -49/194 – –
POM YL PBT UC 40 2741 16.0 3.28 -0.75 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●

AT (Anthracite), UC (Uncolored), YL (Yellow)

All measurements and tolerances apply at 21 °C; for temperature deviations please see Prolink manual chapter 4.4 “Temperature influence“.
All imperial dimensions (inches) are rounded off.
1) Flex radii: r1 = side flex, r2 = front flex on roller, r3 = back flex on load bearing roller, r4 = back flex on Hold Down shoe, r5 = back flex on roller
2) C omplies with FDA 21 CFR | Complies with (EU) 10/2011 and (EC) 1935/2004 regulations regarding the raw materials used and the migration
thresholds | Complies with Japanese MHLW Notification 370
● = available | – = not available | empty cells = not tested
3) More materials and colors on request

I-31 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 1 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 50 mm (1.97 in)

S1-0 FRT1 | 0 % Opening | Friction top (Design 1)

Closed surface | Friction top with replaceable rubber pads for increased grip

p Variant specific dimensions [mm (in)]

hs
hm 20 (0.79)

dpin

hpin

53.1 (2.09)
Winc
Wmin

Available standard materials 3)

BK (Black), UC (Uncolored), WT (White)

I-32 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 1 | SPROCKETS siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 50 mm (1.97 in)

S1 SPR | Sprockets

D0 Wspr

Main dimensions
Sprocket size
Z6 Z8 Z10 Z12 Z16
(Number of teeth)
mm 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0
Wspr
inch 1.57 1.57 1.57 1.57 1.57
mm 100.0 130.8 161.8 193.2 256.3
D0
inch 3.94 5.15 6.37 7.61 10.09
mm 42.0 57.4 72.9 88.6 120.1
Amax
inch 1.65 2.26 2.87 3.49 4.73
mm 36.4 53.0 69.3 85.6 117.8
Amin
inch 1.43 2.09 2.73 3.37 4.64

Shaft bores (● = Round, ■ = Square)

25 mm ●
30 mm ● ● ●
40 mm ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
60 mm ■ ■ ■ ■
80 mm ■ ■

1 inch ● ● ●
1.5 inch ■ ■ ■ ■
2.5 inch ■ ■

Material: POM, Color: UC

UC (Uncolored)

I-33 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 1 | PROFILES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 50 mm (1.97 in)

S1-0 FLT PMC

Flat top surface for dry products | No cling surface to improve release of wet and sticky products

Basic data
Height (h)
Material Color 50 mm 100 mm
2 inch 4 inch
PE WT ● ●
POM AT ●
POM WT ● ●
PP WT ● ●

Molded width: 200 mm (7.9 in)

20 (0.79) (minimum indent)

10 (0.39) (positioning increment)

Standard configuration S1-0 FLT PMC

AT (Anthracite), WT (White)

I-34 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 1 | PROFILES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 50 mm (1.97 in)

S1-18 FLT PMC

Open verson (18 %) base module for drainage | No cling surface to improve release of wet and sticky products

Basic data
Height (h)
Material Color 50 mm 100 mm
2 inch 4 inch
PE UC ● ●
POM WT ● ●
PP WT ● ●

Molded width: 200 mm (7.9 in)

20 (0.79) (minimum indent)

10 (0.39) (positioning increment)

Standard configuration S1-18 FLT PMC

UC (Uncolored), WT (White)

I-35 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 1 | SIDE GUARDS siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 50 mm (1.97 in)

S1 SG | Side guards
For retention of bulk products

h
Recommended running direction

Basic data
Height (h)
Material Color 25 mm 50 mm 75 mm 100 mm
1 inch 2 inch 3 inch 4 inch
PE LB ● ● ● ●
PE WT ● ● ● ●
PE-MD BL ● ● ●
PP LB ● ● ● ●
PP WT ● ● ● ●

5 (0.2) (positioning increment)

10 (0.39) (minimum indent)

BL (Blue), LB (Light blue), WT (White)

I-36 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

I-37 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024
1.2 DETAILED SERIES INFORMATION

siegling prolink
modular belts

SERIES 2
Straight running belts
Pitch 25 mm (0.98 in)

I-38 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 2 | OVERVIEW siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belts | Pitch 25 mm (0.98 in)

Belts for light-duty food and container handling applications

Side view scale 1:1 Available surface pattern and opening area

S2-0 FLT
Closed, smooth surface
25 (0.98)

Design characteristics S2-0 FRT1

– Hinges that open wide provides Closed surface with friction top
an easy-to-clean belt design
– Low belt weight reduces energy consumption
– Open edge design on flat top versions for S2-12 FLT
unhindered drainage and closed edge design Open (12 %), smooth surface
on grid top and raised rib versions

Basic data S2-57 GRT

Pitch 25 mm (0.98) Open (57 %), grid top surface

Belt width min. 50 mm (1.97 in)

100 mm (3.9 in) for belts with FRT-pattern
Width increments 16.66 mm (0.7 in) S2-57 RRB
Hinge pins 5 mm (0.2 in) Open (57 %), raised rib surface
Made of plastic (PBT, PP, PE)

Sprockets Profiles Side guards Finger plates

in different sizes with round in different heights and designs in different heights for retention For raised rib types
or square bore for inclines of bulk products

I-39 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 2 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 25 mm (0.98 in)

S2-0 FLT | 0 % Opening | Flat top

Closed, smooth surface | Flat top surface

dpin

hpin
Winc
Wmin
Belt dimensions
p dpin hm hpin hs Wmin Winc Wtol Minimum flex radii1)
Width
Pin Width Width r1
Pitch Pin Ø Thickness Height tolerance r2 r3 r4 r5
position min. Increment Cc x WB
[%]
mm 25.0 5.0 9.0 4.5 0.0 50.0 16.7 ±0.2 – 25.0 50.0 75.0 25.0
inch 0.98 0.2 0.35 0.18 0.0 1.97 0.66 ±0.2 – 0.98 1.97 2.95 0.98

Available standard materials 3)

Nominal belt pull, Width
Belt Pin Weight Temperature Certificates2)
straight deviation
Material Color Material Color [N/mm] [lb/ft] [kg/m2] [lb/ft2] [%] [°C] [°F] FDA EU
PE WT PE UC 3 206 3.9 0.8 -0.2 -70/65 -94/149 ● ●
POM WT PBT UC 7 480 5.7 1.17 -0.3 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
POM BL PBT BL 7 480 5.7 1.17 -0.3 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
PP WT PP WT 5 343 3.7 0.76 0.25 5/100 41/212 ● ●
PP BL PP BL 5 343 3.7 0.76 0.25 5/100 41/212 ● ●

Mold to width available in: 50 mm (1.97 in), 100 mm (3.94 in), 200 mm (7.87 in)

BL (Blue), UC (Uncolored), WT (White)

All measurements and tolerances apply at 21 °C; for temperature deviations please see Prolink manual chapter 4.4 “Temperature influence“.
All imperial dimensions (inches) are rounded off.
1) Flex radii: r1 = side flex, r2 = front flex on roller, r3 = back flex on load bearing roller, r4 = back flex on Hold Down shoe, r5 = back flex on roller
2) C omplies with FDA 21 CFR | Complies with (EU) 10/2011 and (EC) 1935/2004 regulations regarding the raw materials used and the migration
thresholds | Complies with Japanese MHLW Notification 370
● = available | – = not available | empty cells = not tested
3) More materials and colors on request

I-40 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 2 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 25 mm (0.98 in)

S2-0 FRT1 | 0 % Opening | Friction top (Design 1)

Closed surface | Friction top provides increased grip

p Variant specific dimensions [mm (in)]

hs
12.5 (0.49) 12.5 (0.49)
hm

dpin

4 (0.16)
hpin
Winc
Wmin

8 (0.31)
Belt dimensions
p dpin hm hpin hs Wmin Winc Wtol Minimum flex radii1)
Width
Pin Width Width r1
Pitch Pin Ø Thickness Height tolerance r2 r3 r4 r5
position min. Increment Cc x WB
[%]
mm 25.0 5.0 9.0 4.5 1.4 100.0 16.7 ±0.2 – 25.0 50.0 75.0 25.0
inch 0.98 0.2 0.35 0.18 0.06 3.94 0.66 ±0.2 – 0.98 1.97 2.95 0.98

Available standard materials 3)

Mold to width available in: 100 mm (3.94 in)

TQ (Turqouise), UC (Uncolored), WT (White)

I-41 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 2 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 25 mm (0.98 in)

S2-12 FLT | 12 % Opening | Flat top

Open version (12 %) for excellent air circulation and drainage | 83 % contact area (Largest opening: 5 x 3 mm/0.2 x 0.12 in) |
Flat top surface | Smooth surface

p
Variant specific dimensions [mm (in)]

dpin 3 (0.12)

5 (0.2)
hpin
Winc
Wmin

Available standard materials 3)

Nominal belt pull, Width
Belt Pin Weight Temperature Certificates2)
straight deviation
Material Color Material Color [N/mm] [lb/ft] [kg/m2] [lb/ft2] [%] [°C] [°F] FDA EU
PE WT PE UC 3 206 3.7 0.76 0.0 -70/65 -94/149 ● ●
POM WT PBT UC 7 480 5.4 1.11 -0.1 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
PP WT PP WT 5 343 3.5 0.72 0.2 5/100 41/212 ● ●

Mold to width available in: 50 mm (1.97 in), 100 mm (3.94 in), 200 mm (7.87 in)

UC (Uncolored), WT (White)

All measurements and tolerances apply at 21 °C; for temperature deviations please see Prolink manual chapter 4.4 “Temperature influence“.
All imperial dimensions (inches) are rounded off.
1) Flex radii: r1 = side flex, r2 = front flex on roller, r3 = back flex on load bearing roller, r4 = back flex on Hold Down shoe, r5 = back flex on roller
2) C omplies with FDA 21 CFR | Complies with (EU) 10/2011 and (EC) 1935/2004 regulations regarding the raw materials used and the migration
thresholds | Complies with Japanese MHLW Notification 370
● = available | – = not available | empty cells = not tested
3) More materials and colors on request

I-42 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 2 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 25 mm (0.98 in)

S2-57 GRT | 57 % Opening | Grid top

Large open area (57 %) allows minimal product contact | 37 % contact area | For excellent air circulation and drainage |
Grid top surface

p Variant specific dimensions [mm (in)]

hm 10.5 (0.41)

dpin

hpin
Winc
Wmin

8.7 (0.34)
Belt dimensions
p dpin hm hpin hs Wmin Winc Wtol Minimum flex radii1)
Width
Pin Width Width r1
Pitch Pin Ø Thickness Height tolerance r2 r3 r4 r5
position min. Increment Cc x WB
[%]
mm 25.0 5.0 9.0 4.5 0.0 50.0 16.7 ±0.2 – 25.0 50.0 75.0 25.0
inch 0.98 0.2 0.35 0.18 0.0 1.97 0.66 ±0.2 – 0.98 1.97 2.95 0.98

Available standard materials 3)

Nominal belt pull, Width
Belt Pin Weight Temperature Certificates2)
straight deviation
Material Color Material Color [N/mm] [lb/ft] [kg/m2] [lb/ft2] [%] [°C] [°F] FDA EU
PE UC PE UC 3 206 3.4 0.7 -0.2 -70/65 -94/149 ● ●
PE DB PE DB 3 206 3.4 0.7 -0.2 -70/65 -94/149 ● ●
POM UC PBT UC 7 480 4.8 0.98 -0.2 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
POM BL PBT BL 7 480 4.8 0.98 -0.2 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
PP WT PP WT 5 343 3.3 0.68 0.2 5/100 41/212 ● ●
PP BL PP BL 5 343 3.3 0.68 0.2 5/100 41/212 ● ●

Mold to order belts

PA-HT BK PA-HT BK 5 343 4.0 0.82 1.3 -30/155 -22/311 – –

BK (Black), BL (Blue), DB (Dark blue), UC (Uncolored), WT (White)

All measurements and tolerances apply at 21 °C; for temperature deviations please see Prolink manual chapter 4.4 “Temperature influence“.
All imperial dimensions (inches) are rounded off.
1) Flex radii: r1 = side flex, r2 = front flex on roller, r3 = back flex on load bearing roller, r4 = back flex on Hold Down shoe, r5 = back flex on roller
2) C omplies with FDA 21 CFR | Complies with (EU) 10/2011 and (EC) 1935/2004 regulations regarding the raw materials used and the migration
thresholds | Complies with Japanese MHLW Notification 370
● = available | – = not available | empty cells = not tested
3) More materials and colors on request

I-43 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 2 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 25 mm (0.98 in)

S2-57 RRB | 57 % Opening | Raised rib

Large open area (57 %) for excellent air circulation and drainage | Raised ribs for minimal product contact (28 % contact area)
and smooth product transfer using finger transfer plates

Variant specific dimensions [mm (in)]

hs
10.5 (0.41)
hm

dpin

hpin
Winc

8.7 (0.34)
Wmin

Available standard materials 3)

Mold to order belts

PE PE 3 206 4.3 0.88 -0.2 -70/65 -94/149

BL (Blue), WT (White)

I-44 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 2 | SPROCKETS siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 25 mm (0.98 in)

S2 SPR | Sprockets

A
D0 Wspr

Main dimensions
Sprocket size
Z6 Z11 Z19 Z20
(Number of teeth)
mm 25.0 40.0 40.0 40.0
Wspr
inch 0.98 1.57 1.57 1.57
mm 50.4 89.5 153.1 161.1
D0
inch 1.98 3.52 6.03 6.34
mm 20.7 40.2 72.1 76.0
Amax
inch 0.81 1.58 2.84 2.99
mm 17.9 38.6 71.1 75.1
Amin
inch 0.71 1.52 2.80 2.96

Shaft bores (● = Round, ■ = Square)

25 mm ●/■ ●
30 mm ●
40 mm ■ ■ ■
60 mm ■
80 mm ■

0.75 inch ●
1 inch ●/■ ●/■
1.5 inch ■ ■
2.5 inch ■

Material: POM, Color: UC

UC (Uncolored)

I-45 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 2 | PROFILES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 25 mm (0.98 in)

S2-0 FLT PMU

Flat top surface for dry products

h
Basic data
Height (h)
Material Color 25 mm 50 mm
1 inch 2 inch
PE WT ● ●
POM BL ● ●
POM WT ● ●
PP BL ● ●
PP GN ●
PP WT ● ●

Molded width: 200 mm (7.9 in)

33.33 (1.31) (minimum indent)
16.66 (0.66) (positioning increment)

Standard configuration S2-0 FLT PMU Indent configuration S2-0 FLT PMU

BL (Blue), GN (Green), WT (White)

I-46 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 2 | PROFILES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 25 mm (0.98 in)

S2-57 GRT PMC

Open version (57 %) base module for good drainage

h
Basic data
Height (h)
Material Color 25 mm 50 mm
1 inch 2 inch
PE UC ● ●
POM BL ● ●
POM UC ● ●
PP BL ● ●
PP WT ● ●

50 (1.97) (minimum indent)

16.66 (0.66) (positioning increment)

Standard configuration S2-57 GRT PMC Indent configuration S2-57 GRT PMC

BL (Blue), UC (Uncolored), WT (White)

I-47 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 2 | SIDE GUARDS siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 25 mm (0.98 in)

S2 SG | Side guards
For retention of bulk products

h
Recommended running direction

Basic data
Height (h)
Material Color 25 mm 50 mm
1 inch 2 inch
PE BL ● ●
PE WT ● ●
PP BL ● ●
PP WT ● ●

8.33 (0.33) (positioning increment)

4 (0.16) (minimum indent)

BL (Blue), WT (White)

I-48 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

I-49 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024
1.2 DETAILED SERIES INFORMATION

siegling prolink
modular belts

SERIES 3
Straight running belts
Pitch 50 mm (1.97 in)

I-50 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 3 | OVERVIEW siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belts | Pitch 50 mm (1.97 in)

Belts for medium-duty food applications

Side view scale 1:1 Available surface pattern and opening area

S3-0 FLT
Closed, smooth surface

50 (1.97)

S3-16 FLT
Open (16 %), smooth surface
Design characteristics
– Hinges that open wide, combined
with smooth, flat channels on the underside S3-0 LRB
provides an easy-to-clean belt design Closed surface with lateral ribs

– Open egde design for unhindered drainage

S3-16 LRB
Basic data Open (16 %) surface with lateral ribs
Pitch 50 mm (1.97 in)
Belt width min. 40 mm (1.6 in)
Width increments 20 mm (0.8 in)
Hinge pins 6 mm (0.24 in) made of plastic (PBT, PP, PE).
One-piece up to a belt width of 1200 mm
(47 in).

Sprockets Profiles Side guards

in different sizes with round in different heights and designs in different heights for retention
or square bore for inclines of bulk products

I-51 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 3 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 50 mm (1.97 in)

S3-0 FLT | 0 % Opening | Flat top

Closed, smooth surface | Flat top surface

dpin

hpin
Winc
Wmin
Belt dimensions
p dpin hm hpin hs Wmin Winc Wtol Minimum flex radii1)
Width
Pin Width Width r1
Pitch Pin Ø Thickness Height tolerance r2 r3 r4 r5
position min. Increment Cc x WB
[%]
mm 50.0 6.0 16.0 8.0 0.0 40.0 20.0 ±0.2 – 50.0 100.0 150.0 50.0
inch 1.97 0.24 0.63 0.31 0.0 1.57 0.79 ±0.2 – 1.97 3.94 5.91 1.97

Available standard materials 3)

Nominal belt pull, Width
Belt Pin Weight Temperature Certificates2)
straight deviation
Material Color Material Color [N/mm] [lb/ft] [kg/m2] [lb/ft2] [%] [°C] [°F] FDA EU
PE WT PE UC 6 411 7.5 1.54 -0.2 -70/65 -94/149 ● ●
PP WT PP WT 12 822 7.1 1.45 0.5 5/100 41/212 ● ●
PP BL PP WT 12 822 7.1 1.45 0.5 5/100 41/212 ● ●

Mold to order belts

POM WT PBT UC 16 1096 10.1 2.07 -0.3 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●

Mold to width available in: 40 mm (1.57 in), 100 mm (3.94 in), 200 mm (7.87 in)

BL (Blue), UC (Uncolored), WT (White)

I-52 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 3 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 50 mm (1.97 in)

S3-16 FLT | 16 % Opening | Flat top

Open version (16 %) for excellent air circulation and drainage | 77 % contact area (Largest opening: 5 x 16.3 mm/0.2 x 0.64 in) |
Smooth surface

p Variant specific dimensions [mm (in)]

5 (0.2)
16.3 (0.64)
dpin

hpin
Winc
Wmin

Available standard materials 3)

Mold to order belts

POM WT PBT UC 16 1096 9.5 1.95 -0.3 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●

Mold to width available in: 40 mm (1.57 in), 100 mm (3.94 in), 200 mm (7.87 in)

UC (Uncolored), WT (White)

All measurements and tolerances apply at 21 °C; for temperature deviations please see Prolink manual chapter 4.4 “Temperature influence“.
All imperial dimensions (inches) are rounded off.
1) Flex radii: r1 = side flex, r2 = front flex on roller, r3 = back flex on load bearing roller, r4 = back flex on Hold Down shoe, r5 = back flex on roller
2) C omplies with FDA 21 CFR | Complies with (EU) 10/2011 and (EC) 1935/2004 regulations regarding the raw materials used and the migration
thresholds | Complies with Japanese MHLW Notification 370
● = available | – = not available | empty cells = not tested
3) More materials and colors on request

I-53 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 3 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 50 mm (1.97 in)

S3-0 LRB | 0 % Opening | Lateral rib

Closed surface | Lateral ribs for better grip in small inclines and gentle conveying of delicate products | 14 % contact area

Variant specific dimensions [mm (in)]

hs
p

dpin 3.5 (0.14)

hpin
24.5 (0.96) 18.5 (0.73)

Winc
Wmin

Mold to order belts 3)

Nominal belt pull, Width
Belt Pin Weight Temperature Certificates2)
straight deviation
Material Color Material Color [N/mm] [lb/ft] [kg/m2] [lb/ft2] [%] [°C] [°F] FDA EU
POM WT PBT UC 16 1096 10.3 2.11 -0.3 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
PE WT PE UC 6 411 7.6 1.56 -0.2 -70/65 -94/149 ● ●

Mold to width available in: 200 mm (7.87 in)

UC (Uncolored), WT (White)

All measurements and tolerances apply at 21 °C; for temperature deviations please see Prolink manual chapter 4.4 “Temperature influence“.
All imperial dimensions (inches) are rounded off.
1) Flex radii: r1 = side flex, r2 = front flex on roller, r3 = back flex on load bearing roller, r4 = back flex on Hold Down shoe, r5 = back flex on roller
2) C omplies with FDA 21 CFR | Complies with (EU) 10/2011 and (EC) 1935/2004 regulations regarding the raw materials used and the migration
thresholds | Complies with Japanese MHLW Notification 370
● = available | – = not available | empty cells = not tested
3) More materials and colors on request

I-54 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 3 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 50 mm (1.97 in)

S3-16 LRB | 16 % Opening | Lateral rib

Open lateral rib version (16 %) for excellent air circulation and drainage | Lateral ribbing for better grip in inclined conveying |
14 % contact area (Largest opening: 5 x 16.3 mm/0.2 x 0.64 in)

Variant specific dimensions [mm (in)]

hs
p

3.5 (0.14)
hm
24.5 (0.96) 18.5 (0.73)
dpin

hpin

5 (0.2)
16.3 (0.64)

Winc
Wmin

Mold to order belts 3)

Nominal belt pull, Width
Belt Pin Weight Temperature Certificates2)
straight deviation
Material Color Material Color [N/mm] [lb/ft] [kg/m2] [lb/ft2] [%] [°C] [°F] FDA EU
PP WT PP WT 12 822 6.6 1.35 0.05 5/100 41/212 ● ●
PE WT PE UC 6 411 7.4 1.52 -0.2 -70/65 -94/149 ● ●
PA* LG SS 16 1096 12.4 2.54 0.70 -40/120 -40/248 ● ●

Mold to width available in: 200 mm (7.87 in)

* Values valid for dry applications (RH <50 %). Belts in PA material will absorb water in wet environments, causing them to expand and reduce the
nominal belt pull capacity.

LG (Light gray), UC (Uncolored), WT (White)

All measurements and tolerances apply at 21 °C; for temperature deviations please see Prolink manual chapter 4.4 “Temperature influence“.
All imperial dimensions (inches) are rounded off.
1) Flex radii: r1 = side flex, r2 = front flex on roller, r3 = back flex on load bearing roller, r4 = back flex on Hold Down shoe, r5 = back flex on roller
2) C omplies with FDA 21 CFR | Complies with (EU) 10/2011 and (EC) 1935/2004 regulations regarding the raw materials used and the migration
thresholds | Complies with Japanese MHLW Notification 370
● = available | – = not available | empty cells = not tested
3) More materials and colors on request

I-55 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 3 | SPROCKETS siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 50 mm (1.97 in)

S3 SPR | Sprockets

D0 Wspr

Shaft bores (● = Round, ■ = Square)

25 mm ●
30 mm ● ● ●
40 mm ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
60 mm ■ ■ ■ ■
80 mm ■ ■

1 inch ● ● ●
1.5 inch ■ ■ ■ ■
2.5 inch ■ ■

Material: POM, Color: UC

UC (Uncolored)

I-56 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 3 | PROFILES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 50 mm (1.97 in)

S3-0 FLT PMU

Flat top surface for dry products

h
Basic data
Height (h)
Material Color 25 mm 50 mm 75 mm 100 mm
1 inch 2 inch 3 inch 4 inch
PE WT ● ● ● ●
PP BL ● ● ● ●
PP WT ● ● ● ●

Molded width: 200 mm (7.9 in)

40 (1.57) (minimum indent)

20 (0.79) (positioning increment)

Standard configuration S3-0 FLT PMU Indent configuration S3-0 FLT PMU

BL (Blue), WT (White)

I-57 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 3 | SIDE GUARDS siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 50 mm (1.97 in)

S3 SG | Side guards
For retention of bulk products

h
Recommended running direction

Basic data
Height (h)
Material Color 25 mm 50 mm 75 mm 100 mm
1 inch 2 inch 3 inch 4 inch
PE LB ● ● ● ●
PE WT ● ● ● ●
PE-MD BL ● ● ●
PP LB ● ● ● ●
PP WT ● ● ● ●

10 (0.39) (positioning increment)

10 (0.39) (minimum indent)

BL (Blue), LB (Light blue), WT (White)

I-58 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

I-59 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024
1.2 DETAILED SERIES INFORMATION

siegling prolink
modular belts

SERIES 4.1
Straight running belts
Pitch 14 mm (0.55 in)

TE D
PATEN

I-60 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 4.1 | OVERVIEW siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belts | Pitch 14 mm (0.55 in)

Belts for light to medium-duty food and non-food applications

Side view scale 1:1 Available surface pattern and opening area

S4.1-0 FLT
Closed, smooth surface
14 (0.55)

S4.1-0 NPY
Design characteristics Closed surface
– Small pitch belt for applications with negative pyramid pattern
requiring small transfer gaps
– Hinges that open wide and flat channels S4.1-0 FRT1
on the underside ensure the belt is easy to clean Closed surface with friction top
– Unique sprocket design with rounded tooth edges
provides ideal load distribution
– Wide sprocket teeth ensure superior S4.1-21 FLT
sprocket engagement and strength Open (21 %), smooth surface

Basic data S4.1-21 NTP

Pitch 14 mm (0.55 in) Open (21 %) surface with round studs.
Version available without round studs
Belt width min. 25 mm (0.98) at the side (25 mm indent)
Width increments 12.5 mm (0.5 in)
Hinge pins 5 mm (0.2 in) made of plastic
(PBT, PP, PE, POM-MD).
One-piece up to a belt width of
1200 mm (47 in). NSF-compliant from these certified Forbo plants:
Huntersville (USA), Maharashtra (India), Malacky (Slovakia),
Sydney/NSW (Australia), Pinghu (China), Shizuoka (Japan),
Tlalnepantla (Mexico)

Sprockets Profiles
in different sizes with round in different heights and designs
or square bore for inclines

I-61 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 4.1 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 14 mm (0.55 in)

S4.1-0 FLT | 0 % Opening | Flat top

Closed, smooth surface | Flat top surface

dpin

hpin
Winc
Wmin
Belt dimensions
p dpin hm hpin hs Wmin Winc Wtol Minimum flex radii1)
Width
Pin Width Width r1
Pitch Pin Ø Thickness Height tolerance r2 r3 r4 r5
position min. Increment Cc x WB
[%]
mm 14.0 5.0 9.0 4.5 0.0 25.0 12.5 ±0.2 – 11.0 25.0 38.0 12.5
inch 0.55 0.2 0.35 0.18 0.0 0.98 0.49 ±0.2 – 0.43 0.98 1.5 0.49

Available standard materials 3)

Nominal belt pull, Width
Belt Pin Weight Temperature Certificates2)
straight deviation
Material Color Material Color [N/mm] [lb/ft] [kg/m2] [lb/ft2] [%] [°C] [°F] FDA EU MHLW
PE WT PE UC 3 206 5.1 1.04 -0.1 -70/65 -94/149 ● ● ●
PE UC PBT UC 3 206 5.1 1.04 -0.1 -70/65 -94/149 ● ● ●
PE BL PE UC 3 206 5.1 1.04 -0.1 -70/65 -94/149 ● ●
POM BL PBT BL 10 685 7.1 1.45 0.0 -45/90 -49/194 ● ● ●
POM WT PBT UC 10 685 7.1 1.45 0.0 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
PP BL PP BL 5 343 4.6 0.94 0.25 5/100 41/212 ● ●
PP WT PP WT 5 343 4.6 0.94 0.25 5/100 41/212 ● ● ●
POM-MD BL POM-MD BL 10 685 7.5 1.54 0.0 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●

Mold to order belts

PXX-HC BK PBT UC 5 343 5.1 1.04 0.25 5/100 41/212 – – –

Mold to width available in: 38 mm (1.5 in), 50 mm (1.97 in), 100 mm (3.94 in), 125 mm (4.92 in), 200 mm (7.87 in)

BL (Blue), BK (Black), UC (Uncolored), WT (White)

I-62 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 4.1 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 14 mm (0.55 in)

S4.1-0 NPY | 0 % Opening | Negative pyramid

Closed surface | Negative pyramid pattern for superb release characteristics when conveying wet or sticky products

dpin

hpin
Winc
Wmin
Belt dimensions
p dpin hm hpin hs Wmin Winc Wtol Minimum flex radii1)
Width
Pin Width Width r1
Pitch Pin Ø Thickness Height tolerance r2 r3 r4 r5
position min. Increment Cc x WB
[%]
mm 14.0 5.0 9.0 4.5 0.0 25.0 12.5 ±0.2 – 11.0 25.0 38.0 12.5
inch 0.55 0.2 0.35 0.18 0.0 0.98 0.49 ±0.2 – 0.43 0.98 1.5 0.49

Available standard materials 3)

Mold to width available in: 200 mm (7.87 in)

BL (Blue), UC (Uncolored)

I-63 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 4.1 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 14 mm (0.55 in)

S4.1-0 FRT1 | 0 % Opening | Friction top (Design 1)

Closed surface | Friction top with slightly elevated triangular shapes to reduce contact area/increase contact pressure to
optimise grip and to channel dirt away from the friction surface

hs
hm

dpin

hpin
Winc
Wmin
Belt dimensions
p dpin hm hpin hs Wmin Winc Wtol Minimum flex radii1)
Width
Pin Width Width r1
Pitch Pin Ø Thickness Height tolerance r2 r3 r4 r5
position min. Increment Cc x WB
[%]
mm 14.0 5.0 9.0 4.5 2.4 50.0 12.5 ±0.2 – 11.0 25.0 38.0 16.5
inch 0.55 0.2 0.35 0.18 0.09 1.97 0.49 ±0.2 – 0.43 0.98 1.5 0.65

Available standard materials 3)

Nominal belt pull, Width
Belt Pin Rubber Weight Temperature Certificates2)
straight deviation
Material Color Material Color Material Color [N/mm] [lb/ft] [kg/m2] [lb/ft2] [%] [°C] [°F] FDA EU MHLW
PE WT PE UC R8 BG 3 206 6.8 1.39 -0.1 -70/65 -94/149 ● ●
POM BL PBT BL R6 BK 10 685 9.4 1.93 0.0 -45/60 -49/140 – – ●
PP BL PP BL R7 BK 5 343 6.9 1.41 0.25 5/100 41/212 ● ●
PP WT PP WT R7 BG 5 343 6.9 1.41 0.25 5/100 41/212 ● ●

Mold to order belts

PXX-HC BK PBT UC R7 BK 5 343 7.3 1.5 0.25 5/100 41/212 – – –

Mold to width available in: 50 mm (1.97 in), 125 mm (4.92 in), 200 mm (7.87 in)

BG (Beige), BL (Blue), BK (Black), UC (Uncolored), WT (White)

All measurements and tolerances apply at 21 °C; for temperature deviations please see Prolink manual chapter 4.4 “Temperature influence“.
All imperial dimensions (inches) are rounded off.
1) Flex radii: r1 = side flex, r2 = front flex on roller, r3 = back flex on load bearing roller, r4 = back flex on Hold Down shoe, r5 = back flex on roller
2) C omplies with FDA 21 CFR | Complies with (EU) 10/2011 and (EC) 1935/2004 regulations regarding the raw materials used and the migration
thresholds | Complies with Japanese MHLW Notification 370
● = available | – = not available | empty cells = not tested
3) More materials and colors on request

I-64 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 4.1 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 14 mm (0.55 in)

S4.1-21 FLT | 21 % Opening | Flat top

Large open area (21 %) for excellent air circulation and drainage | 70 % contact area | Smooth surface

p Variant specific dimensions [mm (in)]

4.4 (0.17)

5.3 (0.21)
hm

dpin

hpin
Winc
Wmin

Belt dimensions
p dpin hm hpin hs Wmin Winc Wtol Minimum flex radii1)
Width
Pin Width Width r1
Pitch Pin Ø Thickness Height tolerance r2 r3 r4 r5
position min. Increment Cc x WB
[%]
mm 14.0 5.0 9.0 4.5 0.0 25.0 12.5 ±0.2 – 11.0 25.0 38.0 12.5
inch 0.55 0.2 0.35 0.18 0.0 0.98 0.49 ±0.2 – 0.43 0.98 1.5 0.49

Available standard materials 3)

Nominal belt pull, Width
Belt Pin Weight Temperature Certificates2)
straight deviation
Material Color Material Color [N/mm] [lb/ft] [kg/m2] [lb/ft2] [%] [°C] [°F] FDA EU MHLW
PE WT PE UC 3 206 4.5 0.92 -0.1 -70/65 -94/149 ● ● ●
PE UC PBT UC 3 206 4.5 0.92 -0.1 -70/65 -94/149 ● ● ●
PE BL PE UC 3 206 4.5 0.92 -0.1 -70/65 -94/149 ● ●
POM BL PBT BL 10 685 6.5 1.33 0.0 -45/90 -49/194 ● ● ●
POM WT PBT UC 10 685 6.5 1.33 0.0 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
PP BL PP BL 5 343 4.1 0.84 0.25 5/100 41/212 ● ●
PP WT PP WT 5 343 4.1 0.84 0.25 5/100 41/212 ● ● ●

Mold to order belts

PA-HT BK PA-HT BK 10 685 6.4 1.31 1.4 -30/155 -22/311 – – –
POM-MD BL POM-MD BL 10 685 6.9 1.41 0.0 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
PP-MD BL PP-MD BL 10 685 4.8 0.98 0.2 5/100 41/212 ● ●

Mold to width available in: 38 mm (1.5 in), 50 mm (1.97 in), 100 mm (3.94 in), 200 mm (7.87 in)

BK (Black), BL (Blue), UC (Uncolored), WT (White)

I-65 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 4.1 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 14 mm (0.55 in)

S4.1-21 NTP | 21 % Opening | Nub top (round studs)

Large open area (21 %) for excellent air circulation and drainage | 4 % contact area | Nub top surface for good release of
wet and sticky products | Version available without round studs at the side (25 mm indent)

p Variant specific dimensions [mm (in)]

hs
4.4 (0.17)

5.3 (0.21)
hm

dpin

hpin
Winc
Wmin

Belt dimensions
p dpin hm hpin hs Wmin Winc Wtol Minimum flex radii1)
Width
Pin Width Width r1
Pitch Pin Ø Thickness Height tolerance r2 r3 r4 r5
position min. Increment Cc x WB
[%]
mm 14.0 5.0 9.0 4.5 2.5 25.0 12.5 ±0.2 – 11.0 25.0 38.0 12.5
inch 0.55 0.2 0.35 0.18 0.1 0.98 0.49 ±0.2 – 0.43 0.98 1.5 0.49

Available standard materials 3)

Mold to width available in: 200 mm (7.87 in)

Also available with

molded indent
25 mm (0.98 in)

25 (0.98) (indent)

BL (Blue), UC (Uncolored), WT (White)

I-66 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 4.1 | SPROCKETS siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 14 mm (0.55 in)

S4.1 SPR | Sprockets

Wide sprocket teeth ensure superior sprocket engagement and load transmission

B-B

B
A

B
D0 Wspr

Main dimensions
Sprocket size
Z10 Z12 Z14 Z16 Z18 Z19 Z26 Z35
(Number of teeth)
mm 24.0 24.0 24.0 30.0 38.0 38.0 38.0 38.0
Wspr
inch 0.94 0.94 0.94 1.18 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50
mm 47.1 56.1 65.3 74.3 83.4 88.0 119.8 160.4
D0
inch 1.85 2.21 2.57 2.93 3.28 3.46 4.72 6.31
mm 19.0 23.6 28.2 32.7 37.2 39.5 55.4 75.7
Amax
inch 0.75 0.93 1.11 1.29 1.46 1.56 2.18 2.98
mm 18.1 22.8 27.5 32.0 36.6 39.0 55.0 75.4
Amin
inch 0.71 0.90 1.08 1.26 1.44 1.53 2.17 2.97

Shaft bores (● = Round, ■ = Square)

20 mm ●/■
25 mm ●/■ ■ ● ●/■ ■ ●
30 mm ●
40 mm ■ ■ ■ ■
60 mm ■ ■

0.75 inch ● ● ●
1 inch ●/■ ■ ●/■ ■ ●
1.25 inch ● ●
1.5 inch ■ ■ ■ ■
2.5 inch ■ ■

Material: PA, Color: LG

LG (Light gray)

I-67 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 4.1 | PROFILES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 14 mm (0.55 in)

S4.1 FLT/NCL PMU

No cling surface to improve release of wet and sticky products and Flat top surface for dry products

Basic data
Height (h)
Material Color 51 mm 76 mm
2 inch 3 inch
PE BL ● mold to order
PE WT ● mold to order
POM BL ● ●
POM WT ● ●
PP BL ● ●
PP WT ● ●

Molded width: 200 mm (7.9 in)

25 (0.98) (minimum indent)

12.5 (0.49) (positioning increment)

Standard configuration S4.1-0 FLT/NCL PMU Indent configuration S4.1-0 FLT/NCL PMU

BL (Blue), WT (White)

I-68 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

I-69 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024
1.2 DETAILED SERIES INFORMATION

siegling prolink
modular belts

SERIES 5
Side flexing and spiral belts
Pitch 25 mm (0.98 in)

I-70 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 5 | OVERVIEW siegling prolink
modular belts
Side flexing and spiral belts | Pitch 25 mm (0.98 in)

Belts for light to medium-duty food and non-food applications

Side view scale 1:1 Available surface pattern and opening area

S5-45 GRT
Open (45 %), lattice-shaped surface
25 (0.98)
S5-45 NTP
Open (45 %), lattice-shaped surface
with nub tops
Design characteristics
– Suitable for both straight and radius conveying S5-39 FRT1
Open (39 %) surface with friction top
– Up to 45 % open area for excellent air circulation
and drainage S5-33 FRT2
– Stainless steel hinge pins for high load capacity, Open (33 %) surface with friction top, flat
lateral stiffness, fewer belt supports and minimum
belt lifting in curves
– No potential belt edge catch points due to Reinforced belts
safe fixing of hinge pins

Guided belts
Basic data
Pitch 25 mm (0.98)
Reversed
Belt width min. 100 mm (3.9 in), 175 mm (6.9 in) for S5 ST guided belts
Width increments 25 mm (0.98)
Hinge pins 5 mm (0.2 in) made of stainless steel

Sprockets Profiles Side guards Ball-bearing modules

in different sizes with round in different heights and designs in different heights for retention to minimize friction forces
or square bore for inclines of bulk products at the belt edge

I-71 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 5 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Side flexing and spiral belt | Pitch 25 mm (0.98 in) | Cc = 2.0

S5-45 GRT | 45 % Opening | Grid top

Open area (45 %) for excellent air circulation and drainage | 42 % contact area | Lattice shaped surface |
Collapse factor (Cc) = 2.0

p Variant specific dimensions [mm (in)]

37.5 (1.48)
dpin 13 (0.51)

hpin

14 (0.55)
Wmin
Winc

Belt dimensions
p dpin hm hpin hs Wmin Winc Wtol Minimum flex radii1)
Width
Pin Width Width r1
Pitch Pin Ø Thickness Height tolerance r2 r3 r4 r5
position min. Increment Cc x WB
[%]
mm 25.0 5.0 12.0 6.0 0.0 100.0 25.0 ±0.3 2 x WB 25.0 50.0 75.0 25.0
inch 0.98 0.2 0.47 0.24 0.0 3.94 0.98 ±0.3 2 x WB 0.98 1.97 2.95 0.98
WB = Belt width, further information regarding r1 see page III-20
Available standard materials 3)
Nominal belt pull, Nominal belt pull, Width
Belt Pin Weight Temperature Certificates2)
straight curve deviation
Material Color Material Color [N/mm] [lb/ft] [N] [lb] [kg/m2] [lb/ft2] [%] [°C] [°F] FDA EU
PE WT/DB SS 10 685 NR NR 11.0 2.25 0.0 -70/65 -94/149 ● ●
PP WT/DB/BL SS 18 1233 1000 225 10.0 2.05 0.0 5/100 41/212 ● ●
POM-CR WT/DB/BL SS 25 1713 1800 405 13.0 2.66 0.0 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●

Mold to order belts

PA* BL SS 20 1370 1440 324 12.8 2.62 0.0 -40/120 -40/248 ● ●

NR = not recommended

*V
alues valid for dry applications (RH <50 %). Belts in PA material will absorb water in wet environments, causing them to expand and reduce the
nominal belt pull capacity.

BL (Blue), DB (Dark blue), WT (White)

All measurements and tolerances apply at 21 °C; for temperature deviations please see Prolink manual chapter 4.4 “Temperature influence“.
All imperial dimensions (inches) are rounded off.
1) Flex radii: r1 = side flex, r2 = front flex on roller, r3 = back flex on load bearing roller, r4 = back flex on Hold Down shoe, r5 = back flex on roller
2) C omplies with FDA 21 CFR | Complies with (EU) 10/2011 and (EC) 1935/2004 regulations regarding the raw materials used and the migration
thresholds | Complies with Japanese MHLW Notification 370
● = available | – = not available | empty cells = not tested
3) More materials and colors on request

I-72 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 5 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Side flexing and spiral belt | Pitch 25 mm (0.98 in) | Cc = 2.0

S5-45 NTP | 45 % Opening | Nub top (round studs)

Open area (45 %) for excellent air circulation and drainage | Lattice shaped surface with 3.0 mm (0.12 in) high round studs
and 8 % contact area | Side modules without NTP-surface | Collapse factor (Cc) = 2.0

p Variant specific dimensions [mm (in)]

hs
hm

37.5 (1.48)
40 (1.57)
dpin 13 (0.51)

hpin

14 (0.55)
Wmin

5.5 (0.22)
Winc

Belt dimensions
p dpin hm hpin hs Wmin Winc Wtol Minimum flex radii1)
Width
Pin Width Width r1
Pitch Pin Ø Thickness Height tolerance r2 r3 r4 r5
position min. Increment Cc x WB
[%]
mm 25.0 5.0 12.0 6.0 3.0 100.0 25.0 ±0.3 2 x WB 25.0 50.0 75.0 25.0
inch 0.98 0.2 0.47 0.24 0.12 3.94 0.98 ±0.3 2 x WB 0.98 1.97 2.95 0.98
WB = Belt width, further information regarding r1 see page III-20
Available standard materials 3)
Nominal belt pull, Nominal belt pull, Width
Belt Pin Weight Temperature Certificates2)
straight curve deviation
Material Color Material Color [N/mm] [lb/ft] [N] [lb] [kg/m2] [lb/ft2] [%] [°C] [°F] FDA EU
PP WT SS 18 1233 1000 225 10.1 2.07 0.0 5/100 41/212 ● ●
POM-CR WT SS 25 1713 1800 405 13.1 2.68 0.0 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●

Mold to order belts

PE WT SS 10 685 NR NR 11.2 2.29 0.0 -70/65 -94/149 ● ●

NR = not recommended

WT (White)

I-73 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 5 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Side flexing and spiral belt | Pitch 25 mm (0.98 in) | Cc = 2.0

S5-39 FRT1 | 39 % Opening | Friction top (Design 1)

Excellent air circulation and drainage | Integrated friction pads (raised) increase surface friction and provide gentle grip |
8 % contact area | Side modules without FRT-surface | Collapse factor (Cc) = 2.0

p Variant specific dimensions [mm (in)]

hs
hm

37.5 (1.48)
45 (1.77)
dpin 13 (0.51)

hpin

14 (0.55)
Wmin

15.4 (0.61)
Winc

Belt dimensions
p dpin hm hpin hs Wmin Winc Wtol Minimum flex radii1)
Width
Pin Width Width r1
Pitch Pin Ø Thickness Height tolerance r2 r3 r4 r5
position min. Increment Cc x WB
[%]
mm 25.0 5.0 12.0 6.0 3.2 100.0 25.0 ±0.3 2 x WB 25.0 50.0 75.0 25.0
inch 0.98 0.2 0.47 0.24 0.13 3.94 0.98 ±0.3 2 x WB 0.98 1.97 2.95 0.98
WB = Belt width, further information regarding r1 see page III-20
Available standard materials 3)
Nominal belt Nominal belt Width
Belt Pin Rubber Weight Temperature Certificates2)
pull, straight pull, curve deviation
Material Color Material Color Material Color [N/mm] [lb/ft] [N] [lb] [kg/m2] [lb/ft2] [%] [°C] [°F] FDA EU
PP WT SS R4 BG 18 1233 1000 225 10.2 2.09 0.0 5/100 41/212 ● ●
POM-CR-PP WT SS R4 BG 18 1233 1800 405 10.4 2.13 0.0 5/90 41/194 ● ●

BG (Beige), WT (White)

I-74 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 5 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Side flexing and spiral belt | Pitch 25 mm (0.98 in) | Cc = 2.0

S5-33 FRT2 | 33 % Opening | Friction top (Design 2)

Open area (33 % for full FRT2 surface area) for excellent air circulation and drainage | Integrated friction pads (flat) provide
gentle grip | 47 % contact area | Side modules without FRT-surface | Collapse factor (Cc) = 2.0

p Variant specific dimensions [mm (in)]

hs
hm

37.5 (1.48)
38.1 (1.5)
dpin 13 (0.51)

hpin

14 (0.55)
Wmin
Winc

Belt dimensions
p dpin hm hpin hs Wmin Winc Wtol Minimum flex radii1)
Width
Pin Width Width r1
Pitch Pin Ø Thickness Height tolerance r2 r3 r4 r5
position min. Increment Cc x WB
[%]
mm 25.0 5.0 12.0 6.0 1.5 100.0 25.0 ±0.3 2 x WB 25.0 50.0 75.0 25.0
inch 0.98 0.2 0.47 0.24 0.06 3.94 0.98 ±0.3 2 x WB 0.98 1.97 2.95 0.98
WB = Belt width, further information regarding r1 see page III-20
Available standard materials 3)
Nominal belt Nominal belt Width
Belt Pin Rubber Weight Temperature Certificates2)
pull, straight pull, curve deviation
Material Color Material Color Material Color [N/mm] [lb/ft] [N] [lb] [kg/m2] [lb/ft2] [%] [°C] [°F] FDA EU
PP WT SS R7 BG 18 1233 1000 225 11.4 2.33 0.0 5/100 41/212 ● ●
PP BL SS R7 BG 18 1233 1000 225 11.4 2.33 0.0 5/100 41/212 ● ●
PP BL SS R7 BK 18 1233 1000 225 11.4 2.33 0.0 5/100 41/212 ● ●
POM-CR-PP WT SS R7 BK 18 1233 1800 405 11.7 2.40 0.0 5/90 41/194 ● ●
POM-CR-PP BL SS R7 BG 18 1233 1800 405 11.7 2.40 0.0 5/90 41/194 ● ●
POM-CR-PP BL SS R7 BK 18 1233 1800 405 11.7 2.40 0.0 5/90 41/194 ● ●

BG (Beige), BK (Black), BL (Blue), WT (White)

I-75 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 5 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Side flexing and spiral belt | Pitch 25 mm (0.98 in) | Cc = 2.0

S5-45 GRT G | 45 % Opening | Grid top · guided

Excellent air circulation and drainage | 42 % contact area | Lattice shaped surface and Hold Down Tabs | Allows utilization of
the entire belt width | Collapse factor (Cc) = 2.0

p Variant specific dimensions [mm (in)]

hm
dpin
13 (0.51)

hpin

12 (0.47)
37.5 (1.48)

8 (0.31)
Wmin

14 (0.55)
8 (0.31)

(0.12)
Winc

19 (0.75)

3
Belt dimensions
p dpin hm hpin hs Wmin Winc Wtol Minimum flex radii1)
Width
Pin Width Width r1
Pitch Pin Ø Thickness Height tolerance r2 r3 r4 r5
position min. Increment Cc x WB
[%]
mm 25.0 5.0 12.0 6.0 0.0 100.0 25.0 ±0.3 2 x WB 50.0 50.0 75.0 25.0
inch 0.98 0.2 0.47 0.24 0.0 3.94 0.98 ±0.3 2 x WB 1.97 1.97 2.95 0.98
WB = Belt width, further information regarding r1 see page III-20
Available standard materials 3)
Nominal belt pull, Nominal belt pull, Width
Belt Pin Weight Temperature Certificates2)
straight curve deviation
Material Color Material Color [N/mm] [lb/ft] [N] [lb] [kg/m2] [lb/ft2] [%] [°C] [°F] FDA EU
POM-CR WT SS 25 1713 1800 405 13.0 2.66 0.0 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
POM-CR BL SS 25 1713 1800 405 13.0 2.66 0.0 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
POM-CR DB SS 25 1713 1800 405 13.0 2.66 0.0 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
PP WT SS 18 1233 1000 225 10.0 2.05 0.0 5/100 41/212 ● ●

Mold to order belts

PE WT SS 10 685 NR NR 11.0 2.25 0.0 -70/65 -94/149 ● ●
PA* BL SS 20 1370 1440 324 12.8 2.62 0.0 -40/120 -40/248 ● ●

NR = not recommended

* Values valid for dry applications (RH <50 %). Belts in PA material will absorb water in wet environments, causing them to expand and reduce the
nominal belt pull capacity.

BL (Blue), DB (Dark blue), WT (White)

All measurements and tolerances apply at 21 °C; for temperature deviations please see Prolink manual chapter 4.4 “Temperature influence“.
All imperial dimensions (inches) are rounded off.
1) Flex radii: r1 = side flex, r2 = front flex on roller, r3 = back flex on load bearing roller, r4 = back flex on Hold Down shoe, r5 = back flex on roller
Attention: Restrictions on sprocket size and corresponding shaft options – please check sprocket data sheet
2) C omplies with FDA 21 CFR | Complies with (EU) 10/2011 and (EC) 1935/2004 regulations regarding the raw materials used and the migration
thresholds | Complies with Japanese MHLW Notification 370
● = available | – = not available | empty cells = not tested
3) More materials and colors on request

I-76 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 5 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Side flexing and spiral belt | Pitch 25 mm (0.98 in) | Cc = 2.0

S5-45 NTP G | 45 % Opening | Nub top (round studs) · guided

Open area (45 %) for excellent air circulation and drainage | Lattice shaped surface with 3.0 mm (0.12 in) high round studs
and 8 % contact area | Side modules without NTP-surface | Allows utilization of the entire belt width |
Collapse factor (Cc) = 2.0

p Variant specific dimensions [mm (in)]

hs
hm

40 (1.57)
dpin

Indent
13 (0.51)

hpin

12 (0.47)
37.5 (1.48)

8 (0.31)
Wmin

14 (0.55)
8 (0.31)

5.5 (0.22)

(0.12)
Winc

19 (0.75)

3
Belt dimensions
p dpin hm hpin hs Wmin Winc Wtol Minimum flex radii1)
Width
Pin Width Width r1
Pitch Pin Ø Thickness Height tolerance r2 r3 r4 r5
position min. Increment Cc x WB
[%]
mm 25.0 5.0 12.0 6.0 3.0 100.0 25.0 ±0.3 2 x WB 50.0 50.0 75.0 25.0
inch 0.98 0.2 0.47 0.24 0.12 3.94 0.98 ±0.3 2 x WB 1.97 1.97 2.95 0.98
WB = Belt width, further information regarding r1 see page III-20
Available standard materials 3)
Nominal belt pull, Nominal belt pull, Width
Belt Pin Weight Temperature Certificates2)
straight curve deviation
Material Color Material Color [N/mm] [lb/ft] [N] [lb] [kg/m2] [lb/ft2] [%] [°C] [°F] FDA EU
POM-CR WT SS 25 1713 1800 405 13.2 2.70 0.0 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
PP WT SS 18 1233 1000 225 10.2 2.09 0.0 5/100 41/212 ● ●

WT (White)

All measurements and tolerances apply at 21 °C; for temperature deviations please see Prolink manual chapter 4.4 “Temperature influence“.
All imperial dimensions (inches) are rounded off.
1) Flex radii: r1 = side flex, r2 = front flex on roller, r3 = back flex on load bearing roller, r4 = back flex on Hold Down shoe, r5 = back flex on roller
Attention: Restrictions on sprocket size and corresponding shaft options – please check sprocket data sheet
2) Complies with FDA 21 CFR | Complies with (EU) 10/2011 and (EC) 1935/2004 regulations regarding the raw materials used and the migration
thresholds | Complies with Japanese MHLW Notification 370
● = available | – = not available | empty cells = not tested
3) More materials and colors on request

I-77 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 5 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Side flexing and spiral belt | Pitch 25 mm (0.98 in) | Cc = 2.0

S5-39 FRT1 G | 39 % Opening | Friction top (Design 1) · guided

Excellent air circulation and drainage | Integrated friction pads (raised) increase surface friction and provide
gentle grip | Allows utilization of the entire belt width | Side modules without FRT-surface | Collapse factor (Cc) = 2.0

p Variant specific dimensions [mm (in)]

hs
hm
dpin

45 (1.77)
13 (0.51)

hpin

12 (0.47)
37.5 (1.48)

8 (0.31)
Wmin

14 (0.55)
8 (0.31)

(0.12)
15.4 (0.61)
19 (0.75)
Winc

3
Belt dimensions
p dpin hm hpin hs Wmin Winc Wtol Minimum flex radii1)
Width
Pin Width Width r1
Pitch Pin Ø Thickness Height tolerance r2 r3 r4 r5
position min. Increment Cc x WB
[%]
mm 25.0 5.0 12.0 6.0 3.2 100.0 25.0 ±0.3 2 x WB 50.0 50.0 75.0 25.0
inch 0.98 0.2 0.47 0.24 0.13 3.94 0.98 ±0.3 2 x WB 1.97 1.97 2.95 0.98
WB = Belt width, further information regarding r1 see page III-20
Available standard materials 3)
Nominal belt Nominal belt Width
Belt Pin Rubber Weight Temperature Certificates2)
pull, straight pull, curve deviation
Material Color Material Color Material Color [N/mm] [lb/ft] [N] [lb] [kg/m2] [lb/ft2] [%] [°C] [°F] FDA EU
PP WT SS R4 BG 18 1233 1000 225 10.2 2.09 0.0 5/100 41/212 ● ●
POM-CR-PP WT SS R4 BG 18 1233 1800 405 10.5 2.15 0.0 5/90 41/194 ● ●

BG (Beige), WT (White)

All measurements and tolerances apply at 21 °C; for temperature deviations please see Prolink manual chapter 4.4 “Temperature influence“.
All imperial dimensions (inches) are rounded off.
1) Flex radii: r1 = side flex, r2 = front flex on roller, r3 = back flex on load bearing roller, r4 = back flex on Hold Down shoe, r5 = back flex on roller
Attention: Restrictions on sprocket size and corresponding shaft options – please check sprocket data sheet
2) Complies with FDA 21 CFR | Complies with (EU) 10/2011 and (EC) 1935/2004 regulations regarding the raw materials used and the migration
thresholds | Complies with Japanese MHLW Notification 370
● = available | – = not available | empty cells = not tested
3) More materials and colors on request

I-78 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 5 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Side flexing and spiral belt | Pitch 25 mm (0.98 in) | Cc = 2.0

S5-33 FRT2 G | 33 % Opening | Friction top (Design 2) · guided

Open area (33 % for full FRT2 surface area) for excellent air circulation and drainage | 47 % contact area | Integrated friction
pads (flat) provide gentle grip | Allows utilization of the entire belt width | Side modules without FRT-surface |
Collapse factor (Cc) = 2.0

p Variant specific dimensions [mm (in)]

hs
hm

38.1 (1.5)
dpin
13 (0.51)

hpin

12 (0.47)
37.5 (1.48)

8 (0.31)
Wmin

14 (0.55)
8 (0.31)

(0.12)
Winc

19 (0.75)

3
Belt dimensions
p dpin hm hpin hs Wmin Winc Wtol Minimum flex radii1)
Width
Pin Width Width r1
Pitch Pin Ø Thickness Height tolerance r2 r3 r4 r5
position min. Increment Cc x WB
[%]
mm 25.0 5.0 12.0 6.0 1.5 100.0 25.0 ±0.3 2 x WB 50.0 50.0 75.0 25.0
inch 0.98 0.2 0.47 0.24 0.06 3.94 0.98 ±0.3 2 x WB 1.97 1.97 2.95 0.98
WB = Belt width, further information regarding r1 see page III-20
Available standard materials 3)
Nominal belt Nominal belt Width
Belt Pin Rubber Weight Temperature Certificates2)
pull, straight pull, curve deviation
Material Color Material Color Material Color [N/mm] [lb/ft] [N] [lb] [kg/m2] [lb/ft2] [%] [°C] [°F] FDA EU
PP WT SS R7 BG 18 1233 1000 225 11.4 2.33 0.0 5/100 41/212 ● ●
PP BL SS R7 BG 18 1233 1000 225 11.4 2.33 0.0 5/100 41/212 ● ●
PP BL SS R7 BK 18 1233 1000 225 11.4 2.33 0.0 5/100 41/212 ● ●
POM-CR-PP WT SS R7 BG 18 1233 1800 405 11.7 2.40 0.0 5/90 41/194 ● ●
POM-CR-PP BL SS R7 BG 18 1233 1800 405 11.7 2.40 0.0 5/90 41/194 ● ●
POM-CR-PP BL SS R7 BK 18 1233 1800 405 11.7 2.40 0.0 5/90 41/194 ● ●

BG (Beige), BK (Black), BL (Blue), WT (White)

All measurements and tolerances apply at 21 °C; for temperature deviations please see Prolink manual chapter 4.4 “Temperature influence“.
All imperial dimensions (inches) are rounded off.
1) F lex radii: r1 = side flex, r2 = front flex on roller, r3 = back flex on load bearing roller, r4 = back flex on Hold Down shoe, r5 = back flex on roller
Attention: Restrictions on sprocket size and corresponding shaft options – please check sprocket data sheet
2) Complies with FDA 21 CFR | Complies with (EU) 10/2011 and (EC) 1935/2004 regulations regarding the raw materials used and the migration
thresholds | Complies with Japanese MHLW Notification 370
● = available | – = not available | empty cells = not tested
3) More materials and colors on request

I-79 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 5 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Side flexing and spiral belt | Pitch 25 mm (0.98 in) | Cc = 2.0

S5-45 GRT RG | 45 % Opening | Grid top · reverse guided

p Variant specific dimensions [mm (in)]

hm
dpin

hpin

12 (0.47)
13 (0.51)

8.5 (0.33)
50 (1.97)

Wmin

14 (0.55)
15 (0.59)

23.2 (0.91)

(0.22)
5.5
6.2 (0.24)
Winc

Mold to order belts

PE WT SS 10 685 NR NR 11.0 2.25 0.0 -70/65 -94/149 ● ●
PP WT SS 18 1233 1200 270 10.0 2.05 0.0 5/100 41/212 ● ●

NR = not recommended

BL (Blue), WT (White)

All measurements and tolerances apply at 21 °C; for temperature deviations please see Prolink manual chapter 4.4 “Temperature influence“.
All imperial dimensions (inches) are rounded off.
1) Flex radii: r1 = side flex, r2 = front flex on roller, r3 = back flex on load bearing roller, r4 = back flex on Hold Down shoe, r5 = back flex on roller
Attention: Restrictions on sprocket size and corresponding shaft options – please check sprocket data sheet
2) Complies with FDA 21 CFR | Complies with (EU) 10/2011 and (EC) 1935/2004 regulations regarding the raw materials used and the migration
thresholds | Complies with Japanese MHLW Notification 370
● = available | – = not available | empty cells = not tested
3) More materials and colors on request

I-80 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 5 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Side flexing and spiral belt | Pitch 25 mm (0.98 in) | Cc = 2.0

S5-45 NTP RG | 45 % Opening | Nub top (round studs) · reverse guided

Excellent air circulation and drainage | With round studs for increased grip (8 % contact area) | Allows utilization of the
entire belt width | Side modules only available without NTP-pattern | Collapse factor (Cc) = 2.0

p Variant specific dimensions [mm (in)]

hs
hm
dpin

52.7 (2.07)
hpin

12 (0.47)
13 (0.51)

8.5 (0.33)
50 (1.97)

Wmin

14 (0.55)
15 (0.59)

23.2 (0.91)

(0.22)
5.5
5.5 (0.22)
6.2 (0.24)
Winc

WT (White)

All measurements and tolerances apply at 21 °C; for temperature deviations please see Prolink manual chapter 4.4 “Temperature influence“.
All imperial dimensions (inches) are rounded off.
1) Flex radii: r1 = side flex, r2 = front flex on roller, r3 = back flex on load bearing roller, r4 = back flex on Hold Down shoe, r5 = back flex on roller
Attention: Restrictions on sprocket size and corresponding shaft options – please check sprocket data sheet
2) Complies with FDA 21 CFR | Complies with (EU) 10/2011 and (EC) 1935/2004 regulations regarding the raw materials used and the migration
thresholds | Complies with Japanese MHLW Notification 370
● = available | – = not available | empty cells = not tested
3) More materials and colors on request

I-81 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 5 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Side flexing and spiral belt | Pitch 25 mm (0.98 in) | Cc = 2.0

S5-39 FRT1 RG | 39 % Opening | Friction top (Design 1) · reverse guided

p Variant specific dimensions [mm (in)]

hs
hm
dpin

57.5 (2.26)
hpin

12 (0.47)
13 (0.51)

8.5 (0.33)
50 (1.97)

Wmin

14 (0.55)
15 (0.59)

23.2 (0.91)

(0.22)
5.5
6.2 (0.24)

15.4 (0.61)
Winc

BG (Beige), WT (White)

All measurements and tolerances apply at 21 °C; for temperature deviations please see Prolink manual chapter 4.4 “Temperature influence“.
All imperial dimensions (inches) are rounded off.
1) Flex radii: r1 = side flex, r2 = front flex on roller, r3 = back flex on load bearing roller, r4 = back flex on Hold Down shoe, r5 = back flex on roller
Attention: Restrictions on sprocket size and corresponding shaft options – please check sprocket data sheet
2) Complies with FDA 21 CFR | Complies with (EU) 10/2011 and (EC) 1935/2004 regulations regarding the raw materials used and the migration
thresholds | Complies with Japanese MHLW Notification 370
● = available | – = not available | empty cells = not tested
3) More materials and colors on request

I-82 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 5 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Side flexing and spiral belt | Pitch 25 mm (0.98 in) | Cc = 2.0

S5-33 FRT2 RG | 33 % Opening | Friction top (Design 2) · reverse guided

p Variant specific dimensions [mm (in)]

hs
hm
dpin

50.6 (1.99)
hpin

12 (0.47)
13 (0.51)

8.5 (0.33)
50 (1.97)

Wmin

14 (0.55)
15 (0.59)

23.2 (0.91)

(0.22)
5.5
Winc

6.2 (0.24)

Belt dimensions
p dpin hm hpin hs Wmin Winc Wtol Minimum flex radii1)
Width
Pin Width Width r1
Pitch Pin Ø Thickness Height tolerance r2 r3 r4 r5
position min. Increment Cc x WB
[%]
mm 25.0 5.0 12.0 6.0 1.5 125.0 25.0 ±0.3 2 x WB 50.0 50.0 75.0 25.0
inch 0.98 0.2 0.47 0.24 0.06 4.92 0.98 ±0.3 2 x WB 1.97 1.97 2.95 0.98
WB = Belt width, further information regarding r1 see page III-20
Available standard materials 3)
Nominal belt Nominal belt Width
Belt Pin Rubber Weight Temperature Certificates2)
pull, straight pull, curve deviation
Material Color Material Color Material Color [N/mm] [lb/ft] [N] [lb] [kg/m2] [lb/ft2] [%] [°C] [°F] FDA EU
POM-CR-PP BL SS R7 BG 18 1233 2100 472 11.4 2.33 0.0 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
POM-CR-PP WT SS R7 BG 18 1233 2100 472 11.4 2.33 0.0 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
POM-CR-PP BL SS R7 BK 18 1233 2100 472 11.4 2.33 0.0 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●

BG (Beige), BK (Black), BL (Blue), WT (White)

All measurements and tolerances apply at 21 °C; for temperature deviations please see Prolink manual chapter 4.4 “Temperature influence“.
All imperial dimensions (inches) are rounded off.
1) F lex radii: r1 = side flex, r2 = front flex on roller, r3 = back flex on load bearing roller, r4 = back flex on Hold Down shoe, r5 = back flex on roller
Attention: Restrictions on sprocket size and corresponding shaft options – please check sprocket data sheet
2) Complies with FDA 21 CFR | Complies with (EU) 10/2011 and (EC) 1935/2004 regulations regarding the raw materials used and the migration
thresholds | Complies with Japanese MHLW Notification 370
● = available | – = not available | empty cells = not tested
3) More materials and colors on request

I-83 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 5 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Side flexing and spiral belt | Pitch 25 mm (0.98 in) | Cc = 2.0

S5-45 GRT ST | 45 % Opening | Grid top · strong

Excellent air circulation and drainage | Lattice shaped surface | Version with reinforced brick-laid side modules
(75 mm/2.9 in and 100 mm/3.9 in) increases belt pull capacity | Collapse factor (Cc) = 2.0

p Variant specific dimensions [mm (in)]

hm
dpin

hpin

75 (2.95)
13 (0.51)

100 (3.94)
Wmin

14 (0.55)
Winc

Belt dimensions
p dpin hm hpin hs Wmin Winc Wtol Minimum flex radii1)
Width
Pin Width Width r1
Pitch Pin Ø Thickness Height tolerance r2 r3 r4 r5
position min. Increment Cc x WB
[%]
mm 25.0 5.0 12.0 6.0 0.0 175.0 25.0 ±0.3 2 x WB 25.0 50.0 75.0 25.0
inch 0.98 0.2 0.47 0.24 0.0 6.89 0.98 ±0.3 2 x WB 0.98 1.97 2.95 0.98
WB = Belt width, further information regarding r1 see page III-20
Available standard materials 3)
Nominal belt pull, Nominal belt pull, Width
Belt Pin Weight Temperature Certificates2)
straight curve deviation
Material Color Material Color [N/mm] [lb/ft] [N] [lb] [kg/m2] [lb/ft2] [%] [°C] [°F] FDA EU
PP WT SS 18 1233 1200 270 10.2 2.09 0.0 5/100 41/212 ● ●
PP DB SS 18 1233 1200 270 10.2 2.09 0.0 5/100 41/212 ● ●
PP BL SS 18 1233 1200 270 10.2 2.09 0.0 5/100 41/212 ● ●
POM-CR WT SS 25 1713 2100 472 13.2 2.7 0.0 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
POM-CR DB SS 25 1713 2100 472 13.2 2.7 0.0 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
POM-CR BL SS 25 1713 2100 472 13.2 2.7 0.0 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●

Mold to order belts

PE WT SS 10 685 NR NR 11.1 2.27 0.0 -70/65 -94/149 ● ●
PA* BL SS 20 1370 1680 378 13.0 2.66 0.0 -40/120 -40/248 ● ●

NR = not recommended
* Values valid for dry applications (RH <50 %). Belts in PA material will absorb water in wet environments, causing them to expand and reduce the
nominal belt pull capacity.

BL (Blue), DB (Dark blue), WT (White)

All measurements and tolerances apply at 21 °C; for temperature deviations please see Prolink manual chapter 4.4 “Temperature influence“.
All imperial dimensions (inches) are rounded off.
1) Flex radii: r1 = side flex, r2 = front flex on roller, r3 = back flex on load bearing roller, r4 = back flex on Hold Down shoe, r5 = back flex on roller
2) C omplies with FDA 21 CFR | Complies with (EU) 10/2011 and (EC) 1935/2004 regulations regarding the raw materials used and the migration
thresholds | Complies with Japanese MHLW Notification 370
● = available | – = not available | empty cells = not tested
3) More materials and colors on request

I-84 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 5 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Side flexing and spiral belt | Pitch 25 mm (0.98 in) | Cc = 2.0

S5-45 NTP ST | 45 % Opening | Nub top (round studs) · strong

Excellent air circulation and drainage | With round studs for increased grip (8 % contact area) | Version with
reinforced brick-laid side modules increases belt pull capacity | Side modules only available without NTP-pattern |
Collapse factor (Cc) = 2.0

p Variant specific dimensions [mm (in)]

hm
dpin

hpin

75 (2.95)
13 (0.51)

100 (3.94)
Wmin

14 (0.55)
(0.22)
5.5
Winc

WT (White)

I-85 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 5 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Side flexing and spiral belt | Pitch 25 mm (0.98 in) | Cc = 2.0

S5-39 FRT1 ST | 39 % Opening | Friction top (Design 1) · strong

Excellent air circulation and drainage | Integrated friction pads (raised) increase surface friction and provide gentle grip |
Reinforced side modules increase belt pull capacity | Side modules without FRT-surface | Collapse factor (Cc) = 2.0

p Variant specific dimensions [mm (in)]

hs
hm
dpin

100 (3.94)

75 (2.95)
hpin
13 (0.51)

82.5 (3.25)
107.5 (4.23)
Wmin

14 (0.55)
Winc

Belt dimensions
p dpin hm hpin hs Wmin Winc Wtol Minimum flex radii1)
Width
Pin Width Width r1
Pitch Pin Ø Thickness Height tolerance r2 r3 r4 r5
position min. Increment Cc x WB
[%]
mm 25.0 5.0 12.0 6.0 3.2 175.0 25.0 ±0.3 2 x WB 25.0 50.0 75.0 25.0
inch 0.98 0.2 0.47 0.24 0.13 6.89 0.98 ±0.3 2 x WB 0.98 1.97 2.95 0.98
WB = Belt width, further information regarding r1 see page III-20
Available standard materials 3)
Nominal belt Nominal belt Width
Belt Pin Rubber Weight Temperature Certificates2)
pull, straight pull, curve deviation
Material Color Material Color Material Color [N/mm] [lb/ft] [N] [lb] [kg/m2] [lb/ft2] [%] [°C] [°F] FDA EU
PP WT SS R4 BG 18 1233 1200 270 10.2 2.09 0.0 5/100 41/212 ● ●
POM-CR-PP WT SS R4 BG 18 1233 2100 472 10.5 2.15 0.0 5/90 41/194 ● ●

BG (Beige), WT (White)

I-86 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 5 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Side flexing and spiral belt | Pitch 25 mm (0.98 in) | Cc = 2.0

S5-33 FRT2 ST | 33 % Opening | Friction top (Design 2) · strong

Open area (33 % for full FRT2 surface area) for excellent air circulation and drainage | 47 % contact area | Lattice shaped
surface | Version with reinforced brick-laid side modules increases belt pull capacity | Collapse factor (Cc) = 2.0

p Variant specific dimensions [mm (in)]

hs
hm
dpin

100 (3.94)

75 (2.95)
hpin
13 (0.51)

75.6 (2.98)
100.6 (3.96)
Wmin

14 (0.55)
Winc

Belt dimensions
p dpin hm hpin hs Wmin Winc Wtol Minimum flex radii1)
Width
Pin Width Width r1
Pitch Pin Ø Thickness Height tolerance r2 r3 r4 r5
position min. Increment Cc x WB
[%]
mm 25.0 5.0 12.0 6.0 1.5 175.0 25.0 ±0.3 2 x WB 25.0 50.0 75.0 25.0
inch 0.98 0.2 0.47 0.24 0.06 6.89 0.98 ±0.3 2 x WB 0.98 1.97 2.95 0.98
WB = Belt width, further information regarding r1 see page III-20
Available standard materials 3)
Nominal belt Nominal belt Width
Belt Pin Rubber Weight Temperature Certificates2)
pull, straight pull, curve deviation
Material Color Material Color Material Color [N/mm] [lb/ft] [N] [lb] [kg/m2] [lb/ft2] [%] [°C] [°F] FDA EU
PP BL SS R7 BG 18 1233 1200 270 11.4 2.33 0.0 5/100 41/212 ● ●
PP WT SS R7 BG 18 1233 1200 270 11.4 2.33 0.0 5/100 41/212 ● ●
PP BL SS R7 BK 18 1233 1200 270 11.4 2.33 0.0 5/100 41/212 ● ●
POM-CR-PP BL SS R7 BG 18 1233 2100 472 12.0 2.46 0.0 5/90 41/194 ● ●
POM-CR-PP WT SS R7 BG 18 1233 2100 472 12.0 2.46 0.0 5/90 41/194 ● ●
POM-CR-PP BL SS R7 BK 18 1233 2100 472 12.0 2.46 0.0 5/90 41/194 ● ●

Comment: ST types combinable with standard center curve modules, NTP, FRT.
ST types not combinable with Guided (G), Side Guards (SG) or Bearing Tab (BT). Please contact us should you require small curve radii.

BG (Beige), BK (Black), BL (Blue), WT (White)

I-87 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

S5 COMBO | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Side flexing belt | Pitch 25 mm (0.98 in) | Cc = 1.45

S5 ST/S11-45 GRT CW | 45 % Opening | Grid top | Clockwise or right hand curve

p Variant specific dimensions [mm (in)]

hm
dpin
hpin
13 (0.51)

Wmin

14 (0.55)
Winc

WB = Belt width, further information regarding r1 see page III-20

Available standard materials 3)
Nominal belt pull, Nominal belt pull, Width
Belt Pin Weight Temperature Certificates2)
straight curve deviation
Material Color Material Color [N/mm] [lb/ft] [N] [lb] [kg/m2] [lb/ft2] [%] [°C] [°F] FDA EU
PP WT SS 18 1233 1200 270 10.2 2.09 0.2 5/100 41/212 ● ●
PP BL SS 18 1233 1200 270 10.2 2.09 0.2 5/100 41/212 ● ●
POM-CR WT SS 25 1713 2100 472 13.2 2.70 0.0 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
POM-CR BL SS 25 1713 2100 472 13.2 2.70 0.0 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
PA* BL SS 20 1370 1680 378 13.0 2.66 0.6 -40/120 -40/248 ● ●

* Values valid for dry applications (RH <50 %). Belts in PA material will absorb water in wet environments, causing them to expand and reduce the
nominal belt pull capacity.

BL (Blue), WT (White)

I-88 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 5 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Side flexing and spiral belt | Pitch 25 mm (0.98 in) | Cc = 2.0

S5-45 GRT BT | 45 % Opening | Bearing Tab Module*

Ball-bearing support to minimize friction force at the belt edge (high speed, reduce dust, save energy) |
p
Collapse factor (Cc) = 2.0
hm
*The modules will be delivered without ball-bearings. Ball-bearing DIN 625-6000 2RS (or similar) could be used.
dpin

hpin
Variant specific dimensions [mm (in)]

Standard configuration:

Wmin
BT in every 3rd row

(0.77)
19.5
(minimum every 2nd row)

18.75 (0.74)

(0.26)
Winc

6.5
CW or CCW

37.5 (1.48)
p

hm S-Curve
dpin
hpin
Wmin

Belt dimensions
p dpin hm hpin hs Wmin Winc Wtol Minimum flex radii1)
Width
Winc

Pin Width Width r1

Pitch Pin Ø Thickness Height tolerance r2 r3 r4 r5
position min. Increment Cc x WB
[%]
mm 25.0 5.0 12.0 6.0 0.0 100.0 25.0 ±0.3 2 x WB 50.0 50.0 75.0 25.0
inch 0.98 0.2 0.47 0.24 0.0 3.94 0.98 ±0.3 2 x WB 1.97 1.97 2.95 0.98
WB = Belt width, further information regarding r1 see page III-20
Available standard materials 3)
Nominal belt pull, Nominal belt pull, Width
Belt Pin Weight** Temperature Certificates2)
straight curve deviation
Material Color Material Color [N/mm] [lb/ft] [N] [lb] [kg/m2] [lb/ft2] [%] [°C] [°F] FDA EU
POM-CR DB SS 25 1713 1800 405 13.0 2.66 0.0 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●

** Belt weight: Please calculate 18 g extra for each ball-bearing

Additional information
Compatible belt types: S5-45 GRT / NTP / (FRT1 / FRT2 in PP)
Friction coefficient in curve: 0.04
Standard belt configuration: BT in every 3rd row (min. every 2nd row). CCW and CW –> BT on the outside of the curve. S-curve –> BT on both sides.
Reduced spacing will improve smooth belt running behaviour
Smallest sprocket size: Depends on belt configuration (BT every 2nd row –> min. sprocket Z11 – only with RD hub)

DB (Dark blue)

All measurements and tolerances apply at 21 °C; for temperature deviations please see Prolink manual chapter 4.4 “Temperature influence“.
All imperial dimensions (inches) are rounded off.
1) Flex radii: r1 = side flex, r2 = front flex on roller, r3 = back flex on load bearing roller, r4 = back flex on Hold Down shoe, r5 = back flex on roller
2) C omplies with FDA 21 CFR | Complies with (EU) 10/2011 and (EC) 1935/2004 regulations regarding the raw materials used and the migration
thresholds | Complies with Japanese MHLW Notification 370
● = available | – = not available | empty cells = not tested
3) More materials and colors on request

I-89 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 5 | SPROCKETS siegling prolink
modular belts
Side flexing and spiral belt | Pitch 25 mm (0.98 in)

S5 SPR | Sprockets

D0 Wspr

Main dimensions
Sprocket size
Z6 Z9 Z11 Z12 Z16 Z18 Z20
(Number of teeth)
mm 24.0 24.0 24.0 24.0 24.0 24.0 24.0
Wspr
inch 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94
mm 49.6 72.6 88.0 95.8 127.2 142.8 158.5
D0
inch 1.95 2.86 3.46 3.77 5.01 5.62 6.24
mm 18.8 30.3 38.0 41.9 57.6 65.4 73.3
Amax
inch 0.74 1.19 1.50 1.65 2.27 2.57 2.89
mm 16.3 28.5 36.5 40.5 56.5 64.4 72.4
Amin
inch 0.64 1.12 1.44 1.59 2.22 2.54 2.85

Shaft bores (● = Round, ■ = Square; ❍/ ❏ = not possible with S5 RG and G belts)

25 mm ●/❏ ● ●/■ ● ● ●
30 mm ●/❏ ● ● ● ● ●
40 mm ❏ ●/■ ●/■ ●/■ ●/■

0.75 inch ❍
1 inch ●/❏ ● ●/■ ● ● ●
1.25 inch ●/❏ ● ● ● ● ●
1.5 inch ❏ ●/■ ●/■ ●/■ ●/■

Material: PA, Color: LG

LG (Light gray)

All measurements and tolerances apply at 21 °C; for temperature deviations please see Prolink manual chapter 4.4 “Temperature influence“.
All imperial dimensions (inches) are rounded off.
For detailed sprocket and shaft dimensions see appendix 6.3
Number of sprockets (sprocket spacing distance) see chapter 3.2
Sprocket installation see chapter 5.2

I-90 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 5 | PROFILES siegling prolink
modular belts
Side flexing and spiral belt | Pitch 25 mm (0.98 in)

S5-45 GRT PMC

Open version (45 %) base module for drainage

h
Basic data
Height (h)
Material Color 25 mm 50 mm
1 inch 2 inch
PE WT ● ●
POM BL ● ●
POM DB ● ●
POM UC ● ●
POM WT ● ●
PP DB ● ●
PP WT ● ●

Molded width: 100 mm (3.9 in)

25 (0.98) (positioning increment)

PMC also available

for G, RG, ST types.

G = Indent 37.5 (1.48)

RG = Indent 50 (1.97)
ST = Indent 75 (2.95)

37.5 (1.48) (minimum indent)

BL (Blue), DB (Dark blue), UC (Uncolored), WT (White)

I-91 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 5 | SIDE GUARDS siegling prolink
modular belts
Side flexing and spiral belt | Pitch 25 mm (0.98 in)

S5 SG | Side guards
For retention of bulk products

h
Recommended running direction

Basic data
Height (h)
Material Color 25 mm 50 mm
1 inch 2 inch
POM-CR BL ●
POM-CR WT ● ●

22 (0.87) (indent)

BL (Blue), WT (White)

I-92 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

I-93 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024
1.2 DETAILED SERIES INFORMATION

siegling prolink
modular belts

SERIES 6.1
Straight running belts
Pitch 50 mm (1.97 in)

I-94 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 6.1 | OVERVIEW siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belts | Pitch 50 mm (1.97 in)

Belts for medium to heavy-duty, hygiene-critical applications

Side view scale 1:1 Available surface pattern and opening area

S6.1-0 FLT
Closed, smooth surface

S6.1-0 NTP
50 (1.97)
Closed surface and round studs

Design characteristics S6.1-0 CTP

– Wide modules and eyelets for less soiling Closed surface and pointed studs

– Hinges that open wide, wide channels on the underside S6.1-21 FLT
and a continuous drive bar for an easy-to-clean design Open (21 %), smooth surface
– Robust design and smooth,
cut-resistant surface (depending on material) S6.1-23 FLT
– Special sprocket design with enhanced tooth engage- Open (23 %), smooth surface
ment for excellent force transmission
S6.1-36 FLT
Open (36 %), smooth surface
Basic data
Pitch 50 mm (1.97 in)
Belt width min. 40 mm (1.57 in)
Width increments 20 mm (0.8 in)
Hinge pins 6 mm (0.24 in), made of plastic
(PBT, PP, PE, POM-MD, PP-MD).
NSF-compliant from these certified Forbo plants:
One-piece up to a belt width of
Huntersville (USA), Maharashtra (India), Malacky (Slovakia),
1200 mm (47 in). Sydney/NSW (Australia), Pinghu (China), Shizuoka (Japan),
Tlalnepantla (Mexico)

Sprockets Profiles Side guards Hold Down Tabs

in different sizes with round in different heights and designs in different heights for retention Hold Down Tabs for additional
or square bore for inclines. of bulk products guiding

I-95 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 6.1 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 50 mm (1.97 in)

S6.1-0 FLT | 0 % Opening | Flat top

Closed, smooth surface | Flat top surface | Easy-to-clean

dpin

hpin
Winc
Wmin
Belt dimensions
p dpin hm hpin hs Wmin Winc Wtol Minimum flex radii1)
Width
Pin Width Width r1
Pitch Pin Ø Thickness Height tolerance r2 r3 r4 r5
position min. Increment Cc x WB
[%]
mm 50.0 6.0 16.0 8.0 0.0 40.0 20.0 ±0.2 – 50.0 100.0 150.0 50.0
inch 1.97 0.24 0.63 0.31 0.0 1.57 0.79 ±0.2 – 1.97 3.94 5.91 1.97

Available standard materials 3)

Nominal belt pull, Width
Belt Pin Weight Temperature Certificates2)
straight deviation
Material Color Material Color [N/mm] [lb/ft] [kg/m2] [lb/ft2] [%] [°C] [°F] FDA EU MHLW
PE WT/LB PE WT/LB 13 891 9.4 1.93 -0.65 -70/65 -94/149 ● ● ●
POM WT/LB PBT UC/LB 30 2056 13.4 2.74 -0.65 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
POM-CR WT/LB PBT UC/LB 30 2056 13.4 2.74 -0.65 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
PP WT/LB PP WT/LB 18 1233 8.3 1.7 -0.0 5/100 41/212 ● ● ●
PE-MD BL POM-MD BL 13 891 9.8 2.01 -0.65 -70/65 -94/149 ● ●
POM-MD BL POM-MD BL 30 2056 13.7 2.81 -0.65 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
PP-MD BL PP-MD BL 18 1233 9.0 1.84 -0.0 5/100 41/212 ● ●
Mold to order belts
PA* BL PBT UC 30 2056 12.9 2.64 -0.0 -40/120 -40/248 ● ●
TPC1 LB PBT UC 13 891 11.6 2.38 -0.65 -25/80 -13/176 ● ●

Mold to width available in: 100 mm (3.94 in), 140 mm (5.51 in), 200 mm (7.87 in), 220 mm (8.66 in), 400 mm (15.75 in)
* Values valid for dry applications (RH <50 %). Belts in PA material will absorb water in wet environments, causing them to expand and reduce the
nominal belt pull capacity.

BL (Blue), LB (Light blue), UC (Uncolored), WT (White)

I-96 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 6.1 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 50 mm (1.97 in)

S6.1-0 NTP | 0 % Opening | Nub top (round studs)

Closed surface and round studs | 6 % contact area | Nub top surface for good release of wet and sticky products |
Easy-to-clean

hs
hm

dpin

hpin
Winc
Wmin
Belt dimensions
p dpin hm hpin hs Wmin Winc Wtol Minimum flex radii1)
Width
Pin Width Width r1
Pitch Pin Ø Thickness Height tolerance r2 r3 r4 r5
position min. Increment Cc x WB
[%]
mm 50.0 6.0 16.0 8.0 2.5 40.0 20.0 ±0.2 – 50.0 100.0 150.0 50.0
inch 1.97 0.24 0.63 0.31 0.1 1.57 0.79 ±0.2 – 1.97 3.94 5.91 1.97

Available standard materials 3)

Mold to order belts

PP PP 18 1233 8.4 1.72 0.0 5/100 41/212

Mold to width available in: 100 mm (3.94 in),

Also available with 200 mm (7.87 in), 400 mm (15.75 in)
molded indent
40 mm (1.57 in)
40 (1.57) (indent)

LB (Light blue), WT (White)

I-97 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 6.1 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 50 mm (1.97 in)

S6.1-0 CTP | 0 % Opening | Cone top (pointed studs)

Closed surface and pointed studs | Cone top surface pattern for superior grip | Easy-to-clean

hs
hm

dpin

hpin
Winc
Wmin
Belt dimensions
p dpin hm hpin hs Wmin Winc Wtol Minimum flex radii1)
Width
Pin Width Width r1
Pitch Pin Ø Thickness Height tolerance r2 r3 r4 r5
position min. Increment Cc x WB
[%]
mm 50.0 6.0 16.0 8.0 2.8 40.0 20.0 ±0.2 – 50.0 100.0 150.0 50.0
inch 1.97 0.24 0.63 0.31 0.11 1.57 0.79 ±0.2 – 1.97 3.94 5.91 1.97

Available standard materials 3)

Mold to order belts

PE PE 13 891 9.5 1.95 -0.65 -70/65 -94/149

Mold to width available in: 400 mm (15.75 in)

UC (Uncolored), WT (White)

All measurements and tolerances apply at 21 °C; for temperature deviations please see Prolink manual chapter 4.4 “Temperature influence“.
All imperial dimensions (inches) are rounded off.
1) Flex radii: r1 = side flex, r2 = front flex on roller, r3 = back flex on load bearing roller, r4 = back flex on Hold Down shoe, r5 = back flex on roller
2) C omplies with FDA 21 CFR | Complies with (EU) 10/2011 and (EC) 1935/2004 regulations regarding the raw materials used and the migration
thresholds | Complies with Japanese MHLW Notification 370
● = available | – = not available | empty cells = not tested
3) More materials and colors on request

I-98 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 6.1 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 50 mm (1.97 in)

S6.1-21 FLT | 21 % Opening | Flat top

Open area (21 %) for excellent air circulation and drainage | 72 % contact area (Largest opening: 1.9 x 11 mm/0.07 x 0.43 in) |
Smooth surface | Easy-to-clean

p Variant specific dimensions [mm (in)]

1.9 (0.07)
hm 11 (0.43)

dpin

hpin
Winc
Wmin

Available standard materials 3)

Nominal belt pull, Width
Belt Pin Weight Temperature Certificates2)
straight deviation
Material Color Material Color [N/mm] [lb/ft] [kg/m2] [lb/ft2] [%] [°C] [°F] FDA EU MHLW
PE WT PE WT 13 891 7.8 1.6 -0.5 -70/65 -94/149 ● ● ●
PE LB PE LB 13 891 7.8 1.6 -0.5 -70/65 -94/149 ● ● ●
POM WT PBT UC 30 2056 10.8 2.21 -0.5 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
POM LB PBT LB 30 2056 10.8 2.21 -0.5 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
PP WT PP WT 18 1233 6.7 1.37 0.0 5/100 41/212 ● ● ●
PP LB PP LB 18 1233 6.7 1.37 0.0 5/100 41/212 ● ● ●

Mold to width available in: 100 mm (3.94 in), 200 mm (7.87 in)

LB (Light blue), UC (Uncolored), WT (White)

All measurements and tolerances apply at 21 °C; for temperature deviations please see Prolink manual chapter 4.4 “Temperature influence“.
All imperial dimensions (inches) are rounded off.
1) Flex radii: r1 = side flex, r2 = front flex on roller, r3 = back flex on load bearing roller, r4 = back flex on Hold Down shoe, r5 = back flex on roller
2) C omplies with FDA 21 CFR | Complies with (EU) 10/2011 and (EC) 1935/2004 regulations regarding the raw materials used and the migration
thresholds | Complies with Japanese MHLW Notification 370
● = available | – = not available | empty cells = not tested
3) More materials and colors on request

I-99 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 6.1 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 50 mm (1.97 in)

S6.1-23 FLT | 23 % Opening | Flat top

Open area (23 %) for excellent air circulation and drainage | 71 % contact area | Smooth surface | Easy-to-clean

p Variant specific dimensions [mm (in)]

4.3 (0.17)
hm 11.3 (0.44)

dpin

hpin
Winc
Wmin

Available standard materials 3)

Nominal belt pull, Width
Belt Pin Weight Temperature Certificates2)
straight deviation
Material Color Material Color [N/mm] [lb/ft] [kg/m2] [lb/ft2] [%] [°C] [°F] FDA EU MHLW
PE WT PE WT 13 891 8.2 1.68 -0.5 -70/65 -94/149 ● ● ●
PE LB PE LB 13 891 8.2 1.68 -0.5 -70/65 -94/149 ● ● ●
POM WT PBT UC 30 2056 11.3 2.31 -0.5 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
POM LB PBT LB 30 2056 11.3 2.31 -0.5 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
PP WT PP WT 18 1233 7.0 1.43 0.0 5/100 41/212 ● ● ●
PP LB PP LB 18 1233 7.0 1.43 0.0 5/100 41/212 ● ● ●

Mold to order belts

PE-MD BL POM-MD BL 13 891 8.9 1.82 -0.5 -70/65 -94/149 ● ●
POM-CR PBT 30 2056 11.3 2.31 -0.5 -45/90 -49/194
PE-I UC PE WT 13 891 8.2 1.68 -0.5 -70/65 -94/149 ● ●

Mold to width available in: 100 mm (3.94 in), 200 mm (7.87 in), 400 mm (15.75 in)

BL (Blue), LB (Light blue), UC (Uncolored), WT (White)

I-100 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 6.1 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 50 mm (1.97 in)

S6.1-36 FLT | 36 % Opening | Flat top

Open area (36 %) for excellent air circulation and drainage | 35 % contact area (Largest opening: 11.8 x 14.4 mm/0.46 x 0.57 in)
Smooth surface | Easy-to-clean

p Variant specific dimensions [mm (in)]

11.8 (0.46)
hm 14.4 (0.57)

dpin

hpin
Winc
Wmin

Available standard materials 3)

Nominal belt pull, Width
Belt Pin Weight Temperature Certificates2)
straight deviation
Material Color Material Color [N/mm] [lb/ft] [kg/m2] [lb/ft2] [%] [°C] [°F] FDA EU MHLW
PE WT PE WT 13 891 6.2 1.27 -0.5 -70/65 -94/149 ● ● ●
PE LB PE LB 13 891 6.2 1.27 -0.5 -70/65 -94/149 ● ● ●
POM WT PBT UC 30 2056 9.0 1.84 -0.5 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
POM LB PBT LB 30 2056 9.0 1.84 -0.5 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
PP WT PP WT 18 1233 5.9 1.21 0.0 5/100 41/212 ● ● ●
PP LB PP LB 18 1233 5.9 1.21 0.0 5/100 41/212 ● ● ●

Mold to order belts

PP-MD BL PP-MD BL 18 1233 6.4 1.31 0.0 5/100 41/212 ● ●
PE-MD BL POM-MD BL 13 891 6.7 1.37 -0.5 -70/65 -94/149 ● ●
POM-MD BL POM-MD BL 30 2056 9.2 1.88 -0.5 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●

Attention! Due to the very large surface openings, personnel must be instructed not to place their fingers in or on this belt.

BL (Blue), LB (Light blue), UC (Uncolored), WT (White)

I-101 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 6.1 | SPROCKETS siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 50 mm (1.97 in)

S6.1 SPR | Sprockets

Special easy-to-clean sprocket with enhanced tooth engagement for excellent force transmission

D0 Wspr

Main dimensions
Sprocket size
Z6 Z8 Z10 Z12 Z16
(Number of teeth)
mm 38.0 38.0 38.0 38.0 38.0
Wspr
inch 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
mm 101.6 132.9 163.5 195.3 257.8
D0
inch 4.00 5.23 6.44 7.69 10.15
mm 41.6 57.8 73.3 89.3 120.7
Amax
inch 1.64 2.28 2.89 3.52 4.75
mm 36.0 53.4 69.7 86.3 118.4
Amin
inch 1.42 2.10 2.74 3.40 4.66

Shaft bores (● = Round, ■ = Square)

30 mm ● ● ●
40 mm ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
60 mm ■ ■ ■

1 inch ● ● ●
1.25 inch ● ●
1.44 inch ●
1.5 inch ■ ■ ■ ●/■ ■
2 inch ■ ■
2.5 inch ■ ■ ■

Material: PA, Color: LG

LG (Light gray)

I-102 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 6.1 | PROFILES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 50 mm (1.97 in)

S6.1-0 FLT PMU/S6.1-0 FLT PMU I40

Flat top surface for dry products

h
40

Basic data
Height (h)
Material Color 50 mm 100 mm 150 mm
2 inch 4 inch 6 inch
PE LB/WT ●/▲ ●/▲ ●
POM-CR LB ●
POM LB/WT ●/▲ ●/▲ ●/▲
POM-MD BL ● ● ●
PP LB/WT ●/▲ ●/▲ ●
PP-MD BL ●

● = no indent, ▲ = with indent 40 mm Molded width: 200 mm (7.9 in)

40 (1.57) (minimum indent)

20 (0.79) (positioning increment) 40 (1.57) (minimum indent)

Standard configuration S6.1-0 FLT PMU Indent configuration S6.1-0 FLT PMU Standard configuration S6.1-0 FLT PMU I40

BL (Blue), LB (Light blue), WT (White)

I-103 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 6.1 | PROFILES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 50 mm (1.97 in)

S6.1-0 NCL PMU

No cling surface with nub top base to improve release of wet and sticky products

h
Basic data
Height (h)
Material Color 100 mm
4 inch
PE LB ●
PE WT ●

Molded width: 200 mm (7.9 in)

40 (1.57) (minimum indent)

20 (0.79) (positioning increment)

Standard configuration S6.1-0 NCL PMU Indent configuration S6.1-0 NCL PMU

LB (Light blue), WT (White)

I-104 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 6.1 | PROFILES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 50 mm (1.97 in)

S6.1-23 NCL PMU

No cling surface with open area base (23 %) to improve release of wet and sticky products

h
Basic data
Height (h)
Material Color 100 mm
4 inch
PE LB ●
PE WT ●
PP LB ●
PP WT ●

Molded width: 200 mm (7.9 in)

40 (1.57) (minimum indent)

20 (0.79) (positioning increment)

Standard configuration S6.1-23 NCL PMU Indent configuration S6.1-23 NCL PMU

LB (Light blue), WT (White)

I-105 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 6.1 | PROFILES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 50 mm (1.97 in)

S6.1-0 FLT PSU-0

Scooped profiles with a closed, flat top surface for steep incline conveyors

50 (2)

h
Basic data
Height (h)
Material Color 76 mm 102 mm 152 mm
3 inch 4 inch 6 inch
PE LB ● ● ●
PE WT ● ● ●
POM LB ● ● ●
POM WT ● ● ●
PP LB ● ● ●
PP WT ● ● ●
PP-MD BL ● ●

Molded width: 200 mm (7.9 in)

40 (1.57) (minimum indent)
20 (0.79) (positioning increment)

Standard configuration S6.1-0 FLT PSU-0 Indent configuration S6.1-0 FLT PSU-0

BL (Blue), LB (Light blue), WT (White)

I-106 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 6.1 | PROFILES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 50 mm (1.97 in)

S6.1-0 FLT PSU-16

Scooped profiles with 16 % open area and a flat top surface allowing product drainage when conveying up steep inclines

50 (2)

h
Basic data
Height (h)
Material Color 102 mm 152 mm
4 inch 6 inch
PE LB ● ●
PE WT ● ●
POM LB ● ●
POM WT ● ●
PP LB ● ●
PP WT ● ●

Molded width: 200 mm (7.9 in)

40 (1.57) (minimum indent)

20 (0.79) (positioning increment)

Standard configuration S6.1-0 FLT PSU-16 Indent configuration S6.1-0 FLT PSU-16

LB (Light blue), WT (White)

I-107 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 6.1 | PROFILES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 50 mm (1.97 in)

S6.1-0 FLT BPU

Bucket Profiles for contained conveying of bulk products up steep inclines

50 (2)

h
Basic data
Height (h)
Material Color 102 mm 152 mm
4 inch 6 inch
PE LB ● ●
PE WT ● ●
POM LB ● ●
POM WT ● ●
PP LB ● ●
PP WT ● ●

Molded width: 200 mm (7.9 in)

40 (1.57) (minimum indent)

20 (0.79) (positioning increment)

Standard configuration S6.1-0 FLT BPU Indent configuration S6.1-0 FLT BPU

LB (Light blue), WT (White)

I-108 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 6.1 | SIDE GUARDS siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 50 mm (1.97 in)

S6.1 SG | Side guards

For retention of bulk products

h
Recommended running direction

Basic data
Height (h)
Material Color 25 mm 50 mm 75 mm 100 mm
1 inch 2 inch 3 inch 4 inch
PE LB ● ● ● ●
PE WT ● ● ● ●
PE-MD BL ● ● ●
PP LB ● ● ● ●
PP WT ● ● ● ●

10 (0.39) (positioning increment)

10 (0.39) (minimum indent)

BL (Blue), LB (Light blue), WT (White)

I-109 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 6.1 | HOLD DOWN TABS siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 50 mm (1.97 in)

S6.1 HDT | Hold Down Tabs

Used on wider belts to prevent lift an swan neck conveyors | To improve strength, stability and cleanability
they are moulded on a narrow module

20 (0.79)

(0.63)
16
(1.57)
6
40

(0.67)
17
(0.24)

30 (1.18)

Basic data Example

Material Color
LB 1000 (39.37)
POM
WT 510 (20.08) 10 (0.39)

Using Hold Down Tabs results in con-

strains with regards to sprocket and
shaft size to ensure sufficient clearance 6 — 12.5
Belt center line
to the shaft (see also chapter 3.3 hold 12 (0.47) (0.24 — 0.49)
down tabs).

Sprocket options using HDT

Sprocket size Maximum bore round Maximum bore square
(Number of teeth) [mm] [inch] [mm] [inch]
Z6 20 0.75 15 0.5
Z8 50 1.75 40 1.5
Z10 80 3.0 60 2.5
Z12 110 4.25 85 3.25
Z16 170 6.5 130 5.25

LB (Light blue), WT (White)

I-110 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 6.1 | PRR siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 50 mm (1.97 in)

S6.1 PRR | Pin Retained Rollers

For applications where low back pressure accumulation or product separation is required

hs
a

drol
Winc
Wmin
b
w

smin

Dimensions
– For low back pressure wearstrips are w 20 mm (0.79 in) Roller cut out width (roller width 19 mm (0.75 in))
to be positioned between the rollers hs 2.0 mm (0.08 in) Height of rollers above surface
drol 20 mm (0.79 in) Roller diameter
– For product separation the wear- a 40 mm (1.6 in) Minimum indent
strips are to be positioned below the b 80 mm (3.15 in) Standard distance between rollers across belt width
s n x smin Roller spacing in travel direction (standard: n = 1)
rollers smin 50 mm (2.0 in) Min. roller spacing in travel direction
Winc 100 mm (3.9 in) Width increment
– For all materials and surfaces Wmin 200 mm (7.9 in) Min. belt width
– Rollers available in POM BK WB Belt width
nrol Number of rollers across belt width

Allowable belt pull

To determine admissible belt pull calculate effective belt width WB,ef by
WB,ef = WB – (w x nrol)
Example: WB = 400 mm (15.75 in); w = 20 mm (0.79 in); nrol = 4
WB,ef = 400 – (20 x 4) = 320 mm
WB,ef = 15.75 – (0.79 x 4) = 12.6 in

Note: Sprocket must not be placed inline with rollers. Deviation in roller spacing possible, please
get in contact to customer service. Coefficient of friction between belt and conveyed product in
accumulation mode µacc = 0.04, I.e. the accumulation pressure is approx. 4 % of the weight of the
backed up product.

I-111 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

1.2 DETAILED SERIES INFORMATION

siegling prolink
modular belts

SERIES 7
Straight running belts
Pitch 40 mm (1.57 in)

I-112 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 7 | OVERVIEW siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belts | Pitch 40 mm (1.57 in)

Belts for heavy-duty non-food applications

Side view scale 1:1 Available surface pattern and opening area

S7-0 FLT
Closed, smooth surface

S7-0 SRS
40 (1.57) Closed, slip-resistant surface

S7-6 FLT
Design characteristics Open (6 %), smooth surface
– Closed-hinge design provides high belt pull capacity
S7-0 NSK
– Small-pitch relative to belt thickness makes belt suitable Closed surface with non skid pattern
for compact, heavily loaded conveyors
– Robust design with large surface contact area S7-6 NSK
ensures superior wear life Open (6 %) surface with
– Closed solid edge non skid pattern

– Flame retardant version available S7-0 FRT1

(PXX-HC – in line with DIN EN 13501-1) Closed surface with friction top

Basic data
Pitch 40 mm (1.57 in)
Belt width min. 80 mm (3.15 in)
360 mm (14.2 in) for belts with
FRT-surface (side modules only available
without FRT-surface)
Width increments 20 mm (0.8 in) FRT-surface on request
Hinge pins 6 mm (0.24 in) made of plastic (PBT)
or stainless steel

Sprockets Wheelstopper
in different sizes with round used for securing the position
or square bore of vehicles on the belt

I-113 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 7 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 40 mm (1.57 in)

S7-0 FLT | 0 % Opening | Flat top

Closed, smooth surface | Flat top surface

dpin

hpin
Winc
Wmin
Belt dimensions
p dpin hm hpin hs Wmin Winc Wtol Minimum flex radii1)
Width
Pin Width Width r1
Pitch Pin Ø Thickness Height tolerance r2 r3 r4 r5
position min. Increment Cc x WB
[%]
mm 40.0 6.0 18.0 9.0 0.0 80.0 20.0 ±0.2 – 40.0 80.0 120.0 40.0
inch 1.57 0.24 0.71 0.35 0.0 3.15 0.79 ±0.2 – 1.57 3.15 4.72 1.57

Available standard materials 3)

Nominal belt pull, Width
Belt Pin Weight Temperature Certificates2)
straight deviation
Material Color Material Color [N/mm] [lb/ft] [kg/m2] [lb/ft2] [%] [°C] [°F] Flame retardant
POM AT PBT UC 50 3426 18.3 3.75 -0.75 -45/90 -49/194 –
POM AT SS 60 4111 22.8 4.67 -0.75 -45/90 -49/194 –
POM YL PBT UC 50 3426 18.3 3.75 -0.75 -45/90 -49/194 –
POM YL SS 60 4111 22.8 4.67 -0.75 -45/90 -49/194 –
POM-HC AT PBT UC 50 3426 18.8 3.85 -0.75 -45/90 -49/194 –
POM-HC AT SS 60 4111 23.3 4.77 -0.75 -45/90 -49/194 –
Mold to order belts
PE PE UC 18 1233 12.3 2.52 -0.35 -70/65 -94/149 –
PP PP WT 30 2056 11.6 2.38 0.0 5/100 41/212 –
PP SS 30 2056 16.5 3.38 0.0 5/100 41/212 –
PXX-HC BK PBT UC 30 2056 12.8 2.62 -0.13 5/100 41/212 ●
PXX-HC BK SS 30 2056 17.7 3.63 -0.13 5/100 41/212 ●

AT (Anthracite), BK (Black), UC (Uncolored), WT (White), YL (Yellow)

I-114 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 7 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 40 mm (1.57 in)

S7-0 SRS | 0 % Opening | Slip-resistant

Closed surface | Slip-resistant surface, pleasant to walk and kneel on | Flat top surface

dpin

hpin
Winc
Wmin
Belt dimensions
p dpin hm hpin hs Wmin Winc Wtol Minimum flex radii1)
Width
Pin Width Width r1
Pitch Pin Ø Thickness Height tolerance r2 r3 r4 r5
position min. Increment Cc x WB
[%]
mm 40.0 6.0 18.0 9.0 0.0 80.0 20.0 ±0.2 – 40.0 80.0 120.0 40.0
inch 1.57 0.24 0.71 0.35 0.0 3.15 0.79 ±0.2 – 1.57 3.15 4.72 1.57

Available standard materials 3)

Nominal belt pull, Width
Belt Pin Weight Temperature Certificates2)
straight deviation
Material Color Material Color [N/mm] [lb/ft] [kg/m2] [lb/ft2] [%] [°C] [°F] Flame retardant
POM AT PBT UC 50 3426 18.3 3.75 -0.75 -45/90 -49/194 –
POM AT SS 60 4111 22.8 4.67 -0.75 -45/90 -49/194 –
POM YL PBT UC 50 3426 18.3 3.75 -0.75 -45/90 -49/194 –
POM YL SS 60 4111 22.8 4.67 -0.75 -45/90 -49/194 –
POM-HC AT PBT UC 50 3426 18.8 3.85 -0.75 -45/90 -49/194 –
POM-HC AT SS 60 4111 23.3 4.77 -0.75 -45/90 -49/194 –
PXX-HC BK PBT UC 30 2056 12.8 2.62 -0.13 5/100 41/212 ●
PXX-HC BK SS 30 2056 17.7 3.63 -0.13 5/100 41/212 ●

AT (Anthracite), BK (Black), UC (Uncolored), YL (Yellow)

I-115 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 7 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 40 mm (1.57 in)

S7-6 FLT | 6 % Opening | Flat top

Open area (6 %) increases drainage capacity | Smooth surface

p Variant specific dimensions [mm (in)]

dpin

hpin
Winc
Wmin

Belt dimensions
p dpin hm hpin hs Wmin Winc Wtol Minimum flex radii1)
Width
Pin Width Width r1
Pitch Pin Ø Thickness Height tolerance r2 r3 r4 r5
position min. Increment Cc x WB
[%]
mm 40.0 6.0 18.0 9.0 0.0 80.0 20.0 ±0.2 – 40.0 80.0 120.0 40.0
inch 1.57 0.24 0.71 0.35 0.0 3.15 0.79 ±0.2 – 1.57 3.15 4.72 1.57

Available standard materials 3)

Mold to order belts

PE PE UC 18 1233 11.3 2.31 0.0 -70/65 -94/149 –
PP PP WT 30 2056 10.7 2.19 0.0 5/100 41/212 –
PP SS 30 2056 15.6 3.2 0.0 5/100 41/212 –
POM-HC AT PBT UC 50 3426 17.3 3.54 -0.75 -45/90 -49/194 –
POM-HC AT SS 60 4111 21.4 4.38 -0.75 -45/90 -49/194 –
PXX-HC BK PBT UC 30 2056 11.8 2.42 -0.13 5/100 41/212 ●
PXX-HC BK SS 30 2056 16.3 3.34 -0.13 5/100 41/212 ●

AT (Anthracite), BK (Black), UC (Uncolored), WT (White)

I-116 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 7 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 40 mm (1.57 in)

S7-0 NSK | 0 % Opening | Non skid

Closed surface | Non skid surface for safety when walking on belt

Variant specific dimensions [mm (in)]

hs
hm

dpin

hpin
Winc

20 (0.79)
Wmin

Belt dimensions
p dpin hm hpin hs Wmin Winc Wtol Minimum flex radii1)
Width
Pin Width Width r1
Pitch Pin Ø Thickness Height tolerance r2 r3 r4 r5
position min. Increment Cc x WB
[%]
mm 40.0 6.0 18.0 9.0 2.0 80.0 20.0 ±0.2 – 40.0 80.0 120.0 40.0
inch 1.57 0.24 0.71 0.35 0.08 3.15 0.79 ±0.2 – 1.57 3.15 4.72 1.57

Available standard materials 3)

Mold to order belts

PP PP WT 30 2056 13.3 2.72 -0.13 5/100 41/212 –
PP SS 30 2056 18.2 3.73 -0.13 5/100 41/212 –

AT (Anthracite), BK (Black), UC (Uncolored), WT (White)

I-117 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 7 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 40 mm (1.57 in)

S7-6 NSK | 6 % Opening | Non skid

Open area (6 %) | Non skid surface with drainage holes for safety when walking on wet belts

Variant specific dimensions [mm (in)]

hs
hm

dpin

hpin
Winc

20 (0.79)
Wmin

Belt dimensions
p dpin hm hpin hs Wmin Winc Wtol Minimum flex radii1)
Width
Pin Width Width r1
Pitch Pin Ø Thickness Height tolerance r2 r3 r4 r5
position min. Increment Cc x WB
[%]
mm 40.0 6.0 18.0 9.0 2.0 80.0 20.0 ±0.2 – 40.0 80.0 120.0 40.0
inch 1.57 0.24 0.71 0.35 0.08 3.15 0.79 ±0.2 – 1.57 3.15 4.72 1.57

Available standard materials 3)

Mold to order belts

PP PP WT 30 2056 11.2 2.29 -0.13 5/100 41/212 –
PP SS 30 2056 14.1 2.89 -0.13 5/100 41/212 –
PXX-HC BK PBT UC 30 2056 12.3 2.52 -0.13 5/100 41/212 ●
PXX-HC BK SS 30 2056 17.2 3.52 -0.13 5/100 41/212 ●

AT (Anthracite), BK (Black), UC (Uncolored), WT (White)

I-118 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 7 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 40 mm (1.57 in)

S7-0 FRT1 | 0 % Opening | Friction top (Design 1)

Closed surface | Friction top version with replaceable rubber pads provides increased grip

Variant specific dimensions [mm (in)]

hs
hm

83 (3.23)
dpin

hpin
Winc

6 (0.24)
Wmin

Belt dimensions
p dpin hm hpin hs Wmin Winc Wtol Minimum flex radii1)
Width
Pin Width Width r1
Pitch Pin Ø Thickness Height tolerance r2 r3 r4 r5
position min. Increment Cc x WB
[%]
mm 40.0 6.0 18.0 9.0 3.0 360.0 200.0 ±0.2 – 40.0 80.0 120.0 40.0
inch 1.57 0.24 0.71 0.35 0.12 14.17 7.87 ±0.2 – 1.57 3.15 4.72 1.57

Available standard materials 3)

Nominal belt pull, Width
Belt Pin Rubber Weight Temperature Certificates2)
straight deviation
Material Color Material Color Material Color [N/mm] [lb/ft] [kg/m2] [lb/ft2] [%] [°C] [°F] Flame retardant
POM AT PBT UC R2 BK 50 3426 19.0 3.89 -0.75 -45/90 -49/194 –
POM AT SS R2 BK 60 4111 23.5 4.81 -0.75 -45/90 -49/194 –

Mold to order belts

PE PE UC R2 BK 18 1233 13.0 2.66 -0.35 -70/65 -94/149 –
PP PP WT R2 BK 30 2056 12.4 2.54 0.0 5/100 41/212 –
PP SS R2 BK 30 2056 17.3 3.54 0.0 5/100 41/212 –

AT (Anthracite), BK (Black), UC (Uncolored), WT (White)

I-119 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 7 | SPROCKETS siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 40 mm (1.57 in)

S7 SPR | Sprockets

D0 Wspr

Main dimensions
Sprocket size
Z10 Z16* Z16 V2** Z20* Z20 V2**
(Number of teeth)
mm 39.0 39.0 39.0 39.0 39.0
Wspr
inch 1.54 1.54 1.54 1.54 1.54
mm 129.7 205.9 204.8 256.2 255.1
D0
inch 5.11 8.11 8.06 10.09 10.04
mm 55.9 93.9 93.5 119.1 118.6
Amax
inch 2.20 3.70 3.68 4.69 4.67
mm 53.2 92.1 91.5 117.6 117.1
Amin
inch 2.09 3.63 3.60 4.63 4.61

Shaft bores (● = Round, ■ = Square)

40 mm ■
60 mm ■ ■ ■ ■
80 mm ■ ■ ■ ■
90 mm ■ ■

1.5 inch ■
2.5 inch ■ ■ ■ ■
3.5 inch ■ ■

Material: PA, Color: LG

* not recommended for the material /pin combination POM/SS
** new update V2 design to improve performance for the material/pin combination POM/SS

LG (Light gray)

I-120 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 7 | WHEELSTOPPER siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 40 mm (1.57 in)

S7-0 FLT WSC | Wheelstopper

Stiff and strong profiles (interrupted for finger plates)

h
Basic data
Height (h)
Material Color 30 mm
1.2 inch
POM DB ●

Molded width: 160 mm (6.3 in)

40 (1.57) (minimum indent)

20 (0.79) (positioning increment)

Configuration S7-0 FLT WSC

DB (Dark blue)

I-121 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 7 | WHEELSTOPPER siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 40 mm (1.57 in)

S7-0 NCL WSS I20 | Wheelstopper

Smalll and stiff profiles (interrupted for finger plates)

h
Basic data
Height (h)
Material Color 13 mm
0.5 inch
POM YL ●

Molded width: 80 mm (3.2 in), 120 mm (4.7 in)

20 (0.79) (positioning increment)

Configuration S7-0 NCL WSS I20

YL (Yellow)

I-122 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 7 | PRR siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 40 mm (1.57 in)

S7 PRR | Pin Retained Rollers

For applications where low back pressure accumulation or product separation is required

hs
a

drol
Winc
b

Wmin
w

smin

Dimensions
– For low back pressure wearstrips are w 20 mm (0.79 in) Roller cut out width (roller width 19 mm (0.75 in))
to be positioned between the rollers hs 3.5 mm (0.14 in) Height of rollers above surface
drol 25 mm (0.98 in) Roller diameter
– For product separation the wear- a 40 mm (1.6 in) Minimum indent
strips are to be positioned below the b 80 mm (3.15 in) Standard distance between rollers across belt width
s n x smin Roller spacing in travel direction (standard: n = 2)
rollers smin 40 mm (1.6 in) Min. roller spacing in travel direction
Winc 100 mm (3.9 in) Width increment
– For all materials and surfaces Wmin 200 mm (7.9 in) Min. belt width
– Rollers available in POM BK WB Belt width
nrol Number of rollers across belt width

Allowable belt pull

I-123 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

1.2 DETAILED SERIES INFORMATION

siegling prolink
modular belts

SERIES 8
Straight running belts
Pitch 25.4 mm (1 in)

TE D
PATEN

I-124 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 8 | OVERVIEW siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belts | Pitch 25.4 mm (1 in)

Belts for medium to heavy-duty applications

Side view scale 1:1 Available surface pattern and opening area

S8.1-0 FLT
Closed, smooth surface
25.4 (1)
S8.1-0 SRS
Closed, slip-resistant surface

Design characteristics
– Closed hinge design provides high belt pull capacity S8.1-0 NSK/S8.1-0 NSK2
Closed surface with non skid pattern
– Rigid module design makes belt suitable for
long conveyors S8-25 RAT
– Exceptionally robust and durable module and Open (25 %) surface
sprocket design with rounded contact surfaces
– Closed solid edge design
S8.1-30 FLT
– Flame retardant version available Open (30 %) flat top surface
(PXX-HC – in line with DIN EN 13501-1) with rounded hinges

Basic data S8-0 FRT1

Pitch 25.4 mm (1 in) Closed surface with friction top

Belt width min. 38.1 mm (1.5 in) S8-0 RTP A90

Width increments 12.7 mm (0.5 in) Closed surface with roller top
Hinge pins 5 mm (0.2 in) made of plastic
(PBT, PP, PA-HT).
One-piece up to a belt width of
1200 mm (47 in).

Sprockets Profiles Side guards Hold Down Tabs

in different sizes with round in different heights and designs in different heights for retention Hold Down Tabs for additional
or square bore, one part and split for inclines of bulk products guiding

I-125 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 8 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 25.4 mm (1 in)

S8.1-0 FLT | 0 % Opening | Flat top

Closed, smooth surface | Flat top surface

dpin

hpin
Winc
Belt dimensions Wmin
p dpin hm hpin hs Wmin Winc Wtol Minimum flex radii1)
Width
Pin Width Width r1
Pitch Pin Ø Thickness Height tolerance r2 r3 r4 r5
position min. Increment Cc x WB
[%]
mm 25.4 5.0 10.5 5.3 0.0 38.1 12.7 ±0.2 – 25.4 50.8 76.2 25.4
inch 1.0 0.2 0.41 0.21 0.0 1.5 0.5 ±0.2 – 1.0 2.0 3.0 1.0

Available standard materials 3)

Nominal belt pull, Width
Belt Pin Weight Temperature Certificates2)
straight deviation
Material Color Material Color [N/mm] [lb/ft] [kg/m2] [lb/ft2] [%] [°C] [°F] FDA EU
POM BL PBT BL 40 2741 11.0 2.25 -0.31 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
POM LG PBT UC 40 2741 11.0 2.25 -0.31 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
POM WT PBT UC 40 2741 11.0 2.25 -0.31 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
POM-CR AT PBT UC 40 2741 11.0 2.25 -0.31 -45/90 -49/194
PP WT PP WT 20 1370 7.1 1.45 0.0 5/100 41/212 ● ●
PP LG PP WT 20 1370 7.1 1.45 0.0 5/100 41/212 ● ●
PP BL PP BL 20 1370 7.1 1.45 0.0 5/100 41/212 ● ●
PA-HT BK PA-HT BK 30 2056 10.7 2.19 1.49 -30/155 -22/311 – –

Mold to order belts

PXX-HC BK PBT BL 20 1370 7.9 1.62 0.0 5/100 41/212 – –

Mold to width available in: 51 mm (2.0 in), 76 mm (3.0 in), 152 mm (6.0 in), 229 mm (9.0 in)

AT (Anthracite), BK (Black), BL (Blue), LG (Light gray), UC (Uncolored), WT (White)

I-126 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 8 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 25.4 mm (1 in)

S8.1-0 SRS | 0 % Opening | Slip-resistant surface

Closed surface | Slip-resistant surface, pleasant to walk and kneel on

dpin

hpin
Winc
Belt dimensions Wmin

p dpin hm hpin hs Wmin Winc Wtol Minimum flex radii1)

Width
Pin Width Width r1
Pitch Pin Ø Thickness Height tolerance r2 r3 r4 r5
position min. Increment Cc x WB
[%]
mm 25.4 5.0 10.5 5.3 0.0 38.1 12.7 ±0.2 – 25.4 50.8 76.2 25.4
inch 1.0 0.2 0.41 0.21 0.0 1.5 0.5 ±0.2 – 1.0 2.0 3.0 1.0

Available standard materials 3)

Nominal belt pull, Width
Belt Pin Weight Temperature Certificates2)
straight deviation
Material Color Material Color [N/mm] [lb/ft] [kg/m2] [lb/ft2] [%] [°C] [°F] Flame retardant
POM-CR AT PBT BL 40 2741 11.0 2.25 -0.31 -45/90 -49/194 –
POM-HC AT PBT BL 40 2741 11.0 2.25 -0.31 -45/90 -49/194 –
PXX-HC BK PBT BL 20 1370 7.9 1.62 0.0 5/100 41/212 ●

Mold to width available in: 51 mm (2.0 in), 76 mm (3.0 in), 152 mm (6.0 in), 229 mm (9.0 in)

AT (Anthracite), BK (Black), BL (Blue)

I-127 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 8 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 25.4 mm (1 in)

S8.1-0 NSK | 0 % Opening | Non skid

Closed surface | Non skid surface for increased safety when walking on belt | Flat top sections across the belt width
for supporting the belt on the return

p Variant specific dimensions

hs
[mm (in)]
hm

dpin

hpin

(0.5)
12.7
Winc
Wmin

25.4
(1)
Belt dimensions
p dpin hm hpin hs Wmin Winc Wtol Minimum flex radii1)
Width
Pin Width Width r1
Pitch Pin Ø Thickness Height tolerance r2 r3 r4 r5
position min. Increment Cc x WB
[%]
mm 25.4 5.0 10.5 5.3 2.0 38.1 12.7 ±0.2 – 25.4 50.8 76.2 25.4
inch 1.0 0.2 0.41 0.21 0.08 1.5 0.5 ±0.2 – 1.0 2.0 3.0 1.0

Available standard materials 3)

Mold to width available in: 229 mm (9.0 in)

BK (Black), BL (Blue), LG (Light gray), WT (White)

All measurements and tolerances apply at 21 °C; for temperature deviations please see Prolink manual chapter 4.4 “Temperature influence“.
All imperial dimensions (inches) are rounded off.
1) Flex radii: r1 = side flex, r2 = front flex on roller, r3 = back flex on load bearing roller, r4 = back flex on Hold Down shoe, r5 = back flex on roller
2) C omplies with FDA 21 CFR | Complies with (EU) 10/2011 and (EC) 1935/2004 regulations regarding the raw materials used and the migration
thresholds | Complies with Japanese MHLW Notification 370
● = available | – = not available | empty cells = not tested
3) More materials and colors on request

I-128 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 8 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 25.4 mm (1 in)

S8.1-0 NSK2 | 0 % Opening | Non skid (Design 2)

Closed surface | Non skid surface for increased safety when walking on belt | Uninterrupted NSK-structure across the full
belt width

hs
hm

dpin

hpin
Winc
Belt dimensions Wmin
p dpin hm hpin hs Wmin Winc Wtol Minimum flex radii1)
Width
Pin Width Width r1
Pitch Pin Ø Thickness Height tolerance r2 r3 r4 r5
position min. Increment Cc x WB
[%]
mm 25.4 5.0 10.5 5.3 2.0 38.1 12.7 ±0.2 – 25.4 50.8 76.2 25.4
inch 1.0 0.2 0.41 0.21 0.08 1.5 0.5 ±0.2 – 1.0 2.0 3.0 1.0

Available standard materials 3)

Nominal belt pull, Width
Belt Pin Weight Temperature Certificates2)
straight deviation
Material Color Material Color [N/mm] [lb/ft] [kg/m2] [lb/ft2] [%] [°C] [°F] FDA EU
PP LG PP WT 20 1370 7.1 1.45 0.0 5/100 41/212 ● ●

Mold to width available in: 229 mm (9.0 in)

LG (Light gray), WT (White)

All measurements and tolerances apply at 21 °C; for temperature deviations please see Prolink manual chapter 4.4 “Temperature influence“.
All imperial dimensions (inches) are rounded off.
1) Flex radii: r1 = side flex, r2 = front flex on roller, r3 = back flex on load bearing roller, r4 = back flex on Hold Down shoe, r5 = back flex on roller
2) C omplies with FDA 21 CFR | Complies with (EU) 10/2011 and (EC) 1935/2004 regulations regarding the raw materials used and the migration
thresholds | Complies with Japanese MHLW Notification 370
● = available | – = not available | empty cells = not tested
3) More materials and colors on request

I-129 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 8 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 25.4 mm (1 in)

S8.1-25 RAT | 25 % Opening | Radius top

Open area (25 %) with rounded contact surfaces | 24 % contact area (Largest opening: 9.7 x 7 mm/0.38 x 0.28 in) |
Radius top belt surface ensures minimum product contact and good release characteristics

p Variant specific dimensions

hs
[mm (in)]
hm

dpin

hpin

9.7 (0.38)
Winc
7
(0.28)

Wmin

Available standard materials 3)

Nominal belt pull, Width
Belt Pin Weight Temperature Certificates2)
straight deviation
Material Color Material Color [N/mm] [lb/ft] [kg/m2] [lb/ft2] [%] [°C] [°F] FDA EU
POM BL PBT BL 40 2741 9.7 1.99 -0.61 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
PP LG PP WT 20 1370 6.4 1.31 0.0 5/100 41/212 ● ●
PP BL PP BL 20 1370 6.4 1.31 0.0 5/100 41/212 ● ●
PA-HT BK PA-HT BK 30 2056 9.8 2.01 1.53 -30/155 -22/311 – –

Mold to order belts

PE PE 15 1028 6.7 1.37 -0.31 -70/65 -94/149

Mold to width available in: 76 mm (3.0 in), 152 mm (6.0 in), 229 mm (9.0 in)

BK (Black), BL (Blue), LG (Light gray), WT (White)

All measurements and tolerances apply at 21 °C; for temperature deviations please see Prolink manual chapter 4.4 “Temperature influence“.
All imperial dimensions (inches) are rounded off.
1) Flex radii: r1 = side flex, r2 = front flex on roller, r3 = back flex on load bearing roller, r4 = back flex on Hold Down shoe, r5 = back flex on roller
2) C omplies with FDA 21 CFR | Complies with (EU) 10/2011 and (EC) 1935/2004 regulations regarding the raw materials used and the migration
thresholds | Complies with Japanese MHLW Notification 370
● = available | – = not available | empty cells = not tested
3) More materials and colors on request

I-130 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 8 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 25.4 mm (1 in)

S8.1-30 FLT | 30 % Opening | Flat top

Open version (30 %) | Flat top surface | 53 % contact area (Largest opening: 9.7 x 7 mm/0.38 x 0.28 in) | Smooth surface

Variant specific dimensions [mm (in)]

dpin

hpin

9.7 (0.38)
7
Winc (0.28)
Wmin

Available standard materials 3)

Mold to order belts

PE BL PE UC 15 1028 6.1 1.25 -0.31 -70/65 -94/149 ● ●

Mold to width available in: 76 mm (3.0 in), 191 mm (7.5 in)

BL (Blue), UC (Uncolored), WT (White)

I-131 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 8 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 25.4 mm (1 in)

S8-0 FRT1 | 0 % Opening | Friction top (Design 1)

Closed surface | Friction top with cube-shaped High Grip pads | Grooves inbetween to improve flexibility and to
channel dirt away from the friction surface

p Variant specific dimensions

hs
[mm (in)]

dpin

(0.25)
hpin

6.4
(0.5)
Winc

12.7
Wmin

Available standard materials 3)

Nominal belt pull, Width
Belt Pin Rubber Weight Temperature Certificates2)
straight deviation
Material Color Material Color material color [N/mm] [lb/ft] [kg/m2] [lb/ft2] [%] [°C] [°F] FDA EU
POM BL PBT BL R6 BK 40 2741 17.7 3.63 -0.31 -45/60 -49/140 – –
POM AT PBT BL R6 BK 40 2741 17.7 3.63 -0.31 -45/60 -49/140 – –
PP LG PP WT R7 BK 20 1370 12.6 2.58 0.0 5/100 41/212 ● ●
PP BL PP BL R4 BG 20 1370 12.6 2.58 0.0 5/100 41/212 ● ●

Mold to order belts

PP BL PP BL R7 BG 20 1370 12.6 2.58 0.0 5/100 41/212 ● ●

Mold to width available in: 229 mm (9.0 in)

AT (Anthracite), BG (Beige), BK (Black), BL (Blue), LG (Light gray), WT (White)

I-132 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 8 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 25.4 mm (1 in)

S8-0 RTP A90 | 0 % Opening | Roller top · A90

Closed surface with roller top at 90° to the direction of travel | version for low-friction merging of products lateral

Variant specific dimensions

hs
p
[mm (in)]

(0.45)
11.5
(0.75)
19.05
dpin

hpin
9

(1.5)
38.1
(0.35)

Winc
Wmin

Available standard materials 3)

Standard configuration Configuration 1 Configuration 2

BL (Blue)

All measurements and tolerances apply at 21 °C; for temperature deviations please see Prolink manual chapter 4.4 “Temperature influence“.
All imperial dimensions (inches) are rounded off.
1) Flex radii: r1 = side flex, r2 = front flex on roller, r3 = back flex on load bearing roller, r4 = back flex on Hold Down shoe, r5 = back flex on roller
2) C omplies with FDA 21 CFR | Complies with (EU) 10/2011 and (EC) 1935/2004 regulations regarding the raw materials used and the migration
thresholds | Complies with Japanese MHLW Notification 370
● = available | – = not available | empty cells = not tested
3) More materials and colors on request

I-133 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 8 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 25.4 mm (1 in)

S8.1-30 FLT GT | 30 % Opening | Flat top · Guiding Tabs

Open version (30 %) | Flat top surface | 53 % contact area (Largest opening: 9.7 x 7 mm/0.38 x 0.28 in) | Smooth surface |
with guiding tabs for tracking of chain on long hygiene critical conveyors

Variant specific dimensions [mm (in)]

hpin
dpin

9.7 (0.38)
7
(0.28)
Winc
Wmin

42.8 (1.68)
33.4 (1.32)
7
(0.28)

Available standard materials 3)

Mold to order belts

PE BL PE UC 15 1028 6.1 1.25 -0.31 -70/65 -94/149 ● ●

Mold to width available in: 191 mm (7.5 in)

Standard belt configuration (bottom side)
GT on every row

BL (Blue), UC (Uncolored), WT (White)

All measurements and tolerances apply at 21 °C; for temperature deviations please see Prolink manual chapter 4.4 “Temperature influence“.
All imperial dimensions (inches) are rounded off.
1) Flex radii: r1 = side flex, r2 = front flex on roller, r3 = back flex on load bearing roller, r4 = back flex on Hold Down shoe, r5 = back flex on roller
2) C omplies with FDA 21 CFR | Complies with (EU) 10/2011 and (EC) 1935/2004 regulations regarding the raw materials used and the migration
thresholds | Complies with Japanese MHLW Notification 370
● = available | – = not available | empty cells = not tested
3) More materials and colors on request

I-134 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 8 | SPROCKETS siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 25.4 mm (1 in)

S8 SPR | Sprockets
Deep tooth engagement for heavy loads

D0 Wspr

Main dimensions
Sprocket size
Z11 Z12 Z15 Z18 Z19
(Number of teeth)
mm 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0
Wspr
inch 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98
mm 90.2 99.5 122.7 148.5 155.7
D0
inch 3.55 3.92 4.83 5.85 6.13
mm 39.9 44.5 56.1 69.0 72.6
Amax
inch 1.57 1.75 2.21 2.72 2.86
mm 38.3 43.0 54.9 68.0 71.6
Amin
inch 1.51 1.69 2.16 2.68 2.82

Shaft bores (● = Round, ■ = Square)

30 mm ● ● ● ●
40 mm ■ ■ ●/■ ■
60 mm ■ ■
80 mm ■

1 inch ● ●
1.25 inch ● ●
1.5 inch ●/■ ■ ■ ■
2 inch ●
2.5 inch ■

Material: PA, Color: LG

LG (Light gray)

I-135 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 8 | SPLIT SPROCKETS siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 25.4 mm (1 in)

S8 SPR-SP | Split Sprockets

Easy assembly without dismounting shaft | Deep tooth engagement for heavy loads

A
D0

Wspr

Main dimensions
Sprocket size
Z12 Z16 Z19 Z22
(Number of teeth)
mm 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0
Wspr
inch 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98
mm 99.5 132.2 155.7 181.2
D0
inch 3.92 5.20 6.13 7.13
mm 44.5 60.8 72.6 85.4
Amax
inch 1.75 2.39 2.86 3.36
mm 43.0 59.7 71.6 84.5
Amin
inch 1.69 2.35 2.82 3.33

Shaft bores (● = Round, ■ = Square)

40 mm ■ ●/■ ●/■
60 mm ●/■ ●/■
90 mm ■

1 inch ●
1.5 inch ●/■ ●/■
2.5 inch ●/■ ●/■

Material: PA, Color: LG

Mold to order: Material: PP, Color: WT

LG (Light gray), WT (White)

I-136 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 8 | PROFILES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 25.4 mm (1 in)

S8-0 FLT PMU

Profiles with reinforced base to handle high loads

Basic data
Height (h)
Material Color 25.4 mm 76 mm
1 inch 3 inch
POM BL ● ●
POM-CR AT ● ●
PP BL ● ●
PP LG ● ●
PP WT ● ●

Molded width: 152 mm (6.0 in)

25.4 (1) (minimum indent)
12.7 (0.5) (positioning increment)

Standard configuration S8-0 FLT PMU Indent configuration S8-0 FLT PMU

AT (Anthracite), BL (Blue), LG (Light gray), WT (White)

I-137 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 8 | PROFILES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 25.4 mm (1 in)

S8.1-0 NCL PMU

Highest available Profile for 1 in pitch belts. Extreme impact resistant with reinforced base and rips in TPC1.

Basic data
Height (h)
Material Color 152.4 mm
6 inch
TPC1 LG ●

Molded width: 152 mm (6.0 in)

25.4 (1) (minimum indent)

12.7 (0.5) (positioning increment)

Standard configuration 8.1-0 NCL PMU Indent configuration S8.1-0 NCL PMU

LG (Light gray)

I-138 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 8 | SIDE GUARDS siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 25.4 mm (1 in)

S8 SG | Side guards
For retention of bulk products (for S8-0 FLT and S8.1-30 FLT only)

h
Recommended running direction

Basic data
Height (h)
Material Color 25 mm 50 mm 75 mm 100 mm
1 inch 2 inch 3 inch 4 inch
PE LB ● ● ● ●
PE WT ● ● ● ●
PE-MD BL ● ●
PP LB ● ● ● ●
PP WT ● ● ● ●

6.35 (0.25) (positioning increment)

9.05 (0.36) (minimum indent)

BL (Blue), LB (Light blue), WT (White)

I-139 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 8 | HOLD DOWN TABS siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 25.4 mm (1 in)

S8 HDT | Hold Down Tabs

Used on wider belts to prevent lift an swan neck conveyors | To improve strength, stability and cleanability
they are moulded on a narrow module

13
(0.51)

(1.0)
25.5

(0.41)
10.5
(0.2)

(0.39)
10 30
(1.18)

Basic data Example

Material Color
POM BL
1016 (40)
514.35 (20.25) 6.35 (0.25)

Using Hold Down Tabs results in con-

strains with regards to sprocket and
shaft size to ensure sufficient clearance
Belt center line 3—6
to the shaft (see also chapter 3.3 hold 11 (0.43)
(0.12 — 0.24)
down tabs).

Sprocket options using HDT

Sprocket size Maximum bore round Maximum bore square
(Number of teeth) [mm] [inch] [mm] [inch]
Z11 40 1.5 30 1.25
Z12 45 1.75 35 1.5
Z15 70 2.75 55 2.0
Z18 95 3.5 70 2.75
Z19 100 3.75 75 3.0

BL (Blue)

I-140 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 8 | PRR siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 25.4 mm (1 in)

S8.1 PRR | Pin Retained Rollers

For applications where low back pressure accumulation or product separation is required

hs
a

drol
Winc
Wmin
b
w

smin

Dimensions
– For low back pressure wearstrips are w 12.7 mm (0.5 in) Roller cut out width (roller width 12 mm (0.47 in))
to be positioned between the rollers hs 2.25 mm (0.09 in) Height of rollers above surface
drol 15 mm (0.59 in) Roller diameter
– For product separation the wear- a 31.75 mm (1.25 in) Minimum indent
strips are to be positioned below the b 63.5 mm (2.5 in) Standard distance between rollers across belt width
s n x smin Roller spacing in travel direction (standard: n = 1)
rollers smin 25.4 mm (1.0 in) Min. roller spacing in travel direction
Winc 76.2 mm (3.0 in) Width increment
– For all materials and surfaces Wmin 152.4 mm (6.0 in) Min. belt width
– Rollers available in POM BK and WB Belt width
nrol Number of rollers across belt width
TPE LG (R10)

Allowable belt pull

To determine admissible belt pull calculate effective belt width WB,ef by
WB,ef = WB – (w x nrol)
Example: WB = 228.6 mm (9.0 in); w = 12.7 mm (0.5 in); nrol = 3
WB,ef = 228.6 – (12.7 x 3) = 190.5 mm
WB,ef = 9.0 – (0.5 x 3) = 7.5 in

I-141 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

1.2 DETAILED SERIES INFORMATION

siegling prolink
modular belts

SERIES 9
Side flexing and spiral belts
Pitch 50 mm (1.97 in)

I-142 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 9 | OVERVIEW siegling prolink
modular belts
Side flexing and spiral belts | Pitch 50 mm (1.97 in)

Belts for medium to heavy-duty food and non-food applications

Side view scale 1:1 Available surface pattern and opening area

50 (1.97) S9-57 GRT

Open (57 %), lattice-shaped surface

Design characteristics
– Suitable for both straight and radius conveying
– 57 % open area for excellent air circulation and drainage S9-57 NTP
– Stainless steel hinge pins for high load capacity, Open (57 %), lattice-shaped surface
lateral stiffness, less belt supports and minimum with nub top
belt lifting in curves
– No potential belt edge catch points due to safe fixing
of hinge pin
Guided belts

Basic data
Pitch 50 mm (1.97 in)
Longer side modules
Belt width min. 100 mm (3.9 in)
Width increments 50 mm (1.97 in)
Hinge pins 6 mm (0.24 in) made of stainless steel

Attention:
Due to the very large surface openings, personnel must be
instructed not to place their fingers in or on this belt.

Sprockets Profiles Side guards

in different sizes with round in different heights and designs in different heights for retention
or square bore for inclines of bulk products

I-143 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 9 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Side flexing and spiral belt | Pitch 50 mm (1.97 in) | Cc = 1.8

S9-57 GRT | 57 % Opening | Grid top

Open area (57 %) for excellent air circulation and drainage | 31 % contact area | Lattice-shaped surface |
Collapse factor (Cc) = 1.8

p
Variant specific dimensions [mm (in)]
hm

dpin

hpin
35 (1.38)

27.9 (1.1)
Winc
Wmin

Belt dimensions
p dpin hm hpin hs Wmin Winc Wtol Minimum flex radii1)
Width
Pin Width Width r1
Pitch Pin Ø Thickness Height tolerance r2 r3 r4 r5
position min. Increment Cc x WB
[%]
mm 50.0 6.0 15.0 7.5 0.0 150.0 50.0 ±0.3 1.8 x WB 50.0 100.0 150.0 50.0
inch 1.97 0.24 0.59 0.3 0.0 5.91 1.97 ±0.3 1.8 x WB 1.97 3.94 5.91 1.97
WB = Belt width, further information regarding r1 see page III-20
Available standard materials 3)
Nominal belt pull, Nominal belt pull, Width
Belt Pin Weight Temperature Certificates2)
straight curve deviation
Material Color Material Color [N/mm] [lb/ft] [N] [lb] [kg/m2] [lb/ft2] [%] [°C] [°F] FDA EU
PE WT SS 12 822 NR NR 9.5 1.95 0.0 -70/65 -94/149 ● ●
PP WT SS 22 1507 1600 360 9.3 1.9 0.0 5/100 41/212 ● ●
PP LG SS 22 1507 1600 360 9.3 1.9 0.0 5/100 41/212 ● ●
POM-CR UC SS 30 2056 2800 629 11.5 2.36 0.0 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
POM-CR LG SS 30 2056 2800 629 11.5 2.36 0.0 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
POM-CR DB SS 30 2056 2800 629 11.5 2.36 0.0 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
PA* BL SS 24 1645 2240 504 11.3 2.31 0.0 -40/120 -40/248 ● ●

NR = not recommended
*V
alues valid for dry applications (RH <50 %). Belts in PA material will absorb water in wet environments, causing them to expand and reduce the
nominal belt pull capacity.

Attention! Due to the very large surface openings, personnel must be instructed not to place their fingers in or on this belt.

DB (Dark blue), LG (Light gray), WT (White), UC (Uncolored)

I-144 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 9 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Side flexing and spiral belt | Pitch 50 mm (1.97 in) | Cc = 1.8

S9-57 NTP | 57 % Opening | Nub top (round studs)

Open area (57 %) for excellent air circulation and drainage | Lattice-shaped surface with 3.0 mm (0.12 in) high round studs
4 % contact area | Nub top surface for increased grip and reduced contact area for good release | Collapse factor (Cc) = 1.8

p Variant specific dimensions [mm (in)]

hs
hm

dpin

hpin

57 (2.24)
35 (1.38)

27.9 (1.1)
Winc

14.3 (0.56)
Wmin

Mold to order belts

PE SS 12 822 NR NR 9.7 1.99 0.0 -70/65 -94/149
POM-CR SS 30 2056 2800 629 11.7 2.4 0.0 -45/90 -49/194

NR = not recommended

Attention! Due to the very large surface openings, personnel must be instructed not to place their fingers in or on this belt.

LG (Light gray)

All measurements and tolerances apply at 21 °C; for temperature deviations please see Prolink manual chapter 4.4 “Temperature influence“.
All imperial dimensions (inches) are rounded off.
1) Flex radii: r1 = side flex, r2 = front flex on roller, r3 = back flex on load bearing roller, r4 = back flex on Hold Down shoe, r5 = back flex on roller
2) C omplies with FDA 21 CFR | Complies with (EU) 10/2011 and (EC) 1935/2004 regulations regarding the raw materials used and the migration
thresholds | Complies with Japanese MHLW Notification 370
● = available | – = not available | empty cells = not tested
3) More materials and colors on request

I-145 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 9 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Side flexing and spiral belt | Pitch 50 mm (1.97 in) | Cc = 1.8

S9-57 GRT G | 57 % Opening | Grid top · guided

Open area (57 %) for excellent air circulation and drainage | 31 % contact area | Lattice-shaped surface | Guided version (G)
allows utilization of the entire belt width | Collapse factor (Cc) = 1.8

p
Variant specific dimensions [mm (in)]
hm

dpin

35 (1.38)

hpin

15 (0.59)
Wmin
50

27.9 (1.1)

8 (0.31)
4 (0.16)
8 (0.31)
Winc

Mold to order belts

PE SS 12 822 NR NR 9.5 1.95 0.0 -70/65 -94/149

NR = not recommended

Attention! Due to the very large surface openings, personnel must be instructed not to place their fingers in or on this belt.

LG (Light gray), UC (Uncolored)

All measurements and tolerances apply at 21 °C; for temperature deviations please see Prolink manual chapter 4.4 “Temperature influence“.
All imperial dimensions (inches) are rounded off.
1) Flex radii: r1 = side flex, r2 = front flex on roller, r3 = back flex on load bearing roller, r4 = back flex on Hold Down shoe, r5 = back flex on roller
2) C omplies with FDA 21 CFR | Complies with (EU) 10/2011 and (EC) 1935/2004 regulations regarding the raw materials used and the migration
thresholds | Complies with Japanese MHLW Notification 370
● = available | – = not available | empty cells = not tested
3) More materials and colors on request

I-146 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 9 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Side flexing and spiral belt | Pitch 50 mm (1.97 in) | Cc = 1.8

S9-57 NTP G | 57 % Opening | Nub top (round studs) · guided

Open area (57 %) for excellent air circulation and drainage | With round studs for increased grip (4 % contact area) |
Guided version (G) allows utilization of the entire belt width | Collapse factor (Cc) = 1.8

p
Variant specific dimensions [mm (in)]

hs
hm

dpin

hpin

57 (2.24)
35 (1.38)

Wmin

15 (0.59)
50

27.9 (1.1)

8 (0.31)
14.3 (0.56)

4 (0.16)
Winc

Mold to order belts

PE SS 12 822 NR NR 9.7 1.99 0.0 -70/65 -94/149
POM-CR SS 30 2056 2800 629 11.7 2.40 0.0 -45/90 -49/194

NR = not recommended

Attention! Due to the very large surface openings, personnel must be instructed not to place their fingers in or on this belt.

LG (Light gray)

All measurements and tolerances apply at 21 °C; for temperature deviations please see Prolink manual chapter 4.4 “Temperature influence“.
All imperial dimensions (inches) are rounded off.
1) Flex radii: r1 = side flex, r2 = front flex on roller, r3 = back flex on load bearing roller, r4 = back flex on Hold Down shoe, r5 = back flex on roller
2) C omplies with FDA 21 CFR | Complies with (EU) 10/2011 and (EC) 1935/2004 regulations regarding the raw materials used and the migration
thresholds | Complies with Japanese MHLW Notification 370
● = available | – = not available | empty cells = not tested
3) More materials and colors on request

I-147 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 9 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Side flexing and spiral belt | Pitch 50 mm (1.97 in)

S9-57 GRT F2, F3, F4, F5, F6, F7, F8 | 57 % Opening

Open area (57 %) for excellent air circulation and drainage | Special edge modules with noses (F2 –F8) of varying size
ensure smooth belt operation when the system turn radius is greater than the minimum belt turn radius |
Collapse factor (Cc) = 2.12 – 5.50

p
Variant specific dimensions [mm (in)]
hm

dpin

hpin
35 (1.38)
F8
F2

27.9 (1.1)
Winc
Wmin

Available standard materials 3)

Nominal belt pull, Nominal belt pull, Width
Belt Pin Weight Temperature Certificates2)
straight curve deviation
Material Color Material Color [N/mm] [lb/ft] [N] [lb] [kg/m2] [lb/ft2] [%] [°C] [°F] FDA EU
POM-CR UC SS 30 2056 2800 629 11.5 2.36 0.0 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●

Mold to order belts

PE SS 12 822 NR NR 9.5 1.95 0.0 -70/65 -94/149
PP SS 22 1507 1600 360 9.3 1.9 0.0 5/100 41/212

Module variants
Module F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 For further information see chapter 3.3
CC 2.12 2.40 2.65 3.0 3.68 4.58 5.50 (paragraph spiral conveyors)

Attention! Due to the very large surface openings, personnel must be instructed not to place their fingers in or on this belt.

UC (Uncolored)

I-148 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 9 | SPROCKETS siegling prolink
modular belts
Side flexing and spiral belt | Pitch 50 mm (1.97 in)

S9 SPR | Sprockets

A
D0 Wspr

Main dimensions
Sprocket size
Z11
(Number of teeth)
mm 49.0
Wspr
inch 1.93
mm 178.8
D0
inch 7.04
mm 81.9
Amax
inch 3.22
mm 77.4
Amin
inch 3.05

Shaft bores (● = Round, ■ = Square)

40 mm ●/■

1.5 inch ■

Material: POM, Color: UC

UC (Uncolored)

I-149 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 9 | PROFILES siegling prolink
modular belts
Side flexing and spiral belt | Pitch 50 mm (1.97 in)

S9-57 GRT PMC

Open version (57 %) base module for drainage

h
Basic data
Height (h)
Material Color 25 mm 50 mm
1 inch 2 inch
POM UC ● ●
PP WT ● ●

Molded width: 100 mm (3.9 in)

50 (1.97) (positioning increment)

50 (1.97) (minimum indent)

Attention! Due to the very large surface openings, personnel must be instructed not to place their fingers in or on this belt.

UC (Uncolored), WT (White)

I-150 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 9 | SIDE GUARDS siegling prolink
modular belts
Side flexing and spiral belt | Pitch 50 mm (1.97 in) | Cc = 1.8

S9 SG | Side guards
For retention of bulk products | Collapse factor (Cc) = 1.8

h
Recommended running direction

Basic data
Height (h)
Material Color 25 mm 50 mm
1 inch 2 inch
POM-CR UC ● ●

27 (1.06) (indent)

Attention! Due to the very large surface openings, personnel must be instructed not to place their fingers in or on this belt.

UC (Uncolored)

I-151 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

1.2 DETAILED SERIES INFORMATION

siegling prolink
modular belts

SERIES 10
Straight running belts
Pitch 25.4 mm (1 in)

I-152 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 10 | OVERVIEW siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belts | Pitch 25.4 mm (1 in)

Belts for light to medium-duty hygiene-critical applications

Side view scale 1:1 Available surface pattern and opening area

S10-0 FLT
25.4 (1) Closed, smooth surface

Design characteristics S10-0 NTP

– Small number of eyelets ensures easy cleaning Closed surface with round studs

– Hinges that open wide, combined with smooth,

flat channels on the underside and a continuous drive bar S10-0 FRT1
produce an easy-to-clean design Closed surface with friction top
– Robust design guarantees superior durability
– Optimal design of sprocket teeth and tracking fins
provides superior sprocket engagement, S10-22 FLT
safe belt tracking and an easy-to-clean sprocket Open (22 %), smooth surface

Basic data
S10-36 LRB
Pitch 25.4 mm (1 in) Open (36 %) surface and lateral ribbing
Belt width min. 38.1 mm (1.5 in)
Width increments 19.05 mm (0.75 in)
S10-36 FLT
Hinge pins 5 mm (0.2 in) made of plastic (PBT, PP, PE, Open (36 %), smooth surface
PP-MD, POM-MD). One-piece up to a
belt width of 1200 mm (47 in).

NSF-compliant from these certified Forbo plants:

Huntersville (USA), Maharashtra (India), Malacky (Slovakia),
Sydney/NSW (Australia), Pinghu (China), Shizuoka (Japan),
Tlalnepantla (Mexico)

Sprockets Profiles Side guards Hold Down Tabs

in different sizes with round in different heights and designs in different heights for retention Hold Down Tabs for additional
or square bore for inclines of bulk products guiding

I-153 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 10 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 25.4 mm (1 in)

S10-0 FLT | 0 % Opening | Flat top

Closed, smooth surface | Flat top surface

dpin

hpin
Winc
Wmin
Belt dimensions
p dpin hm hpin hs Wmin Winc Wtol Minimum flex radii1)
Width
Pin Width Width r1
Pitch Pin Ø Thickness Height tolerance r2 r3 r4 r5
position min. Increment Cc x WB
[%]
mm 25.4 5.0 10.2 5.1 0.0 38.1 19.1 ±0.2 – 25.4 50.8 76.2 25.4
inch 1.0 0.2 0.4 0.2 0.0 1.5 0.75 ±0.2 – 1.0 2.0 3.0 1.0

Available standard materials 3)

Nominal belt pull, Width
Belt Pin Weight Temperature Certificates2)
straight deviation
Material Color Material Color [N/mm] [lb/ft] [kg/m2] [lb/ft2] [%] [°C] [°F] FDA EU MHLW
PE WT/LB PE WT 6 411 5.4 1.11 0.0 -70/65 -94/149 ● ● ●
PE-MD BL POM-MD BL 6 411 5.9 1.21 0.0 -70/65 -94/149 ● ●
PP WT/LB PP WT 8 548 5.1 1.04 0.26 5/100 41/212 ● ● ●
PP-MD BL PP-MD BL 8 548 5.3 1.09 0.26 5/100 41/212 ● ●
POM WT/LB PBT UC 20 1370 8.0 1.64 0.0 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
POM-MD BL POM-MD BL 20 1370 8.3 1.7 0.0 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
Mold to order belts
TPC1 LB PBT UC 6 411 7.1 1.45 -0.13 -25/80 -13/176 ● ●
PA* BL PBT UC 17 1165 6.7 1.37 0.74 -40/120 -40/248 ● ●
PP-SW BL PP-SW BL 6 411 5.1 1.04 0.26 5/100 41/212 ● ●

Mold to width available in: 76 mm (3.0 in), 152 mm (6.0 in), 229 mm (9.0 in)
* Values valid for dry applications (RH <50 %). Belts in PA material will absorb water in wet environments, causing them to expand and reduce the
nominal belt pull capacity.
BL (Blue), LB (Light blue), UC (Uncolored), WT (White)

I-154 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 10 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 25.4 mm (1 in)

S10-0 NTP | 0 % Opening | Nub top (round studs)

Closed surface with round studs 9 % contact area | Version available without round studs at the side (38 mm indent)

p Variant specific dimensions [mm (in)]

hs
hm

dpin

hpin

5.8 (0.23)
Winc
Wmin

Available standard materials 3)

Nominal belt pull, Width
Belt Pin Weight Temperature Certificates2)
straight deviation
Material Color Material Color [N/mm] [lb/ft] [kg/m2] [lb/ft2] [%] [°C] [°F] FDA EU MHLW
PE WT PE WT 6 411 5.5 1.13 0.0 -70/65 -94/149 ● ● ●
PE LB PE WT 6 411 5.5 1.13 0.0 -70/65 -94/149 ● ● ●
POM WT PBT UC 20 1370 8.2 1.68 0.0 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
POM LB PBT UC 20 1370 8.2 1.68 0.0 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
PP-MD BL PP-MD BL 8 548 5.4 1.11 0.26 5/100 41/212 ● ●
PE-MD BL POM-MD BL 6 411 6.5 1.33 0.0 -70/65 -94/149 ● ●

Also available with Mold to width available in: 229 mm (9.0 in)
molded indent
38 mm (1.5 in)

38 (1.5) (indent)

BL (Blue), LB (Light blue), UC (Uncolored), WT (White)

I-155 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 10 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 25.4 mm (1 in)

S10-0 FRT1 | 0 % Opening | Friction top (Design 1)

Closed surface with flat integrated friction pads (FRT1) for high grip | 67 % contact area | Version available without FRT1
structure at the side (38 mm indent)

p Variant specific dimensions [mm (in)]

hs
hm

dpin

2 (0.08)
hpin
Winc
Wmin

Available standard materials 3)

Nominal belt pull, Width
Belt Pin Rubber Weight Temperature Certificates2)
straight deviation
Material Color Material Color Material Color [N/mm] [lb/ft] [kg/m2] [lb/ft2] [%] [°C] [°F] FDA EU MHLW
PP WT PP WT R7 BG 8 548 6.3 1.29 0.26 5/100 41/212 ● ●
PP LB PP WT R7 BK 8 548 6.3 1.29 0.26 5/100 41/212 ● ●
PP LB PP WT R7 BL 8 548 6.3 1.29 0.26 5/100 41/212 ● ●

Mold to width available in: 229 mm (9.0 in)

Also available with

molded indent
38 mm (1.5 in)

38 (1.5)

BG (Beige), BL (Blue), BK (Black), LB (Light blue), WT (White)

I-156 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 10 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 25.4 mm (1 in)

S10-22 FLT | 22 % Opening | Flat top

Open area (22 %) for excellent air circulation and drainage | Smooth surface | 70 % contact area (Largest opening:
2.6 x 5.3 mm/0.10 x 0.21 in)

p Variant specific dimensions [mm (in)]

hm 5.3 (0.21)

2.6 (0.1)
dpin

hpin
Winc
Wmin

Available standard materials 3)

Nominal belt pull, Width
Belt Pin Weight Temperature Certificates2)
straight deviation
Material Color Material Color [N/mm] [lb/ft] [kg/m2] [lb/ft2] [%] [°C] [°F] FDA EU MHLW
PE WT PE WT 3 206 4.7 0.96 0.0 -70/65 -94/149 ● ● ●
PE LB PE WT 3 206 4.7 0.96 0.0 -70/65 -94/149 ● ● ●
PP WT PP WT 5 343 4.3 0.88 0.26 5/100 41/212 ● ● ●
PP LB PP WT 5 343 4.3 0.88 0.26 5/100 41/212 ● ● ●
POM WT PBT UC 11 754 6.7 1.37 0.0 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
POM LB PBT UC 11 754 6.7 1.37 0.0 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
PP-MD BL PP-MD BL 5 343 4.9 1.0 0.0 5/100 41/212 ● ●

Mold to order belts

PE-MD BL POM-MD BL 3 206 5.1 1.04 0.0 -70/65 -94/149 ● ●

Mold to width available in: 76 mm (3.0 in), 229 mm (9.0 in)

BL (Blue), LB (Light blue), UC (Uncolored), WT (White)

I-157 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 10 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 25.4 mm (1 in)

S10-36 LRB | 36 % Opening | Lateral rib

Open area (36 %) for excellent air circulation and drainage | Lateral ribbing 12 % contact area (Largest opening: 5.8 x
13.4 mm/ 0.23 x 0.53 in) | open area lateral rib version for small inclines and gentle conveying of delicate products

p Variant specific dimensions [mm (in)]

hs
hm
5.8 (0.23)
dpin

hpin

13.4 (0.53)
Winc
Wmin

Available standard materials 3)

Nominal belt pull, Width
Belt Pin Weight Temperature Certificates2)
straight deviation
Material Color Material Color [N/mm] [lb/ft] [kg/m2] [lb/ft2] [%] [°C] [°F] FDA EU MHLW
PE WT PE WT 4 274 5.8 1.19 0.0 -70/65 -94/149 ● ● ●
PE LB PE WT 4 274 5.8 1.19 0.0 -70/65 -94/149 ● ● ●
PP WT PP WT 6 411 4.9 1.0 0.26 5/100 41/212 ● ● ●
PP LB PP WT 6 411 4.9 1.0 0.26 5/100 41/212 ● ● ●
POM WT PBT UC 13 891 7.6 1.56 0.0 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
POM LB PBT UC 13 891 7.6 1.56 0.0 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●

Mold to width available in: 229 mm (9.0 in)

LB (Light blue), UC (Uncolored), WT (White)

All measurements and tolerances apply at 21 °C; for temperature deviations please see Prolink manual chapter 4.4 “Temperature influence“.
All imperial dimensions (inches) are rounded off.
1) Flex radii: r1 = side flex, r2 = front flex on roller, r3 = back flex on load bearing roller, r4 = back flex on Hold Down shoe, r5 = back flex on roller
2) C omplies with FDA 21 CFR | Complies with (EU) 10/2011 and (EC) 1935/2004 regulations regarding the raw materials used and the migration
thresholds | Complies with Japanese MHLW Notification 370
● = available | – = not available | empty cells = not tested
3) More materials and colors on request

I-158 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 10 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 25.4 mm (1 in)

S10-36 FLT | 36 % Opening | Flat top

Open area (36 %) for excellent air circulation and drainage | Smooth surface | 44 % contact area (Largest opening:
5.8 x 13.4 mm/0.23 x 0.53 in)

p Variant specific dimensions [mm (in)]

hm 5.8 (0.23)

13.4 (0.53)
dpin

hpin
Winc
Wmin

Available standard materials 3)

Nominal belt pull, Width
Belt Pin Weight Temperature Certificates2)
straight deviation
Material Color Material Color [N/mm] [lb/ft] [kg/m2] [lb/ft2] [%] [°C] [°F] FDA EU MHLW
PE WT/LB PE WT 4 274 4.3 0.88 0.0 -70/65 -94/149 ● ● ●
PP WT/LB PP WT 6 411 4.0 0.82 0.26 5/100 41/212 ● ● ●
PP-MD BL PP-MD BL 6 411 4.4 0.9 0.26 5/100 41/212 ● ●
POM WT/LB PBT UC 13 891 6.2 1.27 0.0 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
PA* BL PBT UC 13 891 6.0 1.23 0.74 -40/120 -40/248 ● ●

Mold to order belts

POM-MD BL POM-MD BL 13 891 6.6 1.35 0.0 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●

* Values valid for dry applications (RH <50 %). Belts in PA material will absorb water in wet environments, causing them to expand and reduce the
nominal belt pull capacity.

Attention! Due to the very large surface openings, personnel must be instructed not to place their fingers in or on this belt.

BL (Blue), LB (Light blue), UC (Uncolored), WT (White)

I-159 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 10 | SPROCKETS siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 25.4 mm (1 in)

S10 SPR | Sprockets

Optimal design of sprocket teeth and tracking fins provides superior sprocket engagement, safe belt tracking and
an easy-to-clean sprocket

A D0 Wspr

Main dimensions
Sprocket size
Z6 Z8 Z10 Z12 Z15 Z16 Z18 Z20
(Number of teeth)
mm 28.0 28.0 28.0 28.0 28.0 28.0 28.0 28.0
Wspr
inch 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
mm 51.4 66.8 82.4 98.2 122.4 130.4 146.4 162.5
D0
inch 2.02 2.63 3.24 3.87 4.82 5.13 5.76 6.40
mm 19.8 27.9 35.9 43.9 56.0 60.0 68.1 76.1
Amax
inch 0.78 1.10 1.41 1.73 2.20 2.36 2.68 3.00
mm 17.2 25.8 34.1 42.4 54.8 58.9 67.0 75.2
Amin
inch 0.68 1.02 1.34 1.67 2.16 2.32 2.64 2.96

Shaft bores (● = Round, ■ = Square)

25 mm ● ●/■ ■
30 mm ● ● ● ● ● ●
40 mm ●/■ ●/■ ●/■ ■ ■ ●/■
60 mm ■

1 inch ● ●/■ ●/■ ● ● ● ● ●

1.25 inch ● ● ● ● ● ●
1.44 inch ● ● ●
1.5 inch ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
2.5 inch ■

Material: PA, Color: LG

LG (Light gray)

I-160 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 10 | PROFILES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 25.4 mm (1 in)

S10-0 FLT PMU/S10-0 FLT PMU I38

Flat top surface for dry products

h
38

Basic data
Height (h)
Material Color 25 mm 100 mm
1 inch 4 inch
PE LB ●/▲ ●/▲
PE WT ●/▲ ●/▲
POM LB ●/▲ ●/▲
POM WT ●/▲ ●/▲
PP LB ●/▲ ●/▲
PP WT ●/▲ ●/▲

● = no indent, ▲ = with indent 38 mm Molded width: 152 mm (6.0 in)

38 (1.5) (min. indent)

19 (0.75) (increment) 38 (1.5) (min. indent)

Standard configuration S10-0 FLT PMU Indent configuration S10-0 FLT PMU Standard configuration S10-0 FLT PMU I38

LB (Light blue), WT (White)

I-161 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 10 | PROFILES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 25.4 mm (1 in)

S10-0 NCL PMU/S10-0 NCL PMU I38

No cling surface to improve release of wet and sticky products

h
38

Basic data
Height (h)
Material Color 25 mm 100 mm
1 inch 4 inch
PE LB ●/▲ ●/▲
PE WT ●/▲ ●/▲
PE-MD BL ●/▲ ●
POM LB ●/▲ ●/▲
POM WT ●/▲ ●/▲
POM-MD BL ●/▲ ●/▲
PP LB ●/▲ ●/▲
PP WT ●/▲ ●/▲

● = no indent, ▲ = with indent 38 mm Molded width: 152 mm (6.0 in)

38 (1.5) (min. indent)
19 (0.75) (increment) 38 (1.5) (min. indent)

Standard configuration S10-0 NCL PMU Indent configuration S10-0 NCL PMU Standard configuration S10-0 NCL PMU I38

BL (Blue), LB (Light blue), WT (White)

I-162 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 10 | SIDE GUARDS siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 25.4 mm (1 in)

S10 SG | Side guards

For retention of bulk products

h
Recommended running direction

Basic data
Height (h)
Material Color 25 mm 50 mm 75 mm 100 mm
1 inch 2 inch 3 inch 4 inch
PE LB ● ● ● ●
PE WT ● ● ● ●
PE-MD BL ● ●
PP LB ● ● ● ●
PP WT ● ● ● ●

9.53 (0.38) (positioning increment)

9.53 (0.38) (minimum indent)

BL (Blue), LB (Light blue), WT (White)

I-163 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 10 | HOLD DOWN TABS siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 25.4 mm (1 in)

S10 HDT | Hold Down Tabs

Used on wider belts to prevent lift an swan neck conveyors | To improve strength, stability and cleanability they are
moulded on a narrow module

19
(0.75)

(0.99)
5
25.16

10.16
(0.2)

(0.4)
(0.39)
10 30
(1.18)

Basic data Example

Material Color
LB
POM 1009.7 (39.75)
WT
504.8 (19.88)

Using Hold Down Tabs results in con-

strains with regards to sprocket and
shaft size to ensure sufficient clearance
3 — 6.5
to the shaft (see also chapter 3.3 hold 11 (0.43)
(0.12 — 0.26)
down tabs).

Sprocket options using HDT

Sprocket size Maximum bore round Maximum bore square
(Number of teeth) [mm] [inch] [mm] [inch]
Z6 NR NR NR NR
Z8 15 0.75 15 0.5
Z10 35 1.25 25 1.0
Z12 50 1.75 35 1.5
Z15 70 2.75 55 2.0
Z16 80 3.0 60 2.25
Z18 95 3.5 70 2.75
Z20 110 4.25 85 3.25

LB (Light blue), WT (White)

I-164 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

I-165 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024
1.2 DETAILED SERIES INFORMATION

siegling prolink
modular belts

SERIES 11
Side flexing belts
Pitch 25 mm (0.98 in)

TE D
PATEN

I-166 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 11 | OVERVIEW siegling prolink
modular belts
Side flexing belts | Pitch 25 mm (0.98 in)

Belts for light-duty food and non-food applications

Side view scale 1:1 Available surface pattern and opening area

S11-45 GRT
Open (45 %), lattice-shaped surface
with replaceable caps
25 (0.98)

Design characteristics
– 45 % open area provides excellent
cooling and draining capabilities
– All plastic lightweight belts (plastic pins)
– Tight radius belt with minimum curve radius of 1.4 x belt
width
– Outermost hinge is fixed to the pin to prevent deflection
and elimination of potential belt edge catch points S11-45 GRT HD
Open (45 %), lattice-shaped surface
– Suitable for both straight and radius conveying with replaceable Hold Down caps
– Ideal transmission of force due to sprockets offset inwards.
Idlers support the belt on the outside

Basic data
Pitch 25 mm (0.98 in)
Belt width min. 175 mm (6.9 in)
Belt width max. 1000 mm (39.37 in)
Width increments 25 mm (0.98 in)
Hinge pins 5 mm (0.2 in) made of plastic (PBT) S11-33 FRT2
Combo: 5 mm (0.2 in) stainless steel Open (33 % for full FRT2 surface area),
surface with friction top, flat

Sprockets/Idlers Profiles
in different sizes with round or square bore in different heights and designs
for inclines

I-167 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 11 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Side flexing belt | Pitch 25 mm (0.98 in) | Cc = 1.4

S11-45 GRT | 45 % Opening | Grid top

Open area (45 %) for excellent air circulation and drainage | 42 % contact area | Lattice-shaped surface with robust,
replaceable caps on the belt edges | Collapse factor (Cc) = 1.4

p Variant specific dimensions [mm (in)]

13 (0.51)
hm
dpin

Winc
hpin

14 (0.55)
Wmin

WB = Belt width, further information regarding r1 see page III-20

Available standard materials 3)
Nominal belt pull, Nominal belt pull, Width
Belt Pin Weight Temperature Certificates2)
straight curve deviation
Material Color Material Color [N/mm] [lb/ft] [N] [lb] [kg/m2] [lb/ft2] [%] [°C] [°F] FDA EU
PP WT PBT UC 9 617 600 135 4.7 0.96 0.2 5/100 41/212 ● ●
PP BL PBT BL 9 617 600 135 4.7 0.96 0.2 5/100 41/212 ● ●
POM-CR WT PBT UC 15 1028 1000 225 6.7 1.37 0.0 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
POM-CR BL PBT BL 15 1028 1000 225 6.7 1.37 0.0 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
PA* BL PBT BL 15 1028 1000 225 5.7 1.17 0.6 -40/120 -40/248 ● ●

*V
alues valid for dry applications (RH <50 %). Belts in PA material will absorb water in wet environments, causing them to expand and reduce the
nominal belt pull capacity.

BL (Blue), UC (Uncolored), WT (White)

All measurements and tolerances apply at 21 °C; for temperature deviations please see Prolink manual chapter 4.4 “Temperature influence“.
All imperial dimensions (inches) are rounded off.
1) Flex radii: r1 = side flex, r2 = front flex on roller, r3 = back flex on load bearing roller, r4 = back flex on Hold Down shoe, r5 = back flex on roller
2) C omplies with FDA 21 CFR | Complies with (EU) 10/2011 and (EC) 1935/2004 regulations regarding the raw materials used and the migration
thresholds | Complies with Japanese MHLW Notification 370
● = available | – = not available | empty cells = not tested
3) More materials and colors on request

I-168 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 11 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Side flexing belt | Pitch 25 mm (0.98 in) | Cc = 1.4

S11-45 GRT HD | 45 % Opening | Grid top · Hold Down

Open area (45 %) for excellent air circulation and drainage | 42 % contact area | Lattice-shaped surface with replaceable
Hold Down caps | Collapse factor (Cc) = 1.4

p Variant specific dimensions [mm (in)]

13 (0.51)
hm
dpin

Winc
hpin

14 (0.55)
Wmin

7 (0.28)
10 (0.39)
3 (0.12)
Belt dimensions
p dpin hm hpin hs Wmin Winc Wtol Minimum flex radii1)
Width
Pin Width Width r1
Pitch Pin Ø Thickness Height tolerance r2 r3 r4 r5
position min. Increment Cc x WB
[%]
mm 25.0 5.0 12.0 6.0 0.0 175.0 25.0 ±0.3 1.4 x WB 25.0 50.0 75.0 25.0
inch 0.98 0.2 0.47 0.24 0.0 6.89 0.98 ±0.3 1.4 x WB 0.98 1.97 2.95 0.98

WB = Belt width, further information regarding r1 see page III-20

Available standard materials 3)
Nominal belt pull, Nominal belt pull, Width
Belt Pin Weight Temperature Certificates2)
straight curve deviation
Material Color Material Color [N/mm] [lb/ft] [N] [lb] [kg/m2] [lb/ft2] [%] [°C] [°F] FDA EU
PP WT PBT UC 9 617 600 135 4.7 0.96 0.2 5/100 41/212 ● ●
PP BL PBT BL 9 617 600 135 4.7 0.96 0.2 5/100 41/212 ● ●
POM-CR WT PBT UC 15 1028 1000 225 6.7 1.37 0.0 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
POM-CR BL PBT BL 15 1028 1000 225 6.7 1.37 0.0 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
PA* BL PBT BL 15 1028 1000 225 5.7 1.17 0.6 -40/120 -40/248 ● ●

*V
alues valid for dry applications (RH <50 %). Belts in PA material will absorb water in wet environments, causing them to expand and reduce the
nominal belt pull capacity.

BL (Blue), UC (Uncolored), WT (White)

I-169 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 11 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Side flexing belt | Pitch 25 mm (0.98 in) | Cc = 1.4

S11-33 FRT2 | 33 % Opening | Friction top (Design 2)

Open area (33 %) for full FRT2 surface area | 47 % contact area | Lattice-shaped surface with flat integrated friction pads
(FRT2) for better grip. Minimum indent FRT2: 125 mm (5 in)/175 mm (7 in) | Collapse factor (Cc) = 1.4

p Variant specific dimensions [mm (in)]

hs
13 (0.51)
hm
dpin

hpin

14 (0.55)
Wmin
Winc

125 (4.92)
Belt dimensions
p dpin hm hpin hs Wmin Winc Wtol Minimum flex radii1)
Width
Pin Width Width r1
Pitch Pin Ø Thickness Height tolerance r2 r3 r4 r5
position min. Increment Cc x WB
[%]
mm 25.0 5.0 12.0 6.0 1.5 500.0 25.0 ±0.3 1.4 x WB 25.0 50.0 75.0 25.0
inch 0.98 0.2 0.47 0.24 0.06 19.69 0.98 ±0.3 1.4 x WB 0.98 1.97 2.95 0.98

WB = Belt width, further information regarding r1 see page III-20

Available standard materials 3)
Nominal belt Nominal belt Width
Belt Pin Rubber Weight Temperature Certificates2)
pull, straight pull, curve devia-
Material Color Material Color Material Color [N/mm] [lb/ft] [N] [lb] [kg/m2] [lb/ft2] tion [%] [°C] [°F] FDA EU
PP WT PBT UC R7 BG 9 617 600 135 6.1 1.25 0.2 5/100 41/212 ● ●
PP BL PBT BL R7 BG 9 617 600 135 6.1 1.25 0.2 5/100 41/212 ● ●
PP BL PBT BL R7 BG 9 617 600 135 6.1 1.25 0.2 5/100 41/212 ● ●

BL (Blue), UC (Uncolored), WT (White)

All measurements and tolerances apply at 21 °C; for temperature deviations please see Prolink manual chapter 4.4 “Temperature influence“.
All imperial dimensions (inches) are rounded off.
1) Flex radii: r1 = side flex, r2 = front flex on roller, r3 = back flex on load bearing roller, r4 = back flex on Hold Down shoe, r5 = back flex on roller
2) C omplies with FDA 21 CFR | Complies with (EU) 10/2011 and (EC) 1935/2004 regulations regarding the raw materials used and the migration
thresholds | Complies with Japanese MHLW Notification 370
● = available | – = not available | empty cells = not tested
3) More materials and colors on request

I-170 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

S11 COMBO | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Side flexing belt | Pitch 25 mm (0.98 in) | Cc = 1.45

p Variant specific dimensions [mm (in)]

hm
dpin

hpin
13 (0.51)

Wmin
Winc

14 (0.55)
Belt dimensions
p dpin hm hpin hs Wmin Winc Wtol Minimum flex radii1)
Width
Pin Width Width r1
Pitch Pin Ø Thickness Height tolerance r2 r3 r4 r5
position min. Increment Cc x WB
[%]
mm 25.0 5.0 12.0 6.0 0.0 175.0 25.0 ±0.3 1.45 x WB 25.0 50.0 75.0 25.0
inch 0.98 0.2 0.47 0.24 0.0 6.89 0.98 ±0.3 1.45 x WB 0.98 1.97 2.95 0.98

WB = Belt width, further information regarding r1 see page III-20

* Values valid for dry applications (RH <50 %). Belts in PA material will absorb water in wet environments, causing them to expand and reduce the
nominal belt pull capacity.

BL (Blue), WT (White)

I-171 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 11 | SPROCKETS siegling prolink
modular belts
Side flexing belt | Pitch 25 mm (0.98 in)

S11 SPR | Sprockets

Idler see next page

D0 Wspr 75 (2.94)

Shaft bores (● = Round, ■ = Square)

25 mm ●/■ ● ●/■ ● ● ●
30 mm ●/■ ● ● ● ● ●
40 mm ■ ●/■ ●/■ ●/■ ●/■

0.75 inch ●
1 inch ●/■ ● ●/■ ● ● ●
1.25 inch ●/■ ● ● ● ● ●
1.5 inch ■ ●/■ ●/■ ●/■ ●/■

Material: PA, Color: LG

LG (Light gray)

All measurements and tolerances apply at 21 °C; for temperature deviations please see Prolink manual chapter 4.4 “Temperature influence“.
All imperial dimensions (inches) are rounded off.
For detailed sprocket and shaft dimensions see appendix 6.3
Number of sprockets (sprocket spacing distance) see chapter 3.2
Sprocket installation see chapter 5.2

I-172 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 11 | IDLER siegling prolink
modular belts
Side flexing belt | Pitch 25 mm (0.98 in)

S11 IDL | Idler

For side support and return roller without tooth engagement

Sprocket see previous page

B-B

B
B

Di Wspr
75 (2.94)

Main dimensions
Sprocket size
Z6 Z9 Z11 Z12 Z16 Z18 Z20
(Number of teeth)
mm 24.0 24.0 24.0 24.0 24.0 24.0 24.0
Wspr
inch 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94
mm 31.7 56.1 72.2 80.3 112.3 128.2 144.1
Di
inch 1.25 2.21 2.84 3.16 4.42 5.05 5.67

Shaft bores (● = Round, ■ = Square)

25 mm ●/■ ● ●/■ ● ● ●
30 mm ●/■ ● ● ● ● ●
40 mm ■ ●/■ ●/■ ●/■ ●/■

0.75 inch ●
1 inch ●/■ ● ●/■ ● ● ●
1.25 inch ●/■ ● ● ● ● ●
1.5 inch ■ ●/■ ●/■ ●/■ ●/■

Material: PA, Color: LG

LG (Light gray)

I-173 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 11 | PROFILES siegling prolink
modular belts
Side flexing belt | Pitch 25 mm (0.98 in)

S11-45 GRT PMC

Open version (45 %) base module for drainage

h
Basic data
Height (h)
Material Color 25 mm 50 mm
1 inch 2 inch
PE WT ● ●
POM BL ● ●
POM DB ● ●
POM UC ● ●
POM WT ● ●
PP DB ● ●
PP WT ● ●

25 (1.48) (positioning increment) Molded width: 100 mm (3.9 in)

125 (4.92) (minimum indent)

BL (Blue), DB (Dark blue), UC (Uncolored), WT (White)

I-174 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

I-175 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024
1.2 DETAILED SERIES INFORMATION

siegling prolink
modular belts

SERIES 13
Straight running belts
Pitch 8 mm (0.31 in)

I-176 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 13 | OVERVIEW siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belts | Pitch 8 mm (0.31 in)

Belts for light-duty food and non-food nose bar applications

Side view scale 1:1 Available surface pattern and opening area

S13-0 FLT
8 (0.31) Closed, smooth surface

Design characteristics
– Micro pitch belt with small transfer gaps S13-0 NPY
Closed surface
– Designed to run over nosebars/knife edges or rollers with with negative pyramid pattern
a radius down to 3 mm (0.12 in) allowing, precise transfer
of even the smallest products
– Versatile for conveying, drying and cooling applications
– Optimal design of sprocket teeth, and belt underside pro- S13-0 CTP
vides superior sprocket engagement, safe belt tracking Closed surface and pointed studs
and favorable cleanability
– Belt and sprocket design ensures superior load transmis-
sion and belt pull capacity S13-34 FLT
– Headless pin making it very easy to install and remove the Open (34 %), smooth surface
belt for maintenance

Basic data
Pitch 8 mm (0.31 in)
Belt width min. 102 mm (4 in)
Width increments 25.4 mm (1 in) NSF-compliant from these certified Forbo plants:
Huntersville (USA), Maharashtra (India), Malacky (Slovakia),
Hinge pins 3 mm (0.12 in) made of plastic (PLX) Sydney/NSW (Australia), Pinghu (China), Shizuoka (Japan),
Tlalnepantla (Mexico)

Sprockets Detail hinge pin Detail nose bar ProSnap

In different sizes with round or Headless pin with unique shoulder Narrow transfer gap ensures Quick-Release for easy opening
square bore design ensures trouble free instal- smooth transfer of small and and closing of the belt
lation, maintenance and a secure delicate products
pin retention

r ≥ 3 (0.12)

straight section
≥ 2 x pitch

I-177 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 13 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 8 mm (0.31 in)

S13-0 FLT | 0 % Opening | Flat top

Closed, smooth surface | Flat top surface

dpin

hpin
Winc
Wmin
Belt dimensions
p dpin hm hpin hs Wmin Winc Wtol Minimum flex radii1)
Width
Pin Width Width r1
Pitch Pin Ø Thickness Height tolerance r2 r3 r4 r5
position min. Increment Cc x WB
[%]
mm 8.0 3.0 6.0 3.0 0.0 101.6 25.4 ±0.2 – 3.0 16.0 24.0 8.0
inch 0.31 0.12 0.24 0.12 0.0 4.0 1.0 ±0.2 – 0.12 0.63 0.94 0.31

Available standard materials 3)

Nominal belt pull, Width
Belt Pin Weight Temperature Certificates2)
straight deviation
Material Color Material Color [N/mm] [lb/ft] [kg/m2] [lb/ft2] [%] [°C] [°F] FDA EU
POM WT PLX BL 4 274 5.9 1.21 0.23 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
POM BL PLX BL 4 274 5.9 1.21 0.23 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
PA* BL PLX BL 4 274 5.1 1.04 1.38 -40/120 -40/248 ● ●

Mold to order belts

PA* LG PLX BL 4 274 5.1 1.04 1.38 -40/120 -40/248 ● ●
PA-HT BL PA-HT UC 4 274 5.7 1.17 1.77 -30/155 -22/311 ● ●
PXX-HC BK PLX BL 2 137 5.2 1.07 0.89 5/100 41/212 – –

Mold to width available in: 102 mm (4.0 in), 152 mm (6.0 in), 203 mm (8.0 in), 305 mm (12.0 in)

* Values valid for dry applications (RH <50 %). Belts in PA material will absorb water in wet environments, causing them to expand and reduce the
nominal belt pull capacity.

BK (Black), BL (Blue), LG (Light gray), UC (Uncolored), WT (White)

I-178 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 13 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 8 mm (0.31 in)

S13-0 NPY | 0 % Opening | Negative pyramid

Closed surface with negative pyramid pattern | Provides superb release characteristics when conveying wet or
sticky products | 61 % contact area

dpin

hpin
Winc
Wmin
Belt dimensions
p dpin hm hpin hs Wmin Winc Wtol Minimum flex radii1)
Width
Pin Width Width r1
Pitch Pin Ø Thickness Height tolerance r2 r3 r4 r5
position min. Increment Cc x WB
[%]
mm 8.0 3.0 6.0 3.0 0.0 101.6 25.4 ±0.2 – 3.0 16.0 24.0 8.0
inch 0.31 0.12 0.24 0.12 0.0 4.0 1.0 ±0.2 – 0.12 0.63 0.94 0.31

Available standard materials 3)

Mold to width available in: 102 mm (4.0 in), 152 mm (6.0 in), 203 mm (8.0 in), 305 mm (12.0 in)

BL (Blue)

All measurements and tolerances apply at 21 °C; for temperature deviations please see Prolink manual chapter 4.4 “Temperature influence“.
All imperial dimensions (inches) are rounded off.
1) Flex radii: r1 = side flex, r2 = front flex on roller, r3 = back flex on load bearing roller, r4 = back flex on Hold Down shoe, r5 = back flex on roller
2) C omplies with FDA 21 CFR | Complies with (EU) 10/2011 and (EC) 1935/2004 regulations regarding the raw materials used and the migration
thresholds | Complies with Japanese MHLW Notification 370
● = available | – = not available | empty cells = not tested
3) More materials and colors on request

I-179 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 13 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 8 mm (0.31 in)

S13-0 CTP | 0 % Opening | Cone top (pointed studs)

Closed surface and pointed studs | Cone top surface pattern for superior grip

hs
hm

dpin

hpin
Winc
Wmin
Belt dimensions
p dpin hm hpin hs Wmin Winc Wtol Minimum flex radii1)
Width
Pin Width Width r1
Pitch Pin Ø Thickness Height tolerance r2 r3 r4 r5
position min. Increment Cc x WB
[%]
mm 8.0 3.0 6.0 3.0 0.4 101.6 25.4 ±0.2 – 3.0 16.0 24.0 8.0
inch 0.31 0.12 0.24 0.12 0.02 4.0 1.0 ±0.2 – 0.12 0.63 0.94 0.31

Available standard materials 3)

Mold to width available in: 305 mm (12.0 in)

* Values valid for dry applications (RH <50 %). Belts in PA material will absorb water in wet environments, causing them to expand and reduce the
nominal belt pull capacity.

BL (Blue), UC (Uncolored)

I-180 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 13 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 8 mm (0.31 in)

S13-34 FLT | 34 % Opening | Flat top

Open area (34 %) for excellent air circulation and drainage | 47 % contact area (Largest opening: 11.4 x 4.6 mm/0.45 x 0.18 in);
Smooth surface | Easy-to-clean

p Variant specific dimensions [mm (in)]

4.6 (0.18)
hm

dpin

11.4 (0.45)
hpin
Winc
Wmin

Belt dimensions
p dpin hm hpin hs Wmin Winc Wtol Minimum flex radii1)
Width
Pin Width Width r1
Pitch Pin Ø Thickness Height tolerance r2 r3 r4 r5
position min. Increment Cc x WB
[%]
mm 8.0 3.0 6.0 3.0 0.0 101.6 25.4 ±0.2 – 3.0 16.0 24.0 8.0
inch 0.31 0.12 0.24 0.12 0.0 4.0 1.0 ±0.2 – 0.12 0.63 0.94 0.31

Available standard materials 3)

Nominal belt pull, Width
Belt Pin Weight Temperature Certificates2)
straight deviation
Material Color Material Color [N/mm] [lb/ft] [kg/m2] [lb/ft2] [%] [°C] [°F] FDA EU
POM WT PLX BL 4 274 4.3 0.88 0.23 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
POM BL PLX BL 4 274 4.3 0.88 0.23 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
PA* BL PLX BL 4 274 3.7 0.76 1.38 -40/120 -40/248 ● ●

Mold to order belts

PA-HT BL PA-HT UC 4 274 4.2 0.86 1.38 -30/155 -22/311 ● ●

Mold to width available in: 305 mm (12.0 in)

* Values valid for dry applications (RH <50 %). Belts in PA material will absorb water in wet environments, causing them to expand and reduce the
nominal belt pull capacity.

BL (Blue), UC (Uncolored), WT (White)

I-181 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 13 | SPROCKETS siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 8 mm (0.31 in)

S13 SPR | Sprockets

D0 Wspr

Main dimensions
Sprocket size
Z15 Z24 Z32 Z36 Z48
(Number of teeth)
mm 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0
Wspr
inch 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98
mm 39.1 62.3 82.9 93.2 124.2
D0
inch 1.54 2.45 3.26 3.67 4.89
mm 16.6 28.2 38.5 43.6 59.1
Amax
inch 0.65 1.11 1.52 1.72 2.33
mm 16.2 27.9 38.3 43.4 59.0
Amin
inch 0.64 1.10 1.51 1.71 2.32

Shaft bores (● = Round, ■ = Square)

20 mm ●/■
25 mm ●/■ ●
30 mm ■
40 mm ■ ■ ■

0.75 inch ●
1 inch ●/■ ●
1.5 inch ■ ■

Material: PA, Color: LG

LG (Light gray)

I-182 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 13 | PROSNAP siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 8 mm (0.31 in)

S13-0 FLT PSP | ProSnap

Quick-Release for easy, quick and toolless opening and closing of the belt | One pin solution for entire belt width

25.4 (1)
8 (0.31)

Basic data
Pin material/length
Material Color
≤ 610 mm (24 inch) > 610 mm (24 inch) ≤ 4000 mm (157 inch)

POM LB PLX PBT

Mold to order belts

POM-MD BL PLX PBT

BL (Blue), LB (Light blue)

I-183 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

1.2 DETAILED SERIES INFORMATION

siegling prolink
modular belts

SERIES 14
Straight running belts
Pitch 12.7 mm (0.50 in)

I-184 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 14 | OVERVIEW siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belts | Pitch 12.7 mm (0.50 in)

Belts for medium-duty food and non-food applications

Side view scale 1:1 Available surface pattern and opening area

12.7 (0.5)

S14-0 FLT
Closed, smooth surface

Design characteristics
– Mini pitch belt with small transfer gap
S14-25 FLT
– Robust design guarantees superior durability Open (25 %), smooth surface
and high belt pull capacity
– Design for smooth run on 19 mm (0.75 in) nose bar
– Headless pin system making it easy to install
and remove the belt for maintenance S14-25 CUT
Open (25 %) surface with curve top
– Closed, solid belt edge to prevent belt edge damages surface

Basic data
Pitch 12.7 mm (0.50 in)
S14-25 FRT1
Belt width min. 76.2 mm (3.0 in) Open (25 %) surface with friction top
Width increments 12.7 mm (0.50 in)
Hinge pins 3.4 mm (0.13 in) made of plastic
(PP, PBT, PE).
One-piece up to a belt width of
NSF-compliant from these certified Forbo plants:
4000 mm (157.5 in).
Huntersville (USA), Maharashtra (India), Malacky (Slovakia),
Sydney/NSW (Australia), Pinghu (China), Shizuoka (Japan),
Tlalnepantla (Mexico)

Sprockets Profiles Detail hinge pin

in different sizes with round in different heights and designs Headless one-piece pin with unique
or square bore for inclines retention system ensures trouble
free installation and maintenance

I-185 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 14 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 12.7 mm (0.50 in)

S14-0 FLT | 0 % Opening | Flat top

Closed, smooth surface | Flat top surface

dpin

hpin
Wmin
Winc
Belt dimensions
p dpin hm hpin hs Wmin Winc Wtol Minimum flex radii1)
Width
Pin Width Width r1
Pitch Pin Ø Thickness Height tolerance r2 r3 r4 r5
position min. Increment Cc x WB
[%]
mm 12.7 3.4 7.5 3.8 0.0 76.2 12.7 ±0.20 – 9.5 25.4 38.1 12.7
inch 0.5 0.13 0.3 0.15 0.0 3.0 0.5 ±0.20 – 0.38 1.0 1.5 0.5

Available standard materials 3)

Nominal belt pull, Width
Belt Pin Weight Temperature Certificates2)
straight deviation
Material Color Material Color [N/mm] [lb/ft] [kg/m2] [lb/ft2] [%] [°C] [°F] FDA EU MHLW
POM BL PBT UC 24 1645 7.5 1.41 0.0 -45/90 -49/194 ● ● ●
POM WT PBT UC 24 1645 7.5 1.41 0.0 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
PP BL PP WT 9 617 4.8 1.0 0.43 5/100 41/212 ● ●
PP WT PP WT 9 617 4.8 1.0 0.43 5/100 41/212 ● ● ●
PE BL PE WT 6.5 445 5.0 0.96 -0.13 -70/65 -94/149 ● ●
PE WT PE WT 6.5 445 5.0 0.96 -0.13 -70/65 -94/149 ● ● ●

BL (Blue), UC (Uncolored), WT (White)

All measurements and tolerances apply at 21 °C; for temperature deviations please see Prolink manual chapter 4.4 “Temperature influence“.
All imperial dimensions (inches) are rounded off.
1) Flex radii: r1 = side flex, r2 = front flex on roller, r3 = back flex on load bearing roller, r4 = back flex on Hold Down shoe, r5 = back flex on roller
2) C omplies with FDA 21 CFR | Complies with (EU) 10/2011 and (EC) 1935/2004 regulations regarding the raw materials used and the migration
thresholds | Complies with Japanese MHLW Notification 370
● = available | – = not available | empty cells = not tested
3) More materials and colors on request

I-186 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 14 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 12.7 mm (0.50 in)

S14-25 FLT | 25 % Opening | Flat top

Open version (25 %) for excellent air circulation and drainage | 52 % contact area (Largest opening: 8.2 x 2.7 mm/0.32 x 0.11 in) |
Smooth surface

p
Variant specific dimensions [mm (in)]

hm 2.7 (0.11)

dpin

hpin

8.2 (0.32)
Wmin
Winc

Belt dimensions
p dpin hm hpin hs Wmin Winc Wtol Minimum flex radii1)
Width
Pin Width Width r1
Pitch Pin Ø Thickness Height tolerance r2 r3 r4 r5
position min. Increment Cc x WB
[%]
mm 12.7 3.4 7.5 3.8 0.0 76.2 12.7 ±0.20 – 9.5 25.4 38.1 12.7
inch 0.5 0.13 0.3 0.15 0.0 3.0 0.5 ±0.20 – 0.38 1.0 1.5 0.5

Available standard materials 3)

Nominal belt pull, Width
Belt Pin Weight Temperature Certificates2)
straight deviation
Material Color Material Color [N/mm] [lb/ft] [kg/m2] [lb/ft2] [%] [°C] [°F] FDA EU MHLW
POM BL PBT UC 24 1645 7.0 1.41 0.0 -45/90 -49/194 ● ● ●
POM WT PBT UC 24 1645 7.0 1.41 0.0 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
PP BL PP WT 9 617 4.5 1.0 0.43 5/100 41/212 ● ●
PP WT PP WT 9 617 4.5 1.0 0.43 5/100 41/212 ● ● ●
PE BL PE WT 6.5 445 4.7 0.96 -0.13 -70/65 -94/149 ● ●
PE WT PE WT 6.5 445 4.7 0.96 -0.13 -70/65 -94/149 ● ● ●

Mold to order belts

PA* BL PBT UC 22 1507 5.8 1.19 0.92 -40/120 -40/248 ● ●

* Values valid for dry applications (RH <50 %). Belts in PA material will absorb water in wet environments, causing them to expand and reduce the
nominal belt pull capacity.

BL (Blue), UC (Uncolored), WT (White)

I-187 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 14 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 12.7 mm (0.50 in)

S14-25 CUT | 25 % Opening | Curved top

Open version (25 %) for excellent air circulation and drainage | 26 % contact area (Largest opening: 8.2 x 2.7 mm/0.32 x 0.11 in) |
Curved top

p Variant specific dimensions [mm (in)]

hs
2.7 (0.11)
hm

dpin

hpin

8.2 (0.32)
Wmin
Winc

Belt dimensions
p dpin hm hpin hs Wmin Winc Wtol Minimum flex radii1)
Width
Pin Width Width r1
Pitch Pin Ø Thickness Height tolerance r2 r3 r4 r5
position min. Increment Cc x WB
[%]
mm 12.7 3.4 7.5 3.8 1.1 76.2 12.7 ±0.20 – 9.5 25.4 38.1 12.7
inch 0.5 0.13 0.3 0.15 0.04 3.0 0.5 ±0.20 – 0.38 1.0 1.5 0.5

Available standard materials 3)

BL (Blue), UC (Uncolored), WT (White)

All measurements and tolerances apply at 21 °C; for temperature deviations please see Prolink manual chapter 4.4 “Temperature influence“.
All imperial dimensions (inches) are rounded off.
1) Flex radii: r1 = side flex, r2 = front flex on roller, r3 = back flex on load bearing roller, r4 = back flex on Hold Down shoe, r5 = back flex on roller
2) C omplies with FDA 21 CFR | Complies with (EU) 10/2011 and (EC) 1935/2004 regulations regarding the raw materials used and the migration
thresholds | Complies with Japanese MHLW Notification 370
● = available | – = not available | empty cells = not tested
3) More materials and colors on request

I-188 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 14 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 12.7 mm (0.50 in)

S14-25 FRT1 | 25 % Opening | Friction top (Design 1)

Open version (25 %) for excellent air circulation and drainage with flat integrated friction pads (FRT1) for high grip |
32 % contact area | Version only available without FRT1 structure at the side (17 mm indent)

p
Variant specific dimensions [mm (in)]

hs
2.7 (0.11)
hm

dpin

8.2 (0.32)
hpin
Wmin
Winc

Belt dimensions
p dpin hm hpin hs Wmin Winc Wtol Minimum flex radii1)
Width
Pin Width Width r1
Pitch Pin Ø Thickness Height tolerance r2 r3 r4 r5
position min. Increment Cc x WB
[%]
mm 12.7 3.4 7.5 3.8 2.2 76.2 12.7 ±0.20 – 9.5 25.4 38.1 12.7
inch 0.5 0.13 0.3 0.15 0.09 3.0 0.5 ±0.20 – 0.38 1.0 1.5 0.5

Available standard materials 3)

Nominal belt pull, Width
Belt Pin Rubber Weight Temperature Certificates2)
straight deviation
Material Color Material Color Material Color [N/mm] [lb/ft] [kg/m2] [lb/ft2] [%] [°C] [°F] FDA EU MHLW
PP BL PP WT R7 BK 9 617 5.1 1.05 0.43 5/100 41/212 ● ●
PP WT PP WT R7 BG 9 617 5.1 1.05 0.43 5/100 41/212 ● ●

17 (0.67)
(indent)

BG (Beige), BK (Black), BL (Blue), WT (White)

I-189 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 14 | SPROCKETS siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 12.7 mm (0.50 in)

S14 SPR | Sprockets

D0 Wspr

Main dimensions
Sprocket size
Z12 Z15 Z19 Z24 Z28 Z36
(Number of teeth)
mm 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0
Wspr
inch 0.79 0.79 0.79 0.79 0.79 0.79
mm 50.0 62.3 78.7 99.2 115.7 148.7
D0
inch 1.97 2.45 3.10 3.91 4.56 5.85
mm 21.3 27.4 35.6 45.9 54.1 70.6
Amax
inch 0.84 1.08 1.40 1.81 2.13 2.78
mm 20.5 26.8 35.1 45.5 53.7 70.3
Amin
inch 0.81 1.06 1.38 1.79 2.11 2.77

Shaft bores (● = Round, ■ = Square)

20 mm ●
25 mm ●/■ ● ●
30 mm ●
40 mm ■ ■ ■ ■
60 mm ■

0.75 inch ●
1 inch ●/■ ● ●
1.25 inch ●
1.5 inch ■ ■ ■ ■
2.5 inch ■

Material: PA, Color: LG

LG (Light gray)

I-190 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 14 | PROFILES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 12.7 mm (0.50 in)

S14-0 FLT/NCL PMC

No cling surface to improve release of wet and sticky products and Flat top surface for dry products

Basic data
Height (h)
Material Color 25 mm 76 mm
1 inch 3 inch
PE BL ● ●
PE WT ● ●
POM BL ● ●
POM WT ● ●
PP BL ● ●
PP WT ● ●

Molded width: 152 mm (6.0 in)

34.1 (1.34) (indent) 34.1 (1.34) (indent)

Standard configuration S14-0 PMC

BL (Blue), WT (White)

I-191 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 14 | PRR
Straight running belt | Pitch 12.7 mm (0.50 in)

S14-25 PRR | Pin Retained Rollers

For applications where low back pressure accumulation or product separation is required

w
ale b2 b1 ari hs

Winc drol
Wmin

Dimensions
– For low back pressure wearstrips are w 3.9 mm (0.15 in) Roller cut out width
to be positioned between the rollers hs 2.25 mm (0.09 in) Height of rollers above surface
drol 13.2 mm (0.52 in) Roller diameter
– For product separation the wear- a see config. Indent of roller
strips are to be positioned below the b see config. Roller distance
s n x smin Roller spacing in travel direction (standard: n = 1)
rollers smin 12.7 mm (0.5 in) Min. roller spacing in travel direction
Winc see config. Width increment
– For all materials and surfaces Wmin see config. Min. belt width
– Rollers available in POM BK WB Belt width
nrol Number of rollers across belt width

Allowable belt pull

To determine admissible belt pull calculate effective belt width WB,ef by
WB,ef = WB – (w x nrol)
Example: WB = 432 mm (17.0 in); w = 3.9 mm (0.15 in); nrol = 7
WB,ef = 432 – (3.9 x 7) = 404.7 mm
WB,ef = 17 – (0.15 x 7) = 16 in

I-192 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 14 | PRR siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 12.7 mm (0.50 in)

S14-25 PRR | Pin Retained Rollers

Standard configurations and main data

Min. belt width – Width increment – Roller distance – b Indent of roller – a Roller/m3
Wmin Winc left right (e.g. 18 in belt
[mm] [in] [mm] [in] [mm] [in] [mm] [in] [mm] [in] width)
Config. 1 228.6 9 114.3 4.5 76.2/38.1 3/1.5 67.9 2.67 80.6 3.17 600
Config. 2 127 5 50.8 2 25.4 1 42 1.65 55 2.17 1400
Config. 3 127 5 76.2 3 38.1 1.5 42 1.65 42 1.65 990

Configuration 1

Configuration 2

Configuration 3

I-193 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

1.2 DETAILED SERIES INFORMATION

siegling prolink
modular belts

SERIES 15
Straight running belts
Pitch 12.7 mm (0.50 in)

I-194 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 15 | OVERVIEW siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belts | Pitch 12.7 mm (0.50 in)

Belts for light-duty food applications utilizing 12.7 mm (0.5 in) nose bars

Side view scale 1:1 Available surface pattern and opening area

S15-47 GRT
12.7 (0.5) Open (47 %), lattice-shaped surface

Design characteristics
– Mini-pitch belt with large open area for optimum airflow
– Scalloped underside facilitates smooth product transfer
over a 12.7 mm (0.5 in) diameter nose bar.
– Open hinge for improved sanitation
– Narrow 25 mm (1 in) width increments offer superior
support of conveyed products
– Solid and robust edge design incorporating improved
pin retention
– Headless one-piece pin for easy installation and removal
– Sprockets with large solid tooth insures superior load S15-47 RSA
transmission and long wear life Open (47 %), lattice-shaped surface
with reduced surface area

Basic data
Pitch 12.7 mm (0.50 in)
Belt width min. 203.2 mm (8 in)
Width increments 25.4 mm (1 in)
Hinge pins 3.4 mm (0.13 in) made of plastic (PBT, PP).
One-piece up to a belt width of
4000 mm (157.5 in).

Sprockets
in different sizes with round NSF-compliant from these certified Forbo plants:
or square bore Huntersville (USA), Maharashtra (India), Malacky (Slovakia),
Sydney/NSW (Australia), Pinghu (China), Shizuoka (Japan),
Tlalnepantla (Mexico)

I-195 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 15 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 12.7 mm (0.5 in)

S15-47 GRT | 47 % Opening | Grid top

Open area (47 %) for excellent air circulation and drainage | 31 % contact area | Smooth surface | Easy-to-clean

11.4 (0.45)
dpin

hpin
Wmin
8.5 (0.33)

Winc

Belt dimensions
p dpin hm hpin hs Wmin Winc Wtol Minimum flex radii1)
Width
Pin Width Width r1
Pitch Pin Ø Thickness Height tolerance r2 r3 r4 r5
position min. Increment Cc x WB
[%]
mm 12.7 3.4 7.0 3.5 – 203.2 25.4 ±0.20 – 6.4 25.4 38.1 12.7
inch 0.5 0.13 0.28 0.14 – 8.0 1.0 ±0.20 – 0.25 1.0 1.5 0.5

Available standard materials 3)

Nominal belt pull, Width
Belt Pin Weight Temperature Certificates2)
straight deviation
Material Color Material Color [N/mm] [lb/ft] [kg/m2] [lb/ft2] [%] [°C] [°F] FDA EU MHLW
POM BL PBT UC 5 343 4.3 0.88 -0.4 -45/90 -49/194 ● ● ●
POM WT PBT UC 5 343 4.3 0.88 -0.4 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
PP BL PP WT 2.5 171 2.8 0.58 -1.0 5/100 41/212 ● ●
PP WT PP WT 2.5 171 2.8 0.58 -1.0 5/100 41/212 ● ● ●
PA* BL PBT UC 4.5 308 3.7 0.75 0.4 -40/120 -40/248 ● ●

Mold to order belts

PP BL PBT UC 2.8 192 2.8 0.58 -1.0 5/100 41/212 ● ●
PP WT PBT UC 2.8 192 2.8 0.58 -1.0 5/100 41/212 ● ● ●

* Values valid for dry applications (RH < 50 %). Belts in PA material will absorb water in wet environments, causing them to expand and reduce the
nominal belt pull capacity.

BL (Blue), UC (Uncolored), WT (White)

All measurements and tolerances apply at 21 °C; for temperature deviations please see Prolink manual chapter 4.4 “Temperature influence“.
All imperial dimensions (inches) are rounded off.
1) Flex radii: r1 = side flex, r2 = front flex on roller, r3 = back flex on load bearing roller, r4 = back flex on Hold Down shoe, r5 = back flex on roller
2) C omplies with FDA 21 CFR | Complies with (EU) 10/2011 and (EC) 1935/2004 regulations regarding the raw materials used and the migration
thresholds | Complies with Japanese MHLW Notification 370
● = available | – = not available | empty cells = not tested
3) More materials and colors on request

I-196 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 15 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 12.7 mm (0.5 in)

S15-47 RSA | 47 % Opening | Reduced surface area

Open area (47 %) for excellent air circulation and drainage | 20 % contact area | Smooth surface | Easy-to-clean

hs
hm

11.4 (0.45)
31.8 (1.25)
dpin

hpin
Wmin
8.5 (0.33)

Winc

Belt dimensions
p dpin hm hpin hs Wmin Winc Wtol Minimum flex radii1)
Width
Pin Width Width r1
Pitch Pin Ø Thickness Height tolerance r2 r3 r4 r5
position min. Increment Cc x WB
[%]
mm 12.7 3.4 7.0 3.5 1.5 203.2 25.4 ±0.20 – 6.4 25.4 38.1 12.7
inch 0.5 0.13 0.28 0.14 0.06 8.0 1.0 ±0.20 – 0.25 1.0 1.5 0.5

Available standard materials 3)

Nominal belt pull, Width
Belt Pin Weight Temperature Certificates2)
straight deviation
Material Color Material Color [N/mm] [lb/ft] [kg/m2] [lb/ft2] [%] [°C] [°F] FDA EU MHLW
POM BL PBT UC 5 343 5.2 1.07 -0.4 -45/90 -49/194 ● ● ●
POM WT PBT UC 5 343 5.2 1.07 -0.4 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
PP BL PP WT 2.5 171 3.4 0.7 -1.0 5/100 41/212 ● ●
PP WT PP WT 2.5 171 3.4 0.7 -1.0 5/100 41/212 ● ● ●
PA* BL PBT UC 4.5 308 4.5 0.91 0.4 -40/120 -40/248 ● ●

Mold to order belts

PP BL PBT UC 2.8 192 3.4 0.7 -1.0 5/100 41/212 ● ●
PP WT PBT UC 2.8 192 3.4 0.7 -1.0 5/100 41/212 ● ● ●

* Values valid for dry applications (RH < 50 %). Belts in PA material will absorb water in wet environments, causing them to expand and reduce the
nominal belt pull capacity.

BL (Blue), UC (Uncolored), WT (White)

All measurements and tolerances apply at 21 °C; for temperature deviations please see Prolink manual chapter 4.4 “Temperature influence“.
All imperial dimensions (inches) are rounded off.
1) Flex radii: r1 = side flex, r2 = front flex on roller, r3 = back flex on load bearing roller, r4 = back flex on Hold Down shoe, r5 = back flex on roller
2) C omplies with FDA 21 CFR | Complies with (EU) 10/2011 and (EC) 1935/2004 regulations regarding the raw materials used and the migration
thresholds | Complies with Japanese MHLW Notification 370
● = available | – = not available | empty cells = not tested
3) More materials and colors on request

I-197 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 15 | SPROCKETS siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 12.7 mm (0.5 in)

S15 SPR | Sprockets

A
D0 Wspr

Main dimensions
Sprocket size
Z12 Z14 Z17 Z19 Z24 Z36
(Number of teeth)
mm 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0
Wspr
inch 0.79 0.79 0.79 0.79 0.79 0.79
mm 50.6 58.9 71.3 79.6 100.4 150.3
D0
inch 1.99 2.32 2.81 3.13 3.95 5.92
mm 21.8 25.9 32.1 36.3 46.7 71.6
Amax
inch 0.86 1.02 1.26 1.43 1.84 2.82
mm 21.0 25.3 31.6 35.8 46.3 71.4
Amin
inch 0.83 1.00 1.24 1.41 1.82 2.81

Shaft bores (● = Round, ■ = Square)

20 mm ● ●
25 mm ●/■ ● ● ●/■ ● ●
30 mm ● ●
40 mm ■ ■

0.75 inch ● ●
1 inch ●/■ ●/■ ●/■ ●/■ ● ●
1.25 inch ● ●
1.5 inch ■ ■

Material: PA, Color: LG

LG (Light gray)

I-198 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

I-199 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024
1.2 DETAILED SERIES INFORMATION

siegling prolink
modular belts

SERIES 17
Straight running belts
Pitch 25.4 mm (1 in)

I-200 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 17 | OVERVIEW siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belts | Pitch 25.4 mm (1 in)

Medium to heavy-duty belts for industrial applications

Side view scale 1:1 Available surface pattern and opening area

S17-0 FLT
Closed, smooth surface
25.4 (1)

Design characteristics
– Closed hinge design provides high belt pull capacity
S17-0 SRS
– A rigid module design allows optimal utilization Closed, slip-resistant surface
of belt pull capacity relative to belt weight
– Robust design guarantees durability
– Unique ‘keyhole’ pin retention system ensures
easy pin removal
– Flame retardant version available
(PXX-HC – in line with DIN EN 13501-1)

Basic data
Pitch 25.4 mm (1 in)
Belt width min. 76.2 mm (3 in)
Width increments 12.7 mm (0.5 in)
Hinge pins 4.2 mm (0.17 in) made of plastic (PBT, PP)

Sprockets Profiles
in different sizes with round for incline conveyors
or square bore

I-201 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 17 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 25.4 mm (1 in)

S17-0 FLT | 0 % Opening | Flat top

Closed, smooth surface | Flat top surface

dpin

hpin
Winc
Belt dimensions Wmin
p dpin hm hpin hs Wmin Winc Wtol Minimum flex radii1)
Width
Pin Width Width r1
Pitch Pin Ø Thickness Height tolerance r2 r3 r4 r5
position min. Increment Cc x WB
[%]
mm 25.4 4.2 8.6 4.3 0.0 76.2 12.7 ±0.2 – 25.4 50.8 76.2 25.4
inch 1.0 0.17 0.34 0.17 0.0 3.0 0.5 ±0.2 – 1.0 2.0 3.0 1.0

Available standard materials 3)

Nominal belt pull, Width
Belt Pin Weight Temperature Certificates2)
straight deviation
Material Color Material Color [N/mm] [lb/ft] [kg/m2] [lb/ft2] [%] [°C] [°F] FDA EU
POM LG PBT UC 32 2193 6.5 1.33 -0.09 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
PP BL PP BL 18 1233 4.2 0.86 0.35 5/100 41/212 ● ●

Mold to width available in: 76 mm (3.0 in), 229 mm (9.0 in)

BL (Blue), LG (Light gray), UC (Uncolored)

I-202 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 17 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 25.4 mm (1 in)

S17-0 SRS | 0 % Opening | Slip-resistant surface

Closed surface | Slip-resistant surface, pleasant to walk and kneel on

dpin

hpin
Winc
Belt dimensions Wmin
p dpin hm hpin hs Wmin Winc Wtol Minimum flex radii1)
Width
Pin Width Width r1
Pitch Pin Ø Thickness Height tolerance r2 r3 r4 r5
position min. Increment Cc x WB
[%]
mm 25.4 4.2 8.6 4.3 0.0 76.2 12.7 ±0.2 – 25.4 50.8 76.2 25.4
inch 1.0 0.17 0.34 0.17 0.0 3.0 0.5 ±0.2 – 1.0 2.0 3.0 1.0

Mold to order belts 3)

Mold to width available in: 76 mm (3.0 in), 229 mm (9.0 in)

BK (Black), UC (Uncolored)

I-203 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 17 | SPROCKETS siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 25.4 mm (1 in)

S17 SPR | Sprockets

D0 Wspr

Main dimensions
Sprocket size
Z12 Z15 Z18 Z19
(Number of teeth)
mm 24.0 24.0 24.0 24.0
Wspr
inch 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94
mm 99.7 123.2 148.0 156.1
D0
inch 3.93 4.85 5.83 6.15
mm 45.8 57.4 70.0 73.9
Amax
inch 1.80 2.26 2.76 2.91
mm 44.0 56.0 68.7 72.7
Amin
inch 1.73 2.20 2.70 2.86

Shaft bores (● = Round, ■ = Square)

30 mm ●
40 mm ■ ●/■
60 mm ■ ■ ■
80 mm ■

1.25 inch ●
1.5 inch ■ ●/■
2.5 inch ■ ■ ■

Material: PA, Color: LG

LG (Light gray)

I-204 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 17 | PROFILES siegling prolink
modular belts
Straight running belt | Pitch 25.4 mm (1 in)

S17-0 FLT PMU I83

Lateral rib with indent 83 mm (3.3 in) to carry goods with small profiles

Variant specific dimensions [mm (in)]

(0.25)
63.5 (2.50)

6.35
hm

dpin

hpin

63.5 (2.50)

(0.50)
12.7
Winc
Wmin

83 (3.27)
Basic data
Height (h)
Material Color 10 mm
0.39 inch
POM LG ●

Molded width: 228.6 mm (9.0 in)

83 (3.27)

Standard configuration S17-0 FLT PMU I83

LG (Light gray)

I-205 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

1.2 DETAILED SERIES INFORMATION

siegling prolink
modular belts

SERIES 18
Side flexing and spiral belts
Pitch 25.4 mm (1 in)

I-206 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 18 | OVERVIEW siegling prolink
modular belts
Side flexing and spiral belts | Pitch 25.4 mm (1 in)

Belts for light to medium-duty food and non-food applications

Side view scale 1:1 Available surface pattern and opening area

S18-44 GRT 2.2

Open (44 %), lattice-shaped surface

25.4 (1)

Design characteristics S18-44 GRT 2.2 G

– All plastic light weight belt suitable for both straight Open (44 %), lattice-shaped surface
and radius conveying and Hold Down Tabs

– 44 % open area for excellent air circulation and drainage

– Narrow grid structure of the belt ensures secure handling
of even small products S18-44 HDK 2.2
– High curve belt pull capacity offering improved capacity Open (44 %), lattice-shaped surface
and reliability and High Deck

– Easy to clean and suitable for conveying of food including

direct food contact S18-44 FRT1 2.2
– Superior lateral stiffness and rigidity for an all plastic belt Open (44 %), surface with friction top

Basic data
Pitch 25.4 mm (1 in)
Belt width min. 149.4 mm (5.88 in) S18-44 GRT 1.7
Belt width max. 1219 mm (48 in) Open (44 %), lattice-shaped surface
Width increments 12.7 mm (0.5 in)
Hinge pins 4.2 mm (0.17 in) made of plastic (PLX, PP). S18-44 GRT 2.2/1.7 CW
One-piece up to a belt width of S18-44 GRT 1.7/2.2 CCW
1219 mm (48 in). Open (44 %), lattice-shaped surface
CW = Clockwise (right hand curve)
CCW = Counter Clockwise
Sprockets (left hand curve)
in different sizes with round
or square bore
(picture shows CCW)

NSF-compliant from these certified Forbo plants:

Huntersville (USA), Maharashtra (India), Malacky (Slovakia),
Sydney/NSW (Australia), Pinghu (China), Shizuoka (Japan),
Tlalnepantla (Mexico)

I-207 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 18 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Side flexing and spiral belt | Pitch 25.4 mm (1 in) | Cc = 2.2

S18-44 GRT 2.2 | 44 % Opening | Grid top

Open area (44%) for excellent air circulation and drainage | 42% contact area (Largest opening: 9 x 7.9 mm/0.35 x 0.31 in) |
Lattice-shape surface | Collapse factor (Cc) = 2.2

p Variant specific dimensions [mm (in)]

hm
7.9 (0.31)
dpin

hpin
Wmin

9 (0.35)
Winc

WB = Belt width, further information regarding r1 see page III-20

Available standard materials 3)
Nominal belt pull, Nominal belt pull, Width
Belt Pin Weight Temperature Certificates2)
straight curve deviation
Material Color Material Color [N/mm] [lb/ft] [N] [lb] [kg/m2] [lb/ft2] [%] [°C] [°F] FDA EU
POM-CR BL PLX BL 30 2056 1600 360 8.4 1.72 -0.1 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
POM-CR WT PLX BL 30 2056 1600 360 8.4 1.72 -0.1 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
PP BL PLX BL 18 1233 1000 225 5.8 1.19 0.5 5/100 41/212 ● ●
PP WT PLX BL 18 1233 1000 225 5.8 1.19 0.5 5/100 41/212 ● ●
PP BL PP WT 16 1096 600 135 5.5 1.13 0.5 5/100 41/212 ● ●
PP WT PP WT 16 1096 600 135 5.5 1.13 0.5 5/100 41/212 ● ●

Mold to order belts

PA* BL PLX BL 25 1713 1500 337 6.9 1.41 0.85 -40/120 -40/248 ● ●

* Values valid for dry applications (RH < 50 %). Belts in PA material will absorb water in wet environments, causing them to expand and reduce the
nominal belt pull capacity.

BL (Blue), WT (White)

I-208 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 18 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Side flexing and spiral belt | Pitch 25.4 mm (1 in) | Cc = 2.2

S18-44 GRT 2.2 G | 44 % Opening | Grid top · guided

Open area (44%) for excellent air circulation and drainage | 42% contact area (Largest opening: 9 x 7.9 mm/0.35 x 0.31 in) |
Lattice-shape surface and Hold Down Tabs | Allows utilization of the entire belt width | Collapse factor (Cc) = 2.2

p Variant specific dimensions [mm (in)]

12.7 (0.5)
hm
dpin 21.3 (0.84)

hpin
27.3 (1.07)
32.8 (1.29)

3.8 (0.15)
7.9 (0.31)

Wmin

9 (0.35)
Winc

WB = Belt width, further information regarding r1 see page III-20

Available standard materials 3)
Nominal belt pull, Nominal belt pull, Width
Belt Pin Weight Temperature Certificates2)
straight curve** deviation
Material Color Material Color [N/mm] [lb/ft] [N] [lb] [kg/m2] [lb/ft2] [%] [°C] [°F] FDA EU
POM-CR BL PLX BL 30 2056 1600 360 8.4 1.72 -0.1 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
POM-CR WT PLX BL 30 2056 1600 360 8.4 1.72 -0.1 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
PP BL PLX BL 18 1233 1000 225 5.8 1.19 0.5 5/100 41/212 ● ●
PP WT PLX BL 18 1233 1000 225 5.8 1.19 0.5 5/100 41/212 ● ●

Mold to order belts

PA* BL PLX BL 25 1713 1500 337 6.9 1.41 0.85 -40/120 -40/248 ● ●

* Values valid for dry applications (RH < 50 %). Belts in PA material will absorb water in wet environments, causing them to expand and reduce the
nominal belt pull capacity.
** will be reduced by G-tab guiding (see chapter 3.3 conveyor layouts)

BL (Blue), WT (White)

All measurements and tolerances apply at 21 °C; for temperature deviations please see Prolink manual chapter 4.4 “Temperature influence“.
All imperial dimensions (inches) are rounded off.
1) Flex radii: r1 = side flex, r2 = front flex on roller, r3 = back flex on load bearing roller, r4 = back flex on Hold Down shoe, r5 = back flex on roller
Attention: Restrictions on sprocket size and corresponding shaft options – please check sprocket data sheet
2) Complies with FDA 21 CFR | Complies with (EU) 10/2011 and (EC) 1935/2004 regulations regarding the raw materials used and the migration
thresholds | Complies with Japanese MHLW Notification 370
● = available | – = not available | empty cells = not tested
3) More materials and colors on request

I-209 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 18 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Side flexing and spiral belt | Pitch 25.4 mm (1 in) | Cc = 2.2

S18-44 HDK 2.2 | 44 % Opening | High Deck

Open area (44 %) for excellent air circulation and drainage | 42 % contact area (Largest opening: 9 x 7.9 mm/0.35 x 0.31 in) |
Lattice-shape surface | Collapse factor (Cc) = 2.2 | Allows utilization of the entire belt width and beyond

p Variant specific dimensions [mm (in)]

22.2 (0.87)

hs
hm

10.1 (0.4)
dpin

hpin
7.9 (0.31)

Wmin

9 (0.35)
Winc

WB = Belt width, further information regarding r1 see page III-20

Available standard materials 3)
Nominal belt pull, Nominal belt pull, Width
Belt Pin Weight Temperature Certificates2)
straight curve deviation
Material Color Material Color [N/mm] [lb/ft] [N] [lb] [kg/m2] [lb/ft2] [%] [°C] [°F] FDA EU
POM-CR BL PLX BL 30 2056 1600 360 15.5 3.17 -0.1 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
POM-CR WT PLX BL 30 2056 1600 360 15.5 3.17 -0.1 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
PP BL PLX BL 18 1233 1000 225 10.3 2.11 0.5 5/100 41/212 ● ●
PP WT PLX BL 18 1233 1000 225 10.3 2.11 0.5 5/100 41/212 ● ●
PP BL PP WT 16 1096 800 180 10.2 2.09 0.5 5/100 41/212 ● ●
PP WT PP WT 16 1096 800 180 10.2 2.09 0.5 5/100 41/212 ● ●
PA* BL PLX BL 25 1713 1500 337 12.6 2.58 0.85 -40/120 -40/248 ● ●

* Values valid for dry applications (RH < 50 %). Belts in PA material will absorb water in wet environments, causing them to expand and reduce the
nominal belt pull capacity.

BL (Blue), WT (White)

I-210 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 18 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Side flexing and spiral belt | Pitch 25.4 mm (1 in) | Cc = 1.7

S18-44 GRT 1.7 | 44 % Opening | Grid top

Open area (44 %) for excellent air circulation and drainage | 42 % contact area (Largest opening: 9 x 7.9 mm/0.35 x 0.31 in) |
Lattice-shape surface | Collapse factor (Cc) = 1.7

p Variant specific dimensions [mm (in)]

hm
dpin

hpin

65.4 (2.58)
Wmin

9 (0.35)
Winc

7.9 (0.31)

WB = Belt width, further information regarding r1 see page III-20

Available standard materials 3)
Nominal belt pull, Nominal belt pull,
Nominal belt Width
Belt Pin belt width curve belt width curve Weight Temperature Certificates2)
pull, straight deviation
< 403 mm (15.88 in) ≥ 403 mm (15.88 in)
Material Color Material Color [N/mm] [lb/ft] [N] [lb] [N] [lb] [kg/m2] [lb/ft2] [%] [°C] [°F] FDA EU
POM-CR BL PLX BL 25 1713 700 157 900 202 8.4 1.72 -0.1 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
POM-CR WT PLX BL 25 1713 700 157 900 202 8.4 1.72 -0.1 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
PP BL PLX BL 18 1233 400 90 700 157 5.8 1.19 0.5 5/100 41/212 ● ●
PP WT PLX BL 18 1233 400 90 700 157 5.8 1.19 0.5 5/100 41/212 ● ●
PP BL PP WT 16 1096 400 90 600 135 5.5 1.13 0.5 5/100 41/212 ● ●
PP WT PP WT 16 1096 400 90 600 135 5.5 1.13 0.5 5/100 41/212 ● ●

BL (Blue), WT (White)

I-211 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 18 | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Side flexing and spiral belt | Pitch 25.4 mm (1 in) | Cc = 2.2

S18-44 FRT1 2.2 | 44 % Opening | Friction top (Design 1)

Open area (44%) with integrated friction pads (FRT1) for high grip | 42% contact area (Largest opening: 9 x 7.9 mm/
0.35 x 0.31 in) | Standard version without FRT-pads on belt edge (27.5 mm/1.08 in indent) | Collapse factor (Cc) = 2.2

p Variant specific dimensions [mm (in)]

hs
27.5 (1.08)
hm
dpin

5.1 (0.2)
hpin
7.9 (0.31)

Wmin

9 (0.35)
Winc

Belt dimensions
p dpin hm hpin hs Wmin Winc Wtol Minimum flex radii1)
Width
Pin Width Width r1
Pitch Pin Ø Thickness Height tolerance r2 r3 r4 r5
position min. Increment Cc x WB
[%]
mm 25.4 4.2 12.7 6.4 5.1 149.4 12.7 ±0.2 2.2 x WB 25.4 50.8 76.2 25.4
inch 1.0 0.17 0.5 0.25 0.20 5.88 0.5 ±0.2 2.2 x WB 1.0 2.0 3.0 1.0
WB = Belt width, further information regarding r1 see page III-20
Available standard materials 3)
Nominal belt Nominal belt Width
Belt Pin Rubber Weight Temperature Certificates2)
pull, straight pull, curve deviation
Material Color Material Color Material Color [N/mm] [lb/ft] [N] [lb] [kg/m2] [lb/ft2] [%] [°C] [°F] FDA EU
PP BL PLX BL R7 BL 18 1233 1000 225 8.80 1.80 0.5 5/100 41/212 ● ●
PP WT PLX BL R7 BG 18 1233 1000 225 8.80 1.80 0.5 5/100 41/212 ● ●
PP BL PP WT R7 BL 16 1096 600 135 8.60 1.76 0.5 5/100 41/212 ● ●
PP WT PP WT R7 BG 16 1096 600 135 8.60 1.76 0.5 5/100 41/212 ● ●

BG (Beige), BL (Blue), WT (White)

All measurements and tolerances apply at 21 °C; for temperature deviations please see Prolink manual chapter 4.4 “Temperature influence“.
All imperial dimensions (inches) are rounded off.
1) Flex radii: r1 = side flex, r2 = front flex on roller, r3 = back flex on load bearing roller, r4 = back flex on Hold Down shoe, r5 = back flex on roller
2) C omplies with FDA 21 CFR | Complies with (EU) 10/2011 and (EC) 1935/2004 regulations regarding the raw materials used and the migration
thresholds | Complies with Japanese MHLW Notification 370
● = available | – = not available | empty cells = not tested
3) More materials and colors on request

I-212 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

S18 COMBO | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Side flexing and spiral belt | Pitch 25.4 mm (1 in) | Cc = 1.7

p Variant specific dimensions [mm (in)]

7.9 (0.31)
hm
dpin

hpin

9 (0.35)
Winc

65.4 (2.58)
Wmin

WB = Belt width, further information regarding r1 see page III-20

Available standard materials 3)
Nominal belt pull, Nominal belt pull, Width
Belt Pin Weight Temperature Certificates2)
straight curve deviation
Material Color Material Color [N/mm] [lb/ft] [N] [lb] [kg/m2] [lb/ft2] [%] [°C] [°F] FDA EU
POM-CR BL PLX BL 30 2056 1600 360 8.4 1.72 -0.1 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
POM-CR WT PLX BL 30 2056 1600 360 8.4 1.72 -0.1 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
PP BL PLX BL 18 1233 1000 225 5.8 1.19 0.5 5/100 41/212 ● ●
PP WT PLX BL 18 1233 1000 225 5.8 1.19 0.5 5/100 41/212 ● ●
PP BL PP WT 16 1096 600 135 5.5 1.13 0.5 5/100 41/212 ● ●
PP WT PP WT 16 1096 600 135 5.5 1.13 0.5 5/100 41/212 ● ●

BL (Blue), WT (White)

I-213 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

S18 COMBO | BELT TYPES siegling prolink
modular belts
Side flexing and spiral belt | Pitch 25.4 mm (1 in) | Cc = 1.7

S18-44 GRT 1.7/2.2 CCW | 44 % Opening | Grid top | Counter clockwise or left hand curve
Combination of high belt pull capacity and small radii in one directional curve layouts | Open area (44 %) for excellent
air circulation and drainage | 42 % contact area (Largest opening: 9 x 7.9 mm/0.35 x 0.31 in) | Lattice-shape surface |
Collapse factor (Cc) = 1.7

p Variant specific dimensions [mm (in)]

7.9 (0.31)
hm
dpin

hpin

9 (0.35)
Winc

65.4 (2.58)
Wmin

WB = Belt width, further information regarding r1 see page III-20

Available standard materials 3)
Nominal belt pull, Nominal belt pull, Width
Belt Pin Weight Temperature Certificates2)
straight curve deviation
Material Color Material Color [N/mm] [lb/ft] [N] [lb] [kg/m2] [lb/ft2] [%] [°C] [°F] FDA EU
POM-CR BL PLX BL 30 2056 1600 360 8.4 1.72 -0.1 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
POM-CR WT PLX BL 30 2056 1600 360 8.4 1.72 -0.1 -45/90 -49/194 ● ●
PP BL PLX BL 18 1233 1000 225 5.8 1.19 0.5 5/100 41/212 ● ●
PP WT PLX BL 18 1233 1000 225 5.8 1.19 0.5 5/100 41/212 ● ●
PP BL PP WT 16 1096 600 135 5.5 1.13 0.5 5/100 41/212 ● ●
PP WT PP WT 16 1096 600 135 5.5 1.13 0.5 5/100 41/212 ● ●

BL (Blue), WT (White)

I-214 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

SERIES 18 | SPROCKETS siegling prolink
modular belts
Side flexing and spiral belt | Pitch 25.4 mm (1 in)

S18 SPR | Sprockets

D0 Wspr

Main dimensions
Sprocket size
Z6 Z9 Z12 Z16 Z20
(Number of teeth)
mm 20.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0
Wspr
inch 0.79 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98
mm 50.6 74.1 97.9 129.9 162.0
D0
inch 1.99 2.92 3.85 5.11 6.38
mm 19.2 30.9 42.8 58.8 75.0
Amax
inch 0.76 1.22 1.69 2.31 2.95
mm 16.6 29.0 41.3 57.7 74.1
Amin
inch 0.65 1.14 1.63 2.27 2.92

Shaft bores (● = Round, ■ = Square; ❍ / ❏ = not possible with G tab belts)

20 mm ❍
25 mm ●/❏ ● ● ●
30 mm ● ● ●
40 mm ●/■ ●/■ ●/■

0.75 inch ❍
1 inch ●/❏ ● ● ●
1.25 inch ● ● ●
1.5 inch ●/■ ●/■ ●/■

Material: PA, Color: LG

LG (Light gray)

I-215 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

1.3 RETAINER RINGS siegling prolink
modular belts

RTR | Retainer Rings

2 Nm

P
Q

Main dimensions** [mm (in)]

Shaft size Article number Designation*
M N P Q
SQ 40 mm 98168799 RTR PA LG (SS) SQ40MM 41 (1.6) 65 (2.6) 15 (0.6) 68 (2.7)

SQ 60 mm 98168899 RTR PA LG (SS) SQ60MM 61 (2.4) 86 (3.4) 15 (0.6) 97 (3.8)

SQ 1½ in 98168999 RTR PA LG (SS) SQ1.5IN 39 (1.5) 65 (2.6) 15 (0.6) 67 (2.6)

SQ 2½ in 98169099 RTR PA LG (SS) SQ2.5IN 64 (2.5) 89 (3.5) 15 (0.6) 100 (3.9)

* SS = stainless steel screw and nut

** To verify that a retainer ring is suitable for a specific sprocket check that Q/2 < A
The „A“ dimension is the distance from shaft centre to underside of belt.
This value can be found under sprocket data in the belt brochures.

I-216 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

I-217 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024
1.4 APPLICATIONS

Fruit and vegetable processing

Sterilising/cooling
Incline/decline

Deep freezing

de-palletizing
Palletizing/
Conveying

conveying
Container
Draining
Washing

Sorting
S1-0 FLT ● ● ● ●
S1-18 FLT ● ● ● ●

S2-0 FLT ● ●
S2-57 GRT ● ● ● ●
S2-57 RRB ● ● ● ●
S2-0 FRT1 ● ●

S3-0 FLT ● ● ● ● ●
S3-16 FLT ● ● ● ● ● ●

S4.1-0 FRT1 ● ●
S4.1-21 NTP ● ●

S5-45 GRT ● ● ● ● ●
S5-45 GRT G ● ● ● ● ●
S5-45 GRT ST ● ● ● ● ●

S6.1-0 FLT ● ● ●
S6.1-21 FLT ● ● ● ● ● ●
S6.1-23 FLT ● ● ● ● ● ●
S6.1-36 FLT ● ● ● ● ●

S8-0 FLT ● ● ●
S8-25 RAT ● ●
S8.1-30 FLT ● ●
S8.1-30 FLT GT ● ●
S8-0 FRT1 ● ●

S9-57 GRT ● ● ● ●
S9-57 GRT G ● ● ● ●

S10-0 FLT ● ● ●
S10-0 NTP ● ●
S10-0 FRT1 ● ● ●
S10-22 FLT ● ● ● ●
S10-36 FLT ● ● ● ● ●
S10-36 LRB ● ●

S11-45 GRT ●
S11-45 GRT HD ●

S11 Combo ●

S13-0 FLT ● ●
S13-34 FLT ● ●

I-218 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

Sterilising/cooling
Incline/decline

Deep freezing

de-palletizing
Palletizing/
Conveying

conveying
Container
Draining
Washing

Sorting
S14-0 FLT ● ● ●
S14-25 FLT ● ● ● ● ● ●
S14-25 CUT ● ● ● ●
S14-25 FRT1 ●

S15-47 GRT ●
S15-47 RSA ●

S17-0 FLT ● ● ●

S18-44 GRT 2.2 ● ● ● ●

S18-44 GRT 2.2 G ● ● ● ●
S18-44 HDK 2.2 ● ● ●
S18-44 GRT 1.7 ● ● ●
S18-44 FRT1 2.2 ● ● ●

I-219 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

1.4 APPLICATIONS

Meat and poultry processing

Topping/Breading
Trimming/filleting

Cooling/freezing
Cutting/jointing

Metal detectors
Incline/decline
Conveying

Packaging
conveyors
S2-0 FLT ● ● ●
S2-12 FLT ●
S2-0 FRT1 ●

S3-0 FLT ● ● ● ● ●
S3-16 FLT ● ● ●
S3-0 LRB ● ●
S3-16 LRB ● ●

S4.1-0 FLT ● ● ●
S4.1-0 FRT1 ● ●
S4.1-21 FLT ●

S5-45 GRT ● ● ● ●
S5-45 NTP ● ●
S5-39 FRT1/S5-33 FRT2 ●
S5-45 GRT G ● ● ● ●
S5-45 GRT RG ● ● ● ●
S5-45 GRT ST ● ● ● ●

S6.1-0 FLT ● ● ● ● ● ●
S6.1-0 NTP ● ● ● ●
S6.1-0 CTP ● ● ● ●
S6.1-21 FLT ● ● ●
S6.1-23 FLT ● ● ●
S6.1-36 FLT ●

S8.1-30 FLT ●
S8.1-30 FLT GT ●
S8-0 FRT1 ● ●

S9-57 GRT ● ● ●
S9-57 GRT G ● ● ●

S10-0 FLT ● ● ● ●
S10-0 NTP ●
S10-0 FRT1 ● ● ●
S10-22 FLT ● ● ● ●
S10-36 FLT ●
S10-36 LRB ● ●

S11-45 GRT ● ●
S11-45 GRT HD ● ●
S11-33 FRT2 ●

S11 Combo ●

S13-0 CTP ● ●

S14-0 FLT ● ●
S14-25 CUT ●
S14-25 FRT1 ●

I-220 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

Topping/Breading
Trimming/filleting

Cooling/freezing
Cutting/jointing

Metal detectors
Incline/decline
Conveying

Packaging
conveyors
S15-47 GRT ● ●
S15-47 RSA ●

S18-44 GRT 2.2 ● ● ● ●

S18-44 GRT 2.2 G ● ● ● ●
S18-44 HDK 2.2 ● ● ● ●
S18-44 GRT 1.7 ● ● ● ●
S18-44 FRT1 2.2 ● ● ● ● ●

I-221 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

1.4 APPLICATIONS

Baked goods manufacturing

Decorating/glazing
Cooling/freezing
Emptying molds

Metal detectors

sheets/molds

Laminating
Conveying
Conveying

Packaging
tunnels
Spirals
S1-0 FLT ● ● ●
S1-18 FLT
S2-0 FLT ● ● ● ● ●
S2-57 GRT ● ● ●
S2-57 RRB ● ●

S3-0 FLT ● ● ● ● ●
S3-16 FLT
S4.1-0 FLT ● ● ● ● ● ●
S4.1-0 NPY ● ● ● ●
S4.1-0 FRT1 ● ●
S4.1-21 FLT ● ● ● ● ● ●

S5-45 GRT ● ● ● ● ●
S5-45 GRT G ● ● ● ● ● ●
S5-45 GRT RG ● ● ● ● ● ●
S5-45 GRT ST ● ● ● ● ● ●
S5-45 GRT BT ●

S6.1-0 FLT ● ● ● ●
S6.1-21 FLT ● ●
S6.1-23 FLT ● ●
S6.1-36 FLT ●

S8-0 FLT ● ● ●
S8-25 RAT ●
S8.1-30 FLT ● ● ●
S8.1-30 FLT GT ● ● ●
S8-0 FRT1 ● ●

S9-57 GRT ● ● ●
S9-57 GRT G ● ● ● ●
S9-57 GRT F2, F3, F4 – F8 ●

S10-0 FLT ● ● ● ●
S10-0 NTP ●
S10-22 FRT1 ● ● ●
S10-22 FLT ● ●
S10-36 FLT ●
S10-36 LRB ●

S11-45 GRT ● ● ●
S11-45 GRT HD ● ● ●

S11 Combo ● ●

S13-0 FLT ● ● ● ● ●
S13-0 NPY ● ● ● ●
S13-0 CTP ● ●
S13-34 FLT ● ● ●

I-222 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

Decorating/glazing
Cooling/freezing
Emptying molds

Metal detectors

sheets/molds

Laminating
Conveying
Conveying

Packaging
tunnels
Spirals
S14-0 FLT ● ●
S14-25 FLT ● ● ● ● ●
S14-25 FRT1 ● ● ●

S15-47 GRT ● ●
S15-47 RSA ● ●

S17-0 FLT ● ● ●

S18-44 GRT 2.2 ● ● ● ● ●

S18-44 GRT 2.2 G ● ● ● ● ●
S18-44 HDK 2.2 ● ● ● ●
S18-44 GRT 1.7 ● ● ● ● ●
S18-44 FRT1 2.2 ● ● ●

I-223 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

1.4 APPLICATIONS

Seafood processing

Trimming/Slicing/

Metal detectors
Incline/decline

decorating
Conveying
Inspection

Packaging
Freezing/
Draining

benches
Filleting
S1-0 FLT ● ● ● ●
S1-18 FLT ● ● ● ● ●

S2-0 FLT ● ● ●
S2-12 FLT ●
S2-0 FRT1 ● ●

S3-0 FLT ● ● ● ●
S3-16 FLT ● ● ● ● ● ●

S4.1-0 FLT ● ●
S4.1-0 FRT1 ●
S4.1-21 FLT ●
S4.1-21 NTP ● ● ●

S5-45 GRT ● ● ● ●
S5-45 NTP ●
S5-45 GRT G ● ● ● ●
S5-45 GRT RG ● ● ● ●
S5-45 GRT ST ● ● ● ●

S6.1-0 FLT ● ● ● ● ●
S6.1-0 NTP ●
S6.1-0 CTP ● ● ●
S6.1-21 FLT ● ● ● ● ● ●
S6.1-23 FLT ● ● ● ● ● ●
S6.1-36 FLT ● ●

S8.1-30 FLT ●
S8.1-30 FLT GT ●
S8-0 FRT1 ●

S9-57 GRT ●
S9-57 GRT G ●

S10-0 FLT ● ● ● ●
S10-0 NTP ● ● ●
S10-0 FRT1 ● ●
S10-22 FLT ● ● ● ● ●
S10-36 FLT ● ●
S10-36 LRB ● ●

S11-45 GRT ● ●
S11-45 GRT HD ● ●

S11 Combo ●

S13-0 CTP ● ●
S13-34 FLT ● ●

I-224 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

Trimming/Slicing/

Metal detectors
Incline/decline

decorating
Conveying
Inspection

Packaging
Freezing/
Draining

benches
S14-0 FLT Filleting
● ●
S14-25 CUT ● ●
S14-25 FRT1 ●

S18-44 GRT 2.2 ● ● ● ●

S18-44 GRT 2.2 G ● ● ● ●
S18-44 HDK 2.2 ● ● ● ●
S18-44 GRT 1.7 ● ● ● ●
S18-44 FRT1 2.2 ● ● ● ●

I-225 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

1.4 APPLICATIONS

Automotive/tire manufacturing

Vehicle conveying

Skid conveying
Tire conveying

Worker belts
S1-0 FLT ● ● ●
S1-0 SRS ● ● ● ●
S1-18 FLT ● ● ●
S1-0 NSK ● ●
S1-0 FRT1 ●

S4.1-0 FLT ●

S5-45 GRT ●
S5-45 NTP ●
S5-45 GRT G ●
S5-45 GRT RG ●
S5-45 GRT ST ●

S6.1-0 CTP ●

S7-0 FLT ● ●
S7-0 SRS ● ● ●
S7-6 FLT ● ●
S7-0 NSK ● ●
S7-6 NSK ● ●
S7-0 FRT1 ●

S8-0 FLT ● ●
S8-0 SRS ● ●
S8-0 NSK ● ●
S8-25 RAT ●
S8-0 RTP A90 ●

S9-57 GRT ●
S9-57 NTP ●
S9-57 GRT G ●

S17-0 FLT ● ●
S17-0 SRS ● ●

I-226 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

Logistics

General logistics

Parcel sorting

Airports
S1-0 FLT ●
S1-0 SRS ● ● ●
S1-0 NSK ●

S2-0 FLT ●

S4.1-0 FRT1 ● ● ●

S5-45 GRT ● ●
S5-39 FRT1/S5-33 FRT2 ●
S5-45 GRT G ● ●
S5-45 GRT RG ● ●
S5-45 GRT ST ● ●
S5-45 GRT BT ●

S6.1-0 CTP ●

S8-0 FLT ● ● ●
S8.1-30 FLT ●
S8.1-30 FLT GT ●
S8-0 FRT1 ● ● ●
S8-0 RTP A90 ● ●

S9-57 GRT ● ●
S9-57 GRT G ● ●

S11-45 GRT ● ●
S11-45 GRT HD ● ●
S11-33 FRT2 ●

S11 Combo ●

S14-0 FLT ● ● ●

S17-0 FLT ● ● ●

S18-44 GRT 2.2 ● ●

S18-44 GRT 2.2 G ● ●
S18-44 HDK 2.2 ● ●
S18-44 GRT 1.7 ● ●
S18-44 FRT1 2.2 ●

I-227 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

1.4 APPLICATIONS

Other applications

Ski lift/access belts

Conveying people

Palette conveyors

Cooling tunnels
freezing towers
Textile industry

Deep freezing/

Dairy products
Glass industry

Corrugated
Unit goods

cardboard
Paper
S1-0 FLT ● ● ● ● ●
S1-0 SRS ● ●
S1-18 FLT ●
S1-0 NSK ●
S1-0 FRT1 ● ●

S2-0 FLT ● ● ● ●
S2-12 FLT ●
S2-57 GRT ●
S2-57 RRB ● ●
S2-0 FRT1 ● ●

S3-0 FLT ● ● ●
S3-16 FLT ●

S4.1-0 FLT ● ● ● ● ● ●
S4.1-0 FRT1 ● ● ● ●
S4.1-21 FLT ● ● ● ●

S5-45 GRT ● ●
S5-39 FRT1/S5-33 FRT2 ●
S5-45 GRT G ● ●
S5-45 GRT RG ● ●
S5-45 GRT ST ● ●
S5-45 GRT BT ●

S6.1-0 FLT ● ● ●
S6.1-0 NTP ●
S6.1-0 CTP ●
S6.1-21 FLT ●
S6.1-23 FLT ●
S6.1-36 FLT ●

S7-0 FLT ● ● ●
S7-0 SRS ● ● ●
S7-6 FLT ●
S7-0 NSK ●
S7-0 FRT1 ● ●

S8-0 FLT ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
S8-0 NSK ● ●
S8-0 FRT1 ● ● ● ● ●
S8-0 RTP A90 ●

S9-57 GRT ● ●
S9-57 GRT G ● ●
S9-57 GRT F2, F3, F4 – F8 ●

I-228 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

Ski lift/access belts
Conveying people

Palette conveyors

Cooling tunnels
freezing towers
Textile industry

Deep freezing/

Dairy products
Glass industry

Corrugated
Unit goods

cardboard
Paper
S10-0 FLT ●
S10-0 NTP ●
S10-0 FRT1 ●
S10-22 FLT ●
S10-36 FLT ●

S11-45 GRT ● ● ● ●
S11-45 GRT HD ● ● ● ●
S11-33 FRT2 ●

S11 Combo ● ●

S14-0 FLT ● ● ●
S14-0 CUT ● ●

S15-47 GRT ●
S15-47 RSA ●

S17-0 FLT ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

S18-44 GRT 2.2 ● ● ●

S18-44 GRT 2.2 G ● ● ●
S18-44 HDK 2.2 ● ● ●
S18-44 GRT 1.7 ● ● ●

I-229 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

II-1 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024
2 MATERIALS

2.1 Plastic materials (Properties)

2.2 Other materials

II-2 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

2.1 PLASTIC MATERIALS (PROPERTIES)

PA (Polyamide) PE-I (PE impact resistant)

– good wear resistance in dry applications – modified PE
– good fatigue resistance – impact resistant
– temperature range – 40 to + 120 °C (– 40 to 248 °F) – FDA/EU approved for direct food contact
– short-term temperature resistance up to 135 °C (275 °F)
– FDA/EU approved for direct food contact PE-MD (PE metal detectable)
– flame retardant according to UL94-V2 – modified PE
– material easily detected in metal detectors
PA-HT (PA high temperature resistant) – FDA/EU approved for direct food contact
– material reinforced with fiberglass
– absorbs little water in humid environments PLX (Wear and impact improved polymer)
– very stiff and durable – good wear resistance
– temperature range – 30 to + 155 °C (– 22 to 311 °F) – very good abrasive resistance
– very high short-term temperature resistance – good fatigue resistance
up to 180 °C (356 °F) – suitable for dry, wet an submerged usage
– FDA/EU approved for direct food contact (only color BL) (less hygroscopic)
– highly impact resistant
PBT (Polybutylene terephthalate) – very good chemical resistance to acids and alkalis
– good wear resistance – temperature range – 45 to + 120 °C (– 49 to 248 °F)
– very good abrasive resistance – short-term temperature resistance up to 150 °C (302 °F)
– good strength and stiffness – FDA/EU approved for direct food contact
– temperature range – 40 to + 120 °C (– 40 to 248 °F)
– not recommended for use in hot water > 50 °C (122°F) POM (Polyoxymethylene/Polyacetal)
– FDA/EU approved for direct food contact – very dimensionally stable
– very strong and stiff
PE (Polyethylene) – high chemical resistance to organic solvents
– very good chemical resistance to acids and alkalis – lower coefficient of friction
– very good release properties due to low surface tension – very durable material
– good friction and abrasion behavior – hard, incision-resistant surface
– highly impact resistant – temperature range – 45 to + 90 °C (– 49 to 194 °F)
– low specific weight – FDA/EU approved for direct food contact
– limited strength – good UV-A/UV-B/UV-C resistance*
– temperature range – 70 to + 65 °C (– 94 °F to 149 °F)
– FDA/EU approved for direct food contact POM-CR (POM cut resistant)
– good UV-A/UV-B/UV-C resistance* – modified POM
– impact resistant, highly resistant to incisions
– minimal ridge formation
– low risk of material delamination
– FDA/EU approved for direct food contact
– good UV-A/UV-B/UV-C resistance*

II-3 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

POM-HW (POM highly wear resistant) PXX-HC (PXX self-extinguishing, highly conductive)
– modified POM – flame retardant in line with DIN EN 13501-1 Cfl -s1
– highly wear resistant and DIN 4102 (B1)
– surface resistivity < 106 Ω according to ISO 21178)
POM-HC (POM highly conductive) – especially for use in automotive industries
– modified POM – temperature range + 5 to + 100 °C (41 to 212 °F)
– highly conductive material – flame retardant according to UL94-V1
– surface resistivity < 106 Ω (according to ISO 21178)
– very good friction and abrasion properties TPC1 (Thermoplastic Copolyester)
– material for sprockets and belts exposed to high impacts
POM-MD (POM metal detectable) – abrasion resistant
– modified POM – wear resistant
– material easily detected in metal detectors – extremely impact resistant
– FDA/EU approved for direct food contact – light or medium load
– low brittleness, highly ductile
PP (Polypropylene) – hardness 60 shore D
– standard material for normal conveying applications – temperature range – 25 to + 80 °C (– 13 to 176 °F)
– quite strong and stiff – FDA/EU approved for direct food contact
– highly resistant to acids, alkalis, salts, alcohols
– low specific weight
– no risk of stress cracks forming
– temperature range + 5 to + 100 °C (41 to 212 °F)
– FDA/EU approved for direct food contact
– good UV-A/UV-B/UV-C resistance*

PP-MD (PP metal detectable)

– modified PP
– material easily detected in metal detectors
– FDA/EU approved for direct food contact

PP-SW (steam and hot water resistant)

– modified PP
– improved resistance against oxidation and embrittlement
– FDA/EU approved for direct food contact

* UV resistant materials: The Prolink materials listed as UV resistant are formulated to prevent mechanical degradation of the polymer. Tests simulating
5 years UV-C exposure (300 working days/year, one shift) show no reduction of tensile strength of the Prolink materials listed as UV resistant.
The color of polymers exposed to UV radiation (sunlight, UV-C lamps etc.) will fade over time.

II-4 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

2.1 PLASTIC MATERIALS (PROPERTIES)

Belt material orientation chart

Every material has a unique combination of strengths. The following table provides an overview of all Siegling Prolink
materials and their properties rated from 1 (bad) to 10 (good).

High temperature

Low temperature
Belt pull capacity

Metal detectable
Impact strength

Flame retardant
Wear resistance

Submerged in

applications
Suitable for
Direct food

microwave
Antistatic
contact

water
Price
PE 2 8 2 3 9 9 Yes Yes No No No Yes
PE-I 2 9 2 3 9 9 Yes Yes No No No No
PP 4 3 3 7 3 9 Yes Yes No No No Yes
POM 8 4 7 6 7 7 Yes Yes No No No No
POM-CR 8 6 7 6 7 7 Yes Yes No No No No
PA 8 4 8 8 6 7 Yes No No No Yes No
PA-HT 7 6 9 9 5 6 Yes** No No No No No
PE-MD 2 7 2 3 9 6 Yes Yes Yes No No No
PP-MD 4 2 3 7 3 8 Yes Yes Yes No No No
PP-SW 3 4 3 8 3 8 Yes Yes No No No No
POM-MD 7 3 7 6 7 2 Yes Yes Yes No No No
POM-HC 7 3 7 6 7 4 No Yes No Yes No No
PXX-HC 4 3 3 7 3 4 No Yes No Yes Yes No
TPC1 2 10 10* 5 5 2 Yes Yes No No No No

* for applications in abrasive particles, ** only in BL (blue)

Use of materials
Application environment Belt modules Pins
General conveyor (> 10 °C/> 50 °F) PP PP
Aggressive chemicals (strong acid etc.) PP PP
General conveying
Impact and/or low temperature (<10 °C/<50 °F) PE (PE-I) PE
High load POM PBT
Deboning and trimming POM-CR PBT
Wet, light load (Temperature <50°C (122°F)) PP PBT
Abrasive
Wet, high load (Temperature <50°C (122°F)) POM PBT
Dry POM PBT
Boiling and steaming, up to 100 °C (212 °F) PP-SW PP-SW
Dry, high load up to 90 °C (194 °F) POM PBT
Increased temperature Wet, high load up to 90 °C (194 °F) POM POM
Dry up to 120 °C (248 °F), FDA/EU PA PBT
Dry up to 155 °C (311 °F), not FDA/EU PA-HT PA-HT

II-5 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

II-6 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024
2.1 PLASTIC MATERIALS (PROPERTIES)

Temperature ranges

– 94 – 58 – 22 14 50 86 122 158 194 230 266 302 [°F]

PE
PP
POM
PA
Dry

PA-HT
PBT
PLX

salt water
Humid
Wet (submerged)

– 70 – 50 – 30 – 10 10 30 50 70 90 110 130 150 [°C]

For the effect of temperature on belt measurement see chapter 3.

II-7 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

The following charts show the c T factor for standard materials. This shows how the belt strength is affected by temperature.

PE (PE-I, PE-MD) PP (PP-MD, PP-SW)

[°C] [°F] [°C] [°F]
120 248 120 248
100 212 100 212
80 176 80 176
60 140 60 140
40 104 40 104
20 68 20 68
0 32 0 32
– 20 –4 – 20 –4
– 40 – 40 – 40 – 40
– 60 – 76 – 60 – 76
– 70 – 94 – 70 – 94
0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0

POM (POM-CR, POM-MD, POM-HC, POM-HW) PA

PA-HT
[°C] [°F]
160 320
140 284
120 248
100 212
80 176
60 140
40 104
20 68
0 32
– 20 –4
– 40 – 40
– 60 – 76
0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0

II-8 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

2.1 PLASTIC MATERIALS (PROPERTIES)

Color codes
Siegling Prolink materials come in a variety of colors. The table shows all available colors with the approx. RAL code. Please
note that Siegling Prolink modules are not produced in every color listed. For standard material/color combinations see the
Siegling Prolink series datasheet.

Color sample Code Name Approx. RAL

AT anthracite 7021

BL blue 5015

BG beige 1015

BK black 9011

DB dark blue 5010

GN green 6035

LB light blue 5012

LG light gray 7001

OR orange 2004

RE red 3020

TQ turquoise 5018

UC uncolored –

WT white 9010

YL yellow 1026

II-9 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

Friction factors
The dynamic coefficients of friction µS between belt and wearstrip are shown below.
The figures stated have been established under ideal conditions. When operating under other conditions we recommend
assuming higher friction coefficients. (“–” = combination not recommended, empty cell = combination not tested)

Belt material
PP, PP-MD & POM incl.
PE & PE-MD PA-HT PA TPC1
PXX-HC CR, HC & MD
conditions
Operating
Wearstrip
material

regular

regular
soiled

soiled

soiled
clean

clean

clean
dry 0.16 0.16 0.24 0.22 0.39 0.59 0.16 0.22 0.32 0.18 0.19 0.29 0.14 0.14 0.14
Hardwood
wet – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
dry – – – 0.14 0.19 0.29 0.08 0.19 0.29 0.15 0.23 0.34 0.12 0.2 0.31
PE-HMW
wet – – – 0.12 0.17 0.26 0.08 0.12 0.25 – – – – – –
Lubricated dry 0.18 0.28 0.45 0.13 0.24 0.35 0.12 0.20 0.30 0.16 0.24 0.36 0.14 0.22 0.32
PA wet – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
dry 0.14 0.23 0.38 0.25 0.31 0.47 0.18 0.23 0.35 0.20 0.31 0.45 0.19 0.25 0.38 0.40 0.46 0.61
Steel
wet 0.13 0.21 0.33 0.24 0.29 0.44 0.14 0.17 0.26 – – – – – – 0.38 0.44 0.59
dry 0.30 0.31 0.47 0.13 0.22 0.35 0.13 0.17 0.32 0.18 0.24 0.38 0.15 0.19 0.35 0.43 0.49 0.65
UHMW PE
wet 0.27 0.28 0.45 0.11 0.20 0.32 0.11 0.15 0.28 – – – – – – 0.39 0.46 0.62

Dynamic coefficients of friction µacc between belt and conveyed product.

(“–” = combination not recommended, empty cell = combination not tested)

Belt material
PP, PP-MD & POM incl.
PE & PE-MD PA-HT PA TPC1
PXX-HC CR, HC & MD
conditions
Operating
Wearstrip
material

regular

regular
soiled

soiled

soiled
clean

clean

dry 0.15 0.19 0.34 0.22 0.31 0.55 0.20 0.30 0.50 0.20 0.30 0.50 0.14 0.3 0.5
Cardboard
wet – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
dry 0.10 0.15 0.25 0.16 0.24 0.41 0.13 0.20 0.35 0.13 0.20 0.33 0.13 0.2 0.33
Glass
wet 0.09 0.13 0.22 017 0.21 0.37 0.13 0.18 0.33 – – – – – –
dry 0.13 0.2 0.33 0.32 0.48 0.6 0.17 0.27 0.45 0.20 0.30 0.50 0.18 0.28 0.46 0.42 0.48 0.63
Metal
wet 0.11 0.17 0.28 0.29 0.45 0.58 0.16 0.25 0.42 – – – – – – 0.40 0.46 0.61
dry 0.10 0.13 0.25 0.15 0.21 0.37 0.15 0.25 0.41 0.13 0.20 0.33 0.13 0.2 0.31 0.45 0.51 0.67
Plastic
wet 0.08 0.11 0.22 0.14 0.19 0.34 0.14 0.21 0.36 – – – – – – 0.41 0.47 0.63

II-10 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

2.1 PLASTIC MATERIALS (PROPERTIES)

Declaration of compliance
FDA/EU
Siegling Prolink modular belts made of the following materials are proven to comply with FDA 21 CFR as well as the
(EU) 10/2011 and (EC) 1935/2004 regulations regarding the raw materials used and the migration thresholds:

WT LG BK LB BL DB UC BG OR
PE ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
PE-I ●
PP ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
POM ● ● ● ● ● ●
POM-CR ● ● ● ● ● ●
PA ● ●
PA-HT ●
PE-MD ●
PP-MD ●
PP-SW ● ● ●
POM-MD ●
PBT ● ● ●
PLX ● ●
TPC ● ● ●
TPE R7 ● ●
TPE R8 ●

MHLW
Siegling Prolink modular belts made of the following materials comply with Japanese Food Regulation (Ministry of Health
and Welfare #370).

WT LG BK LB BL DB UC BG OR
PE ● ● ●
PP ● ● ●
POM ●

Halal
All Siegling POM Prolink modular belts are certified as being compliant with Halal regulations by IFRC Asia
(member of the World Halal Council).

II-11 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

Siegling Prolink material identification test
The following tests are useful in identifying the type of
Water Odor after extin-
plastic used for a plastic modular belt. Plastic Burning
test guishing the flame
Blue flame
The easiest and safest way to identify a material is to per- PP Floats Yellow top
Sweet and like
form a “water test”. Place a module in water and check burning oil
Swells and drips
whether the module sinks or floats. Blue flame Paraffin
PE Floats Yellow top (like a blown out
Furthermore, you can perform a “burning test”. Ignite a Drippings may burn candle)
small piece of the plastic you want to identify and carefully Invisible (light blue) flame
observe the behavior of the flame. Check the flame color, POM Sinks No smoke Formaldehyde!
Drippings may burn
the smoke development and the dripping characteristics of
Yellow flame
the melting plastic. Blow out the flame and check the odor. Sweet
PBT Sinks Smoke
Characteristically*
Drips
Check the results of the tests with the table:
Blue flame
Burnt wool, horn
PA Sinks Yellow top
or hair
Melts and drips
Blue flame
PLX Sinks Yellow top Unique smell
Drippings may burn

* Odors are difficult to describe, but are recognizable – use controls

(known samples)

Always test only a single small module. Never ignite a

whole belt! When performing a burning test, always have DANGER
a bucket of water to hand. Immerse the module in water
after the test to extinguish the flame (POM burns with an FLAMMABLE
almost invisible flame).

FIRE WARNING for Siegling Prolink plastic modular belts

Siegling Prolink belts are made of various high-quality plas- Hazards from burning Siegling Prolink belts vary depending
tic materials that can burn. If ignited, products made from on material composition and environmental conditions
POM material will emit toxic fumes. During operation, stor- such as temperature and oxygen availability. Hazards may
age and installation NEVER expose Siegling Prolink belts to include dense smoke, toxic gases or fumes, a flame that is
an ignition source, such as flames, sparks, burning or very difficult to detect, and fire spreading due to movement of
hot objects, or excessive heat. Special care should be taken the burning belt and/or dripping, burning, molten plastic.
when undertaking repair work, particularly when welding
on or near a conveyor if the conveyor is equipped with a Suitable fire extinguishing media include: water spray, foam,
Siegling Prolink plastic modular belt. and dry chemical.

DANGER
FLAMMABLE

II-12 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

2.1 PLASTIC MATERIALS (PROPERTIES)

Cleaning agent compatibility Chemical resistance

To check the chemical compatibility of a given cleaning Chemical resistance information is based on details provid-
solution, contact your supplier. It is important to mention ed by our raw material producers and suppliers.
the belt material(s) that will be in contact with the cleaning We recommend that each customer check the resistances
solution. to account for the actual on-site conditions and the media
that affects the belt. The properties of our rubber topped
Please note the cleaning instructions in section 5.6. modules can be different from those in the body of the
module.
If requested, we can supply appropriate samples.

The chemical compatibility charts below uses standard

terms and generally known names.

Substance categories

Polypropylene Polyethylene Polyacetal Polyamide Polybutylene

PLX
(PP) (PE) (POM) (PA) terephthalate (PBT)
Acids weak ● ● ❍ – ❍ ●
Acids strong ● ❍ – – – –
Aldehydes ● ❍ ❍ ❍ ●
Aliphatic HCs ● ● ● ● ● ●
Alcohols ● ● ● ● ● ●
Amines ● ● ❍ ● – –
Aromatic HCs ❍ ❍ ❍ ● ❍ ●
Chlorinated HCs – ❍ ● ❍ ❍ ●
Ether – ❍ ● ● ● ●
Ester ❍ ● – ● ❍ ●
Fuels ❍ ❍ ● ● ● ❍
Greases, oils ● ● ● ● ● ●
Hydrofluoric acid ❍ ❍ – – ● –
Halogens dry ❍ – – –
Inorganic salt solutions ● ● ● ● ● ❍
Ketones ❍ ● ❍ ● – ●
Lyes weak ● ● ● ● ● ●
Lyes strong ● ● ● ❍ ● ❍
Organic acids ❍ ● ● ❍ ❍ ❍
Oxidizing acids – – – – ❍ ❍
Petroleum ● ● ● ● ● ❍
Turpentine – – ● ❍ ❍
Unsaturated chlorinated HCs – – ● ❍ ❍ ❍
Water cold ● ● ● ● ● ●
Water hot ● ● ● ❍ – ●

● = Good resistance l ❍ = Limited resistance l – = No resistance l Empty cells = No test data available

II-13 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

Individual substances/chemicals

Polypropylene (PP) Polyethylene (PE) Polyacetal (POM) Polyamide (PA)

20 °C 60 °C 20 °C 60 °C 20 °C 60 °C 20 °C 60 °C
70 °F 140 °F 70 °F 140 °F 70 °F 140 °F 70 °F 140 °F
Acetic Acid > 5 % ● ● ● ❍ ❍ – – –
Acetic Acid (5 %) ● ● ● ● ● ❍ –
Acetone ● ● ● ● ❍ ❍ ● ●
Alcohol (all types) ● ● ● ● ● ❍ ● ●
Aluminum Comp. ● ● ● ● ● ●
Ammonia ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Ammonium Comp. ● ● ● ● ● ●
Aniline ● ● ● – ❍
Aqua Regia – – ❍ – – –
Arsenic Acid ● ● ● ●
Barium Comp. ● ● ● ● ● ●
Base (10 %) ● ● ● ● ● ●
Beer ● ● ● ● ●
Benzene ❍ – ❍ – ❍ ❍ ● ●
Benzenesulfonic Acid (10 %) ● ● ● ●
Benzoic Acid ● ● ● ● ❍ ❍
Beverages (soft drinks) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Borax ● ● ● ●
Boric Acid ● ● ● ● ● ●
Butyl Acrylate – – ● ❍
Butyric Acid ● ● ❍ ● ●
Carbon Dioxide ● ● ● ● ● ●
Carbon Disulfide ❍ – ❍ – ● ●
Carbon Tetrachloride ❍ – ❍ – ● ❍ ● ●
Chloracetic Acid ● ● – –
Chlorine (Gas) – – ❍ – – – – –
Chlorine (Liquid) – – – – – – – –
Chlorine Water (0.4 % Cl) ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ – – – –
Chlorobenzene – – ❍ – ❍ ❍ ● ●
Chloroform – – – – – – ❍
Chromic Acid (50 %) ● ● ● ❍ – – ❍
Chromic Acid (3 %) ● ● ● ● ❍ ❍
Citric Acid (40 %) ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Citric Acid (10 %) ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Citrus Juices ● ● ● ● ❍
Coconut Oil ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Copper Comp. ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Corn Oil ● ● ● ❍ – –
Cottonseed Oil ● ❍ – – ●
Cresol ● ❍ ❍ – ●
Cyclohexane ● ❍ – – ●
Cyclohexanol ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Cyclohexanone ● ● ● ●

● = Good resistance l ❍ = Limited resistance l – = No resistance l Empty cells = No test data available

II-14 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

2.1 PLASTIC MATERIALS (PROPERTIES)

Polypropylene (PP) Polyethylene (PE) Polyacetal (POM) Polyamide (PA)

20 °C 60 °C 20 °C 60 °C 20 °C 60 °C 20 °C 60 °C
70 °F 140 °F 70 °F 140 °F 70 °F 140 °F 70 °F 140 °F
Detergents ● ❍ ● ●
Dextrin – – – – ❍ ❍ ● ●
Dibutyl Phthalate ● ● –
Diethyl Ether ● ● ● ●
Diethylamine ● ●
Diglycolic Acid (30 %) ● ●
Diisooctyl Phthalate ● ● ●
Dimethyl Phthalate ● ❍ ● ●
Dimethylamine ● ● ❍ ❍ ❍ – ● ●
Dioctyl Phthalate ❍ ❍
Ethyl Acetate ● ●
Ethyl Ether ● ● ● ● ● ❍ ● ❍
Ethylamine ● ● ● ● ❍ –
Ethylene Glycol (50 %) ● ● ● ❍ ● ●
FerricFerrous Comp. ● ❍ ● ● ❍ –
Formaldehyde (37 %) ● ● ❍ ❍
Formic Acid (85 %) ● ❍ ● – ❍ ❍ ● ●
Freon ● ● ● ● ● ●
Fuel (Oil) ❍ ❍ ❍ – ●
Fruit Juices ❍ – ● – ● ● ● ●
Furfural ● ● ● ● ● ●
Gasoline ● ● ● ●
Glucose – – ❍ – ● ● ● ●
Glycerol ● ❍ – – ● ● ●
Heptane ● ● ● ● – –
Hexane ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Hydrobromic Acid (50 %) ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Hydrochloric Acid (35 %) ● ● ● ● – – – –
Hydrochloric Acid (10 %) ● ● ● ● – – – –
Hydrofluoric Acid (35 %) ● ● ● ● – – – –
Hydrogen Peroxide (3 %) ● ● ● ● ● ● ❍ ❍
Hydrogen Peroxide (90 %) ❍ ❍ ● ❍ ❍ – – –
Hydrogen Sulfide ● ● ● ● ● ●
Igepal (50 %) ● ● ● ❍
lodine (Crystals) ● ● ❍ ❍ – – – –
Isooctane – – ● ● ●
Isopropyl Alcohol ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Jet Fuel ❍ – ❍ ❍ ● ● ● ●
Kerosene ❍ – ❍ ❍ ● ●
Lactic Acid ● ● ● ● ❍ –
Lanolin ● ❍ ● ●
Lauric Acid ● ● ● ●
Lead Acetate ● ● ● ● ● ●
Linseed Oil ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Lubricating Oil ● ❍ ● ● ● ❍

● = Good resistance l ❍ = Limited resistance l – = No resistance l Empty cells = No test data available

II-15 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

Polypropylene (PP) Polyethylene (PE) Polyacetal (POM) Polyamide (PA)

20 °C 60 °C 20 °C 60 °C 20 °C 60 °C 20 °C 60 °C
70 °F 140 °F 70 °F 140 °F 70 °F 140 °F 70 °F 140 °F
Magnesium Comp. ● ● ● ● ●
Malic Acid (50 %) ● ● ● ● ● ●
Manganese Sulfate ● ● ● ❍ ❍
Margarine ● ● ● ●
Mercury ● ● ● ● ●
Methyl Chloride ❍ ❍ ● ●
Methyl Ethyl Ketone ● ❍ – – ❍ ❍ ●
Methyl Isobut. Ketone ● ❍
Methylsulfuric Acid ● ● ● ●
Methylene Chloride ❍ – – – ❍ ❍
Milk ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Mineral Oil ❍ – ● ❍ ● ● ●
Mineral Spirit (White Spirit) ❍ –
Molasses ● ● ● ● ● ●
Motor Oil ● ❍ ● ● ● ●
Naphtha ● ❍ ❍ – ● ●
Nitric Acid (30 %) ● ❍ ● ● – – – –
Nitric Acid (50 %) ❍ – ● ❍ – – – –
Nitrobenzene ● ❍ – – ❍
Nitrous Acid ●
Nitrous Oxide ●
Oleic Acid ● – ● ● ● ●
Olive Oil ● ● ● ●
Oxalic Acid ● ● ● ●
Ozone ❍ ❍ ❍ – – – ❍ ❍
Palmitic Acid (70 %) ● ● ● ● ●
Paraffin ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Peanut Oil ● ● ●
Perchloric Acid (20 %) ● ● ● ●
Perchlorothylene – – – – ❍ –
Phthalic Acid (50 %) ● ● ● ●
Phenol ● ● ● ● – – – –
Phenol (5 %) ● ● ● ● – – – –
Phosphoric Acid (30 %) ● ● ● ● ❍ – – –
Phosphoric Acid (85 %) ● ● ● ● – – – –
Photographic Solutions ● ● ● ● ●
Plating Solutions ● ● ● ●
Potassium Comp. ● ● ● ● ● ● ❍
Potassium Hydroxide ● ● ● ● ● ● ❍
Potassium lodide (3 % lodine) ● ● ● ●
Potassium Permanganate ● ❍ ● ● – –

● = Good resistance l ❍ = Limited resistance l – = No resistance l Empty cells = No test data available

II-16 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

2.1 PLASTIC MATERIALS (PROPERTIES)

Polypropylene (PP) Polyethylene (PE) Polyacetal (POM) Polyamide (PA)

20 °C 60 °C 20 °C 60 °C 20 °C 60 °C 20 °C 60 °C
70 °F 140 °F 70 °F 140 °F 70 °F 140 °F 70 °F 140 °F
Silver Cyanide ● ●
Silver Nitrate ● ● ● ●
Sodium Comp. ● ● ● ●
Sodium Chloride ● ❍ ● ● – –
Sodium Hydroxide ● ● ● ● ● ● – –
Sodium Hydroxide (60 %) ● ● ● ● ● ● – –
Sodium Hypochlorite (5 % Cl) ● ❍ ● ❍ – – ❍
Stearic Acid ● ❍ ● ● ❍ ● ●
Sulfamic Acid (20 %) ● ● – –
Sulfate Liquors ● ●
Sulfur ● ● ● ● ● ●
Sulfur Chloride ●
Sulfur Dioxide ● ● ● ● – – ❍ ❍
Sulfuric Acid (10 %) ● ● ● ● ● – – –
Sulfuric Acid (50 %) ● ● ● ● – – – –
Sulfuric Acid (70 %) ● ❍ ● ❍ – – – –
Sulfurous Acid ● ● ● ❍ ❍
Tannic Acid (10 %) ● ● ● ●
Tartaric Acid ● ● ● ● ● ❍
Tetrahydrofuran ❍ – ❍ ❍ ●
Toluene – – – – ❍ – ● ●
Transformer Oil ● ❍ ● ❍ ● ●
Tributyl Phosphate ● ❍
Trichloroacetic Acid ● ● ❍ – –
Trichloroethylene – – – – ❍ ❍ ❍ –
Tricresyl Phosphate ● ❍
Trisodium Phosphate ● ● ● ●
Turpentine ❍ – ● – ● ● ●
Urea ● ● ● ● ● ●
Vinegar ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Wine ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Xylene – – – – ● ● ● ●

● = Good resistance l ❍ = Limited resistance l – = No resistance l Empty cells = No test data available

II-17 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

2.2 OTHER MATERIALS

High-grip materials
Following materials are used for our friction top modules

Approved for
Material Color Hardness Temp. range Bonding
food contact*
Code Type °C °F FDA EU 1935
R2 EPDM BK 80 Shore A – 70/100 – 94/212 No No Mechanical
R3 TPE BL, TQ 70 Shore A – 45/65 – 49/149 Yes Yes Mechanically on POM
R4 TPE BG 86 Shore A + 5/100 + 41/212 Yes Yes Chemically on PP
R5 TPE UC 52 Shore A + 5/100 + 41/212 Yes Yes Chemically on PP
R6 TPE BK, BL 63 Shore A – 45/60 – 49/194 No No Chemically on POM**
R7 TPE BK, BG, BL 50 Shore A + 5/100 + 41/212 Yes Yes Chemically on PP
R8 TPE BG 55 Shore A – 70/65 – 94/149 Yes Yes Chemically on PE

* Raw material comply with FDA 21 CFR as well as the EU 10/2011 and EC 1935/2004 regulations. Do not use in direct contact with fatty foods
** Bonding to POM base module is not as strong as to PP

Shore hardness scale for High-grip materials

soft medium soft medium hard hard

R5
R7 R8 R6 R3 R2 R4

Shore A 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90

Shore D 0 10 20 30 40 50

balloon pencil eraser elasto tire tread shopping cart wheel

bumper

Metals
Acid Approved for
Material AISI Alloy type Temp. range Magnetic
resistant food contact
Code No. °C °F FDA EU 1935
CS 1.0570 ST52-3 carbon steel – – 70/500 – 95/930 No No Yes
ZN 1.0570 ST52-3 zinc-plated carbon steel + – 70/500 – 95/930 No No Yes
SS 1.4301 304 austenitic Cr-Ni stainless steel ++ – 70/420 – 95/790 Yes Yes No*
austenitic Cr-Ni-Mo SS
SSS 1.4404 316 +++ – 70/420 – 95/790 Yes Yes No*
“Acid resistance”

* Processing/machining of these can result in a minor magnetic field.

II-18 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

III-1 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024
3 ENGINEERING
GUIDELINES

3.1 Basics
3.2 Conveyor design
3.3 Conveyor layouts

III-2 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

3.1 BASICS

Factors affecting belt life

The following figure show the qualitative effects on the lifetime of a modular belt.

high Lubrication
Ø pin
Ø sprocket
# wear strip
cleaning interval

longer lifetime

Speed
Load
# start/stop
low # front/back flexing
short lifetime long

General conveyor considerations

Clearance Length
Always leave enough space between the belt, wearstrip, The maximum conveyor length is generally limited by the
guiding, and other conveyor components to avoid excessive maximum belt strength, but it can also be limited by the
wear. Keep fabrication and temperature variation in mind effects of elastic pulsation. This effect may occur if the belt
when determining the dimensions. stretches under load and the stored spring force in the belt
is strong enough to accelerate a part of the belt. This does
(Wearstrip) Alignment not depend on belt width, but on the spring force constant
For long and worry-free operation, the alignment between of the belt and belt material. This is especially important to
the belt support and belt must be accurate. This will avoid avoid where product stability or continuous movement (for
unnecessary resistance, pinch points and excessive prema- worker belts) is key.
ture wear.
Among other things, the main factors are conveyor length,
Speed belt speed and product weight. Generally, the risk of pulsa-
We recommend soft motor starts and stops from speeds tion decreases with higher speed and shorter conveyors,
faster than 20 m/min or utilizations of more than 70 %. Keep and increases the other way around. Other ways to maxi-
in mind that temperature increases with higher speed and mize the allowable conveyor length are to reduce the fric-
ensure the wearstrips don’t overhead under load at high tion between the belt and wearstrips or choose a rigid belt
speeds. Furthermore it is recommended to make use of soft design with stiff material (e.g. POM).
motor starts if product stability is an important criterion.

III-3 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

Sprockets Expansion/Contraction with temperature
We recommend an odd number of sprockets to always have Plastics can expand or contract significantly when tempera-
a center sprocket. Only fix the center sprocket and allow the tures fluctuate. The construction or design engineer must
other sprockets to move laterally to cover the expansion of make allowances for changes in belt lengths and widths if
belt width with temperature. the operating temperature differs from the ambient tem-
For the Siegling Prolink Series 11 belt, please see our perature. This affects the belt sag on the returnway and the
Series 11 guidelines for the recommended sprocket quanti- lateral clearance on the conveyor frame. Calculation formu-
ties, locations and sprocket locking system. las are given in chapter 4.4.

Basic terms and dimension definitions

4 7
5
6

5 4 3

➊ Siegling Prolink Modular Belt

➋ Carryway with wearstrips
➌ Drive sprocket/drive shaft
➍ Bearing
➎ Returnway roller
➏ Catenary sag
➐ Idle sprocket/idle shaft

III-4 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

3.2 CONVEYOR DESIGN

Sprockets
Chordal action/Size of sprockets
What is known as chordal action is typical for all sprocket- Deviation
driven belts, chains etc. The rise and fall of a module during
the slewing motion cause changes in the linear speed of the
belt. The number of teeth on the sprocket is the decisive
factor for these periodic fluctuations in speed. See figure.

As the number of teeth increases, the percentage change in

speed decreases. In practice this means that the largest
number of teeth possible must be used if the goods are not
to tip or if for other reasons a more consistent belt speed is
required.

To determine the right number of teeth, keep in mind that

with bigger sprockets the transmissible torque and shaft tor-
sion increases. If the torsion is too great, the sprocket teeth
and belt cannot engage properly, resulting in higher wear or
damage to sprockets and belt. Furthermore it might lead to
thicker shafts and more powerful motors, meaning higher [Number of teeth]
costs.

Choose a sprocket size big enough to reduce the chordal

action effect to the required degree, and small enough to
reduce torsion and the motor power required to a reason-
able level.

For correct shaft dimensioning see the calculations in

chapter 4.3.

Snub Roller
Use a snub roller on the returnway to ensure an arc of
contact of around 180°.
(This does not apply to conveyors with a center-to-center
distance smaller than 2 m. Rollers on the returnway are not
necessary here.)

III-5 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

Number of sprockets
As a rule of thumb, sprocket spacing should not exceed required is calculated by the ratio between the adjusted and
160 mm. By dividing the belt width by 150 mm, rounding admissible belt pull. See Chapter 4 Calculations. Alternatively
the result up and adding 1 you get the minimum number the Siegling Prolink Calculation Program calculates the num-
of sprockets needed. ber of sprockets required.

Maximum distance between*

If you end up with an even number, we recommend adding F
Ratio [ ]
adj
F drive sprockets drive split sprockets/
another sprocket to achieve an odd number in order to have adm
S17
a true center sprocket. An exception can be made for nar- ≤ 20 % 160 mm (6.3 in) 135 mm (5.3 in)
row belts < 300 mm. Here only two sprockets are sufficient, ≤ 40 % 100 mm (3.9 in) 80 mm (3.2 in)
but never install a belt with only a single sprocket. ≤ 60 % 80 mm (3.1 in) 65 mm (2.5 in)
≤ 80 % 60 mm (2.4 in) 50 mm (2 in)
The number of sprockets might need to be increased > 80 % please inquire please inquire
depending on the load: The number of drive sprockets * For Series 11 maximum distance should never exceed 75 mm.

Sprocket fastening
Typically only one sprocket (as close to the center as possi- Examples of possible methods for fastening a sprocket are
ble) must be fastened axially on each idle or drive shaft. The shown below:
design of this sprocket enables positive tracking of the belt.
All other sprockets must to be allowed to move laterally on For wide belts with retainer rings can also be installed at the
the shaft to move with the belt as its dimensions will bore ends to prevent sprockets from slipping off of the bore,
change with temperature. but always leave enough space for sprockets to move on
the bore with the belt due to temperature expansion.

)
(0.1
2.5

.57)
40 (1
b

Shaft 40 x 40 mm. Fastening the sprocket with a Siegling Prolink Retainer Rings provides a quick, Fixation of the sprocket with retainer rings in
retainer ring in accordance with DIN 471 (Seeger easy and reliable solution for fixing the sprocket accordance with DIN 471 (Seeger circlip ring).
circlip ring), d = 56 mm. Detailed dimensions are (see page I-216 for details).
to be found in appendix on page VI-11.

Rollers as idle shaft

The idle shaft is usually equipped in the same fashion as the avoid installation of intermediate bearings. If you take that
drive shaft. This allows lateral tracking on both ends of the approach, pay special attention to the lateral guiding. For
conveyor. In special cases it might be necessary to replace example, edge wearstrips can be installed to guide the belt.
the idle shaft with a roller, e.g. wide belts with high loads to

III-6 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

3.2 CONVEYOR DESIGN

Belt support
Standard plastic wearstrips are available from many plastic the wearstrips. Alternatively, in some cases hardwood or
suppliers. The width should be approx. 30 – 40 mm, where- steel can be used. For the optimal choice of wearstrip mate-
by the thickness depends on the height of the screw heads. rial, see the table below.
We recommend using UHMW-PE or PE 1000 materials for

Temperature
Running conditions Wearstrip material
min max
HMW-PE (PEHD500)
Low load and low speed Not recommended for any side-flexing conveyor where – 70 °C (– 94 °F) + 65 °C (+ 149 °F)
wearstrips are exposed to radial forces

High load and low speed UHMW-PE (PEHD1000) – 70 °C (– 94 °F) + 65 °C (+ 149 °F)

Nylatron NSM or comparable cast nylon 6 formulation containing

solid lubricant additives
High load and high speed, dry – 40 °C (– 40 °F) + 120 °C (+ 248 °F)
(the use of oil impregnated wearstrips can result in unwanted
clustering of dust on belt and wearstrip)
Stainless steel (cold-rolled austenitic)
Wet, very abrasive or high temperature – 70 °C (– 94 °F) + 155 °C (+ 311 °F)
(Softer annealed austenitic grades are not recommended)*

If you are unsure please contact customer service.

Wearstrip arrangement
Continuous plate support made of steel or plastic.
We recommend this for conveyors with heavy loads.

Straight parallel wearstrips (1). This is an inexpensive solution

for applications with minimal loads. The belt wear is limited
to the areas where the wearstrips support the belt. We rec-
ommend a distance of approx. 100 – 150 mm between the
wearstrips.

The belt is supported over the entire width by a V-shaped

arrangement of the wearstrips (2). This spreads the wear and
tear evenly and means heavy loads can be applied. Choose
the angle and distance such that the Vs are overlapping and
a support across the belt width with a distance of not more
than 100 – 150 mm is maintained.
1 2
On the returnway, parallel wearstrips with a distance of
approx. 200 mm are recommended. Alternatively, snub roll-
ers can be used. Support is always provided in areas where
no profiles, rollers, Friction Top Pattern etc. are fitted.

Rollers are not generally used to support the belt on the

upper face. Unavoidable belt sag between the rollers as well
as the chordal action of the drive unit (see page III-5) mean
the goods are tipped which can cause problems.
Sometimes rollers are used for conveying bulk goods.

III-7 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

Thermal expansion and contraction must be taken into con- If the belt is supported sideways, ensure that a minimum
sideration when mounting the support. These effects can space of 0.2 % of the belt width but at least 2 mm is main-
be absorbed by slots and appropriate distancing between tained at the highest operating temperature.
the wearstrips (see calculation in “Effect of temperature” in
chapter 4.4). The admissible temperature ranges, as given by
the manufacturer, must also correspond to the expected
operating conditions.

Carryway

≥ 2 mm Belt width b0 at maximum temperature ≥ 2 mm

Returnway

With wearstrips or snub rollers

No support at roller top, profiles, FRT pattern etc.

Support of friction top (continuous pattern) only by rollers

III-8 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

3.2 CONVEYOR DESIGN a

If parallel wearstrips are used, we recommend placing them

possible layout preferred layout
between the sprockets to ensure support until the sprocket
takes over and minimize gap. x x

If wearstrips end at the sprocket edge, ensure a distance x

of X ≤ 1.5 Pitch.

Height positioning of wearstrips

Chordal action makes it impossible for the wearstrips to
always be at the optimal height relative to the sprocket. If
you level the top surface of the wearstrip to the down point
A

Amin, the belt will lift up on the upper point causing periodic
noises when falling down again on the wearstrip. If you level
the wearstrip to the upper point Amax, you will create forces
on the wearstrip edge causing excessive wear and/or bend-
ing the wearstrip down.

On the sprocket data sheets you find a calculated value for

A. The real value will differ slightly due to manufacturing
Amax
Amin

tolerances and temperature-related expansion/contraction,

therefore a slight adaption of this value might be necessary
to fit your specific needs.

III-9 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

Attributes effects Amax Amin
application Advantage Disadvantage Advantage Disadvantage
High belt speed Higher heat generation Lower heat generation Creates more noise and
especially with full width vibration
slider beds
High load Uniform belt motion at Generates heat especially Increases the wearstrips life Belt continuously lifts off of
the discharge section with full width slider beds. Decreases the potential for sliding support;
A large radii at this edge is static charges to form not recommended for applica-
required. Belt is less bent/stressed at tions where product position-
the transition between carry ing and orientation is critical;
way and sprockets not recommended for very
light goods
Sprocket wrap Is reduced which allows for Is increased which allows for
higher force distribution per lower force distribution per
engaged tooth engaged tooth
Tooth engagement Is reduced. Thereby worse Is raised. Thereby better
force distribution over teeth force distribution over teeth
flank flank
Curved conveyors Reduces belt lift-off from Creates more belt lift-off from
carryway carryway
Abrasion behaviour Higher Lower
Impact load Lower Higher
Applications with Less additional load on Higher additional load on
heavy goods sprockets and shafts at sprockets and shafts at transi-
transition to neighboring tion to neighboring conveyors
conveyors
Ground integrated Belt protrudes less Belt protrudes more
conveyor
Noise sensitive Lower noise level Higher noise level due to belt
applications lift-off and set down
Prevent tipping/ Better since there is no Worse due to the belt lift-off
movement of belt lift-off and set down and set down on the sliding
products on the sliding support support

III-10 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

3.2 CONVEYOR DESIGN

Special recommendations for side flexing belts

These belts must be supported by plastic guides at the
sides around the curved section. Some plastics that can
be used are PE 1000 or a plastic with lubricating properties
on the inner radius.

Nose bar configuration

Free rotating nose bars are prefered, because the belt
tension, wear and noise level will be increase by using a
stationary nose bar (knife edge).

Knife edge Radius minimum Distance

Pitch
Series Open Surface minimum r2 Ts L1 L2 W
[mm] [in] [mm] [in] [mm] [in] [mm] [in] [mm] [in] [mm] [in]
13 0 FLT 8 0.31 3 0.12 3 0.12 16 0.63 8 0.31 22 0.87
13 0 NPY 8 0.31 3 0.12 3 0.12 16 0.63 8 0.31 22 0.87
13 0 CTP 8 0.31 3 0.12 3 0.12 16 0.63 8 0.31 22 0.87
13 34 FLT 8 0.31 3 0.12 3 0.12 16 0.63 8 0.31 22 0.87
14 0 FLT 12.7 0.50 9.5 0.38 3 0.12 25.4 1.00 16 0.63 40 1.57
14 25 FLT 12.7 0.50 9.5 0.38 3 0.12 25.4 1.00 16 0.63 40 1.57
15 47 GRT 12.7 0.50 6.35 0.25 3 0.12 25.4 1.00 12 0.47 31 1.22
15 47 RSA 12.7 0.50 6.35 0.25 3 0.12 25.4 1.00 14 0.55 34 1.34

W
L2
Ts

r2
L1

III-11 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

Shaft
Shaft profile
In general, we recommend a square shaft. The main advan- Occasionally round shafts with feather keys are also used for
tage of this design is that positive drive and tracking are low-loaded, narrow belts. Specially designed sprockets with
possible without keys and keyways. This can save on manu- bore and keyway are available.
facturing costs. In addition, this form facilitates the lateral
movement of the sprockets in the event of temperature
variations.

Alignment of shafts
Conveyor frame and shafts must be level. Furthermore the L
shafts need to be correctly placed in respect to each other,
a
meaning a parallel alignment for straight conveyors and a
perpendicular alignment for 90° side flexing conveyors.
For straight conveyors, the shaft alignment can be checked a
with an easy procedure described as follows.
L

Measure the distance between the ends of the shafts diago- L

nally according to the figure. If the distances are equal, the
shafts are aligned. Ensure that the axis to axis distance has b
the correct value after the shafts are aligned.

b
If the distance between shafts is too long or the direct bee-
line is blocked you can measure the distance from shaft L
ends to a point A on an imaginary line drawn between the
center of both axes of the shafts.

Shaft deflection
l
The drive shaft deflects because of the belt pull force acting yw
on it. This effect increases with a greater bearing distance
and smaller shafts.

The shaft deflection is to be kept down to minimize fatigue

and to have a small and uniform transfer gap. We recom-
mend keeping the deflection below 2 mm. If the belt pull
force leads to a deflection of over 2 mm, choose a thicker
shaft or, especially with conveyors with a wide belt width,
install an intermediate bearing or split the shaft into sec-
tions.

The calculation formulas for deflection can be found in

chapter 4.3. You can also use our Engineering program.

III-12 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

3.2 CONVEYOR DESIGN

Shaft torsion
As a result of belt pull, the shaft will twist as a result of the
torque from drive end to last sprocket. Therefore the torsion
will increase with longer and thinner shafts, higher belt pull
and bigger sprockets. If the twist is too high, the belt might
come off the track or sprocket engagement will fail. We rec-
ommend not exceeding the torsion angle φ (phi) < 0.5 ‰
per meter of shaft length.

Calculation formulas for shaft torsion can be found in

chapter 4.3.

Drive configurations
Head drive
This configuration includes one motor on the conveyor
head pulling the belt. We recommend having a contact arc
of 180° to ensure proper engagement.

Lower head drive

This is a variant of the head drive where the drive shaft is
moved down which allows for a small roller or nose bar to
reduce the transfer gap to a minimum.

III-13 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

Tail drive (Pusher configuration) and alternating
tail-head drive configuration
Head-driven conveyors are considered the conventional
configuration. It is only when the conveying direction is
reversed that the conveyor become tail-driven and the drive
unit has to push the belt and its load. If the tension on the
returnway is not greater than on the upper side, the belt will
jump sprockets.
An approximate value for the tension on the returnway is
1.2 · Fu This automatically leads to a greater shaft load.

Fs = 2.2 · FU

When tensioning the belt, never exceed a belt elongation of

more than 2 %. If the belt is tensioned correctly this drive
configuration can work well, but keep in mind that due to
higher tension the belt life will be reduced.

Two-motor design
Advantages: Low tension on the returnway, making smaller
shaft loads possible and a longer belt life than a one-motor
design for bi-directional conveyors.
Disadvantage: Increased costs due to additional motor and
electronic control. For larger conveyors with relatively heavy
loads, however, this system may still be the most reasonably
priced.

Center drive
For reversing operation, the drive shaft must be located as
close to the middle as possible. To the right and the left of
the drive unit, areas with belt sag must be provided, since
these are necessary for the required belt tension the belt
length between the load bearing rollers needs to be smaller
than the distance from load bearing roller to next support approx. 4 x pitch
roller. Otherwise there are weighted rollers necessary.
The 180° arc of contact on the drive shaft means belt and
sprocket engage well which allows for ideal power transmis-
sion in both operational directions.

The location of the drive unit causes more stress on the

shafts at the ends of the conveyor as there is effective pull
on both the upper and returnway in the form of belt ten-
sion.

III-14 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

3.3 CONVEYOR LAYOUTS

Straight horizontal Straight inclining

Straight inclining swan neck Straight declining

Side flexing L Side flexing U Side flexing C Side flexing S

Spirals Double spirals

s
l tran
A B

ltrans

III-15 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

Straight running
Belt sag/control of belt length
There are various causes for changes in the belt length, e.g.
– elongation or contraction of the belt due to temperature
variation
– wear of the connecting rods as well as enlargement of the 1
connecting rod holes in the modules after a certain
“break-in time” (enlargement of holes, 0.5 mm or larger
holes in a 50 mm module results in an elongation of 1 %)
Therefore we recommend not supporting one (or several)
sections on the returnway and using the resulting belt sag
to compensate for the increase in length. It is important that
perfect engagement between belt and sprocket is ensured. 2
Please see the following examples:
a) Short conveyor (1)
b) Medium length conveyors, up to a center distance of
approx. 4000 mm (2)
c) Long conveyors:
center distance > 20000 mm and low speeds 3
center distance < 15000 mm and high speeds (3)

Recommendation: Distance of support rollers not equidis-

tant, to reduce a frequently stimulation.

Another effective method for compensating for belt elon-

gation is a load-dependent take-up system (e.g. weighted
roller). 4

This should be located as close to the drive shaft as possible

since the take-up system will ensure even tension on the
returnway and therefore perfect engagement between
sprocket and belt (4).

It is recommended that the roller be guided sideways. Keep Recommended diameters and weights for conveyor with a
in mind that a weighted roller cannot be used when Hold center distance up to 10 m (see chart):
Down Tabs or guided side modules are used.
Diameter approx. weight per
Series
[mm] meter belt width [kg/m]
The choice of weights for the take-up system depends on
1, 3, 7 150 30
many factors. 2, 4.1, 14, 15 100 15
In general, the take-up system should form the “excess” belt 6.1, 9 100 60
at “one” point of the returnway. The weight must therefore 5, 8, 10, 11, 17, 18 100 30
be selected accordingly. (If you have any questions, please 13 50 10
contact our customer service)

III-16 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

3.3 CONVEYOR LAYOUTS

Incline/Decline
We always recommend the following:
– Only operate with a head drive, i.e. use the upper shaft as
the drive shaft.
– Ensure there is always a screw-operated take-up system or
a load-dependent tension take-up on the returnway since .7)
.8 - 17
tension decreases with increasing inclination (caused by 0 (9
the belt sag). - 45
250
– If sprockets are used at upper intermediate points, the
center sprockets may not be fastened axially.
– If rollers are used at upper intermediate points, a mini-
mum radius of approx. 80 mm is required.
– When shoe or wearstrips are used, the radius should be as
large as possible in order to keep wear to a minimum. We 250 - 450
recommend a minimum radius of approx. 150 mm. The (9.8 - 17.7)

width of the shoe should not be smaller than 30 mm.

– If the belt is more than 600 mm wide, we recommend
providing additional support on the belt surface or on the
profiles on the returnway.

Rough guideline for achievable inclines:

– Flat top surface (FLT) 3 – 5°
– Friction top surface (FRT) 20 – 40°
– straight profiles < 60° 250 - 450
(9.8 - 17.7)
– bent profiles < 90°

Testing is always recommended to determine the actual

possible incline angle for a particular product/use.

Decline conveying
For this conveyor design, a tail drive unit is possible if there is
an active load-dependent tension take-up at the lower idle 10 - 35 (0.39 - 1.38)

shaft (e.g. gravity, spring or pneumatic). Otherwise the gen-

eral recommendations given above apply here.
250 - 450
(9.8 - 17.7)

III-17 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

Hold Down Tabs

r2 Drive sprocket

r4
r5 r5

For Z – conveyors (Swan neck) with a belt width above 600 – 800 mm
(24 – 32 inch) an additional guiding/Hold Down system is necessary.
When the belt change direction from vertical to incline/decline for
wider belts typically above 600 mm (24 inch) it will not be sufficient to
hold down the belt on the (indented) side of the belt. In these cases,
Hold Down Tabs on the bottom side of the belt are used to guide it r4
through the back-flexing curve. For minimum back flex radius (r4) for
the various series, please refer to our data sheets for recommendations.
r6

It is very important that the wearstrips/guide rails supporting the Hold

r6 = r4 + C + hm (belt thickness)
Down Tabs are very smooth and have sufficient radius at the entrance
(red circle beside) to avoid them snagging on the frame entering into
the guides. The outer radius of the guiding wearstrips, R6, is defined Series C-Value
by the back flex radius r4 adding the C-measure of the Hold Down Tab
S6.1 17 mm (0.67 in)
(see table) and the belt thickness hm (see data sheet). S8 10 mm (0.39 in)
– Please make sure that it will not be possible for the sprocket to S10 10 mm (0.39 in)
engage the belt at the position of the Hold Down Tabs.
– Using Hold Down Tabs results in constraints with regards to sprocket
and shaft size to ensure sufficient clearance to the shaft. For the
minimum sprocket size and the equivalent maximum bore size
when using Hold Down Tabs please consult the data sheet of the
Hold Down Tab.
C-Value
– By default, Hold Down Tabs are placed on every other row. It is not
recommended to have a Hold Down Tab directly under a row of 2 x Pitch
profiles.

III-18 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

3.3 CONVEYOR LAYOUTS

Correct position for the guiding wearstrips

Please note that the hold down tabs cannot always be installed on the center line of the belt. This is dependent on the belt
width or the number of width increments. If the number of increments is an odd number, the HDT will be on the center line.
If the number of increments is an even number, the HDT will be offset from the center line by half an increment.
(To avoid rounding errors, we recommend calculating in the unit of measurement (metric, imperial) of the respective series)

S6.1 HDT S10 HDT

HDT offset half an increment HDT in the center line
Belt width (metric) = 1000 mm (39.37 in) Belt width (imperial) = 1009.7 mm (39.75 in)
Width increment (metric) = 20 mm (0.79 in) Width increment (imperial) = 19.1 mm (0.75 in)
1000 mm/20 mm = 50 = even HDT offset 10 mm 39.75 in/0.75 in = 53 = odd = HDT in the center line
(½ an increment)
Example: Example:

1000 (39.37) 1009.7 (39.75)

510 (20.08) 10 (0.39) 504.8 (19.88)

Belt center line 6 — 12.5 3 — 6.5

11 (0.43)
12 (0.47) (0.24 — 0.49) (0.12 — 0.26)

III-19 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

Side-flexing belts
Siegling Prolink side flexing belts are designed to be able Side flexing L Side flexing U
to run in curves. The picture illustrates the possible layouts
for curve conveying. The modules of Series 5, 9, 11 and 18
create a mesh that allows the belt to collapse on the inner
radius of the curve and thereby bend into the curve direc-
tion.
The following special conditions apply for side-flexing belts.
Please ensure that they are met.

Side flexing C Side flexing S

Belt pull in outer side modules

The belt pull which is spread over the complete belt width Belt width
Series Factor Cc
in straight running sections is concentrated in the outer [mm] [in]
module in curve sections. Therefore always check that Series 5, Series 5 G, 100* – 199 3.94* – 7.86 1.8
Fadj < Fnom, curve given in the data sheets is ensured. Series 5 ST, 200 – 299 7.87 – 11.80 1.9
Series 5 BT ≥ 300 ≥ 11.81 2.0
125 – 199 4.92 – 7.86 1.6
200 – 299 7.87 – 11.80 1.7
Series 5 RG 300 – 399 11.81 – 15.74 1.8
400 – 499 15.75 – 19.68 1.9
≥ 500 ≥ 19.69 2.0
all all 1.45
Combo S5 ST/S11
≥ 1000 ≥ 39.37 1.55
Minimum inner radius
The side-flexing radius r1 has to be equal or above the mini- Series 9 all all 1.8**
mum inner radius, which depends on the series and belt Series 11 all all 1.4
width. The minimum inner radius is calculated with the Series 18 2.2,
≤ 607 ≤ 23.88 2.1
collapse factor Cc. If the radius ist significantly higher than Series 18 2.2 G,
the minimum radius, belt clattering on inside side moduls Series 18 HDK,
> 607 > 23.88 2.2
Series 18 FRT1
may occur.
≤ 797 ≤ 31.38 1.7
Series 18 1.7
> 797 > 31.38 1.8
r1min = WB · Cc
* 175 mm (6.89 in) for S5 ST
with: ** Special options available
r1min = inner radius See chapter 3.3 paragraph spiral conveyors

WB = belt width
Cc = collapse factor

III-20 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

3.3 CONVEYOR LAYOUTS

Belt tension
Three standard tensioning methods can be used to achieve the correct belt tension:
– Screw-operated take-up system
– Gravity take-up system
– Catenary sag on the returnway near the drive

Geometries of curves
We recommend designing a curved conveyor with the
Possible layout:
longer straight section on side of the motor (1).

Preferred layout:

Be aware of a minimum straight section with a distance of

one time the belt width before the curve and two times the
belt width after and in between curves. This distance in
WB

between curves can be reduced if a curve is followed by

another one in same direction (2).
rmin

Please contact customer service if space is restricted and

you cannot construct the conveyor according to these rec-
ommendations.

rmin

III-21 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

Admissible belt speed
The belt speed always refers to the speed when running Thin wearstrips with good heat transmission to a steel sup-
straight. Due to the nature of a side flexing belt this will also port structure will increase the admissible belt pull. On the
be the speed of the belt at the outer radius of the curve. The other hand a large solid machined wearstrip will have more
speed on the inside radius of the belt depends on the col- problems transmitting the heat generated from the friction
lapse factor. The smaller the collapse factor the higher the between the belt and wearstrip. This will lead to a tempera-
speed reduction on the inside radius. As a result there is a ture increase.
relationship between the collapse factor and the admissible
belt speed. Lower friction between the belt and wearstrip will lead to a
higher admissible belt speed and the material combination
The key criteria limiting the admissible belt speed is belt and (belt edge and wearstrip) will also have a strong impact on
wearstrip temperature. With increased speed and/or the admissible belt speed. Soft materials like PP with rela-
increased belt load, the temperature on the inner belt edge tively high friction coefficients will offer a relatively low
and the inner curve wearstrip will increase. This will lead to admissible belt speed before significant wear and dust
accelerated wear, potential dust and eventually the belt occurs.
edge and/or wearstrip melting.
The following chart shows the correlation between admissi-
ble belt pull and maximum belt speed for POM belts run-
ning on high quality wearstrips of medium thickness under
clean conditions:

3000
S9

2500
Admissible belt pull [N]

S5 ST
(belt material POM)

2000
S5
S18
1500

1000 S11

500
PE 1000

0 Nylatron
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90

Maximum belt speed [m/min]

Attention:
In the case of Siegling Prolink Series 11 and Combo belts (a combination of Siegling Prolink Series 5 ST and Siegling Prolink
Series 11) different dimensions and characteristics must be taken into account.

III-22 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

3.3 CONVEYOR LAYOUTS

Admissible belt speed Series 11

Series 11 has been developed with special caps on the belt side, meaning that the material combination on this critical
part of a side-flexing belt can be optimized.
For the standard Series 11 belts, the caps or HD on the belt edge are made of POM. For these we recommend using
wearstrips in UHMW PE, also known as PEHD1000.

[m/min] [ft/min]
30 100
90
25
80
70
20
60
Belt speed

15 50
40
10
30
Max speed, POM caps and UHMW PE
20
5
10
0 0
1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8 4.0
Collapse factor

Speed limits caps in POM and wearstrip in UHMW PE (PEHD1000)

For radius conveyors running at higher speeds, Series 11 offers an alternative with caps or HD on the belt edge made of a
special robust, resistant material identified by material code HW. For these we recommend using wearstrips in Nylatron
NSM, a special PA material with solid lubricant additives. This material combination will in general offer an extended service
life for conveyors with heavy loads or conveyors running in abrasive environments.

[m/min] [ft/min]
90 300

80
250
70

60 200

50
Belt speed

150
40
Max speed, HW caps and Nylatron
30 100

20
50
10
Max speed, POM caps and UHMW PE
0 0
1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8 4.0
Collapse factor

Speed limits caps HW and wearstrip in Nylatron

III-23 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

Belt support, guiding, tracking Belt lift
The belt is pressed onto the inner radius in curved sections. In some cases the belt tends to lift up at the outer edge.
Lateral wearstrips need to be installed to cover the pressure. The risk of that increases with higher belt pull, smaller inner
We recommend guiding the belt along the conveyor by radius, higher speed and higher curve angle. To avoid this,
lateral wearstrips, which means that the middle sprocket wearstrips on top of the edge are to be installed. Forbo
must not be fixed axially. All sprockets can float on the shaft. Movement Systems offers also belts with guided side
The belt is guided by the lateral wearstrips only. modules or Hold Down Tabs if required.

The key criterion for a successful side-flex conveyor are to

ensure and maintain the correct distances between the
outer parallel wearstrips in curved and straight segments.
The distance between the outer wearstrips is especially
important. The wider the belts the greater the effort
required to keep the exact distances through the whole
running track of the belt (both on the carry and the return-
way).

Preventing belt lift (Series 11)

If the center supports are positioned above the outmost prevent any peak loads from forcing the belt out of the
support, the belt may form a slight convex surface with the guides, Forbo Movement Systems recommends positioning
highest point in the middle (red line below). On heavily the center supports 1 – 3 mm (0.04 – 0.12 in) below the outer
loaded conveyors this may lead to the belt lifting out of the support surfaces.
guides. It is therefore vital to ensure that the center supports This ensures that the belt will be pushed towards the center
are level with or lower than the outermost belt supports. To support (green line below) and not be pushed up and out
of the guides.

1 - 3 (0.04 - 0.12)

Series 5 and 9 are assembled with steel pins causing a high- such that a lower positioned center wearstrip would not
er stiffness. This reduces the tendency to belt lift in the first lead to a bow downwards but rather leave space between
place and secondly makes the belt much more laterally stiff the wearstrip and belt.

III-24 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

3.3 CONVEYOR LAYOUTS

Wearstrip dimensions

Extruded wearstrips
28.5 (1.12) 17 (0.67)

(0.24)
33 (1.3)

6
5.1 (0.2) 5.1 (0.2)

20.5 (0.81)
20 (0.79)
20 (0.79)
15 (0.59)

15 (0.59)

6 (0.24)
12.5
(0.49)

3 (0.12) 3 (0.12)
6 (0.2
3.3 (0.13)
9.3 (0.36) 9.3 (0.36)

Wearstrip dimensions Series 11 with caps

Extruded wearstrips Machined wearstrips

17 (0.67) 28.5 (1.12)

(0.24)
6

5.1 (0.2) 5.1 (0.2)

(0.79 — 0.98)
20 (0.79)

20 (0.79)

11 (0.43) min.

20 — 25
13 (0.51)
15 (0.59)
15 (0.59)

12.5
(0.49)

3 (0.12) 3 (0.12)
35 — 40
9.3 (0.36) 9.3 (0.36) (1.38 — 1.57)

Wearstrip dimensions Series 11 with Hold Down caps

Extruded wearstrips Machined wearstrips

(0.12 — 0.24)

28.5 (1.12)
(0.24)

3—6

30 (1.18)
6

5.1 (0.2)
(0.79 — 0.98)
20 — 25
20 (0.79)
15 (0.59)

11 (0.43) min.
7

12.5
(0.49)

3 (0.12)
45 (1.77)
9.3 (0.36)

Dimensions in mm and inches (in). All imperial dimensions (inches) are rounded off.

III-25 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

Recommended wearstrip arrangement for Series 5/Series 9

Extruded wearstrips
2 (0.08) 2 (0.08)

Carryway

max.
20 (0.79)
WB/2 –> max. 150 (5.91)
WB
WB + 4 (0.16)

2 (0.08) 2 (0.08)

Returnway

max.
20 (0.79)
WB/2 –> max. 500 (19.68)
WB
WB + 4 (0.16)

Machined wearstrips WB -15 (0.59)

1 (0.04) 1 (0.04)

Carryway

max. 150 (5.91)

WB - 35 (1.38)
WB
WB + 3 (0.12)

WB -15 (0.59)
1 (0.04) 1 (0.04)

Returnway

WB/2 –> max. 500 (19.68)

WB - 35 (1.38)
WB
WB + 3 (0.12)

Dimensions in mm and inches (in). All imperial dimensions (inches) are rounded off.
Contact areas in orange.

III-26 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

3.3 CONVEYOR LAYOUTS

Recommended wearstrip arrangement for Series 5/Series 9 belts with guided side modules
Hold Down guides are used to prevent belt lift and allow two neighboring belts to run parallel with mini-
mum gap. Using Hold Down guides can also allow for products to extend beyond the belt width or to
transfer perpendicular to travel direction as no wearstrip extends above the belt surface.
In general, it is recommended that the radial force be absorbed by the wear strip on the inner radius.

Extruded wearstrips

3 (0.12) 3 (0.12)

Carryway
1 - 2 (0.04 - 0.08)

1 - 2 (0.04 - 0.08)
WB/2 –> max. 150 (5.91)
WB
WB + 4 (0.16)

3 (0.12) 3 (0.12)

Returnway

WB/2 –> max. 150 (5.91)

WB
WB + 4 (0.16)

Machined wearstrips
2 (0.8) 2 (0.8)
Carryway
1 - 2 (0.04 - 0.08)

1 - 2 (0.04 - 0.08)

max. 150 (5.91)

WB
WB + 3 (0.12)

2 (0.8) 2 (0.8)

Returnway

WB/2 –> max. 150 (5.91)

WB
WB + 3 (0.12)

Dimensions in mm and inches (in). All imperial dimensions (inches) are rounded off.
Contact areas in orange.

III-27 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

For a smooth run, especially for high curve radius compared to collapse
factor (Cc) of the belt, a support at the outside G-tab is possible.
– only for POM-CR edge modules
– belt strength curve ≤ 60 % of nominal belt strength
– belt speed < 30 m/min

Extruded wearstrips

3 (0.12) 8 (0.31)

Carryway
1 - 2 (0.04 - 0.08)

1 - 2 (0.04 - 0.08)
WB/2 —> max. 150 (5.91)

3 (0.12)

Returnway

WB/2 —> max. 150 (5.91)

Machined wearstrips
2 (0.8) 8 (0.31)

Carryway
1 - 2 (0.04 - 0.08)

1 - 2 (0.04 - 0.08)

max. 150 (5.91)

2 (0.8)

Returnway

WB/2 —> max. 150 (5.91)

III-28 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

3.3 CONVEYOR LAYOUTS

Recommended wearstrip arrangement for Series 5 belts with reverse guided side modules

Extruded wearstrips

WB
WB - 26 (1.02)
15 (0.59) 4 (0.16)

Carryway

WB/2 –> max. 150 (5.91)

WB - 26 (1.02)
4 (0.16)

Returnway

WB/2 –> max. 500 (19.69)

Machined wearstrips

1 - 2 (0.04 - 0.08)
WB - 26 (1.02)
1 - 2 (0.04 - 0.08)

4 (0.16)

Carryway

max. 150 (5.91)

1 - 2 (0.04 - 0.08)
1 - 2 (0.04 - 0.08)

WB - 26 (1.02)
4 (0.16)

Returnway

WB/2 –> max. 500 (19.69)

Dimensions in mm and inches (in). All imperial dimensions (inches) are rounded off.
Contact areas in orange.

III-29 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

For a smooth run, especially for high curve radius compared to collapse
factor (Cc) of the belt, a support at the outside RG-tab is possible.
– only for POM-CR edge modules
– belt strength curve ≤ 60 % of nominal belt strength
– belt speed < 30 m/min

Extruded wearstrips
WB
WB - 20 (0.79)
23.2 (0.91)
5 (0.2) 13 (0.51)
Carryway

WB/2 —> max. 150 (5.91)

WB - 20 (0.79)
5 (0.2) 5 (0.2)

Returnway

WB/2 —> max. 500 (19.69)

Machined wearstrips
WB
1 - 2 (0.04 - 0.08)
WB - 22 (0.87)
1 - 2 (0.04 - 0.08)

4 (0.16) 4 (0.16)

Carryway

max. 150 (5.91) 23.2 (0.91)

1 - 2 (0.04 - 0.08)
1 - 2 (0.04 - 0.08)

WB - 26 (1.02)
4 (0.16)

Returnway

WB/2 —> max. 500 (19.69)

Dimensions in mm and inches (in). All imperial dimensions (inches) are rounded off.
Contact areas in orange.

III-30 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

3.3 CONVEYOR LAYOUTS

Recommended wearstrip arrangement for multiple parallel Series 5 belts with reverse guided side modules

Extruded wearstrips

WB
WB - 25 (0.98)
5 (0.2) 5 (0.2)

Carryway

WB/2 –> max. 100 (3.94)

WB - 25 (0.98)
5 (0.2) 5 (0.2)

Returnway

WB/2 –> max. 500 (19.69)

Machined wearstrips
WB
WB - 26 (1.02)
4 (0.16) 4 (0.16)

Carryway

1 - 2 (0.04 - 0.08) max. 150 (5.91) 1 - 2 (0.04 - 0.08)

WB - 26 (1.02)
4 (0.16) 4 (0.16)

Returnway
1 - 2 (0.04 - 0.08)
1 - 2 (0.04 - 0.08)

WB/2 –> max. 500 (19.69)

Dimensions in mm and inches (in). All imperial dimensions (inches) are rounded off.
Contact areas in orange.

III-31 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

Special conditions for Series 5 variant S5-45 GRT BT
The following illustrations show the recommended critical dimensions

2 (0.08)

Carryway

max.
20 (0.79) WB/2 –> max. 150 (5.91) 31.75
(1.25)
WB
WB + 4 (0.16)

2 (0.08)

Returnway

max.
20 (0.79) WB/2 –> max. 500 (19.68) 31.75
(1.25)
WB
WB + 4 (0.16)

Dimensions in mm and inches (in). All imperial dimensions (inches) are rounded off.
Contact areas in orange.

III-32 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

3.3 CONVEYOR LAYOUTS

Recommended wearstrip arrangement for Series 11 with caps

Extruded wearstrips
2 (0.08) 2 (0.08)

Carryway

1 - 3 (0.04 - 0.12)
max.
20 (0.79)
WB/2 —> max. 100 (3.94)
WB
WB + 4 (0.16)
2 (0.08) 2 (0.08)
2 (0.08) 2 (0.08)

Returnway
Option 1
1 - 3 (0.04 - 0.12)
max. 1 - 3 (0.04 - 0.12)
20max.
(0.79)
20 (0.79) WB/2 —> max. 300 (11.81)
WB/2 —> max. 300 (11.81) WB + 4 (0.16)
WB + 4 (0.16)

1 - 3 (0.04 - 0.12)
1 - 3 (0.04 - 0.12)
Returnway
Option 2

1 - 3 (0.04 - 0.12)
max. 1 - 3 (0.04 - 0.12)
20max.
(0.79)
20 (0.79) WB/2 —> max. 300 (11.81)
WB/2 —> max. 300 (11.81) WB + 4 (0.16)
WB + 4 (0.16)

Machined wearstrips
WB -15 (0.59)
1 (0.04) 1 (0.04)

Carryway

max. 100 (3.94) 1 - 3 (0.04 - 0.12)

WB - 35 (1.38)
WB
WB + 3 (0.12)

WB -15 (0.59)
1 (0.04) 1 (0.04)

Returnway

WB/2 —> max. 300 (11.81) 1 - 3 (0.04 - 0.12)

WB - 35 (1.38)
WB + 3 (0.12)

III-33 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

Recommended wearstrip arrangement for Series 11 with Hold Down caps

Extruded wearstrips
WB + 22
WB + 4
WB

1 (0.04) 1 (0.04)

Carryway

1 - 3 (0.04 - 0.12)
max.
20 (0.79)
WB/2 —> max. 100 (3.94)

1 - 3 (0.04 - 0.12)

Returnway

1 - 3 (0.04 - 0.12)
max.
20 (0.79)
WB/2 —> max. 300 (11.81)

Machined wearstrips
min. WB + 26 (1.02)
WB + 3 (0.12)
WB

2 (0.08) 2 (0.08)

Carryway

max. 100 (3.94) 1 - 3 (0.04 - 0.12)

WB - 25

WB - 25 (0.98)

2 (0.08) 1 - 3 (0.04 - 0.12) 2 (0.08)

Returnway

1 - 3 (0.04 - 0.12)
max. 20 (0.79)
WB/2 —> max. 300 (11.81)
WB + 3 (0.12)
min. WB + 26 (1.02)

Dimensions in mm and inches (in). All imperial dimensions (inches) are rounded off.
Contact areas in orange.

III-34 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

3.3 CONVEYOR LAYOUTS

Recommended wearstrip arrangement for Series 18 variant S18-44 GRT

Extruded wearstrips
min.
2 (0.08) 2 (0.08) 8 (0.15)

Carryway

max.
30 (1.18) max. 229 (9)
WB
WB + 4 (0.16)

min.
2 (0.08) 2 (0.08) 8 (0.15)
Returnway

max.
30 (1.18) max. 305 (12)
WB
WB + 4 (0.16)

Machined wearstrips
min.
1 (0.04) 1 (0.04) 8 (0.15)
Carryway

max. 229 (9)

WB - 35 (1.38)
WB
WB + 3 (0.12)

min.
1 (0.04) 1 (0.04) 8 (0.15)

Returnway

max. 305 (12)

WB - 35 (1.38)
WB
WB + 3 (0.12)

Dimensions in mm and inches (in). All imperial dimensions (inches) are rounded off.
Contact areas in orange.

III-35 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

Recommended wearstrip arrangement for Series 18 variant S18-44 GRT G

Extruded wearstrips

27.3 2 2
Carryway (1.07) (0.8) (0.8)

1-3 max. 229 (9)

(0.04 - 0.12) 1-3
WB (0.04 - 0.12)

2 2
(0.8) (0.8)
Returnway

max. 30 max. 305 (12)

(1.18) WB
WB + 4 (0.16)

Machined wearstrips

27.3 min. 2 min. 2

(1.07) (0.8) (0.8)
Carryway

1-2 max. 229 (9) 1-2

(0.04 - 0.8) WB (0.04 - 0.8)

2 (0.08) 2 (0.08)

Returnway

max. 30 max. 305 (12)

(1.18) WB

Dimensions in mm and inches (in). All imperial dimensions (inches) are rounded off.
Contact areas in orange.

III-36 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

3.3 CONVEYOR LAYOUTS

For a smooth run, especially for high curve radius compared to collapse factor (Cc) of the belt, a support at the outside
G-tab is possible.
– only recommended for POM and PA belts
– nominal belt pull, curve ≤ 1000 N

Extruded wearstrips

27.3 2 27.3
(1.07) (0.8) (1.07)
Carryway

1-3 max. 229 (9)

(0.04 - 0.12) 1-3
(0.04 - 0.12)

2 2
(0.8) (0.8)

Returnway

max. 30 max. 305 (12)

(1.18) WB + 4 (0.16)

Machined wearstrips

27.3 min. 2 27.3

(1.07) (0.8) (1.07)
Carryway

1-2 max. 229 (9) 1-2

(0.04 - 0.8) WB (0.04 - 0.8)

2 (0.08) 2 (0.08)

Returnway

max. 30 max. 305 (12)

(1.18)

Dimensions in mm and inches (in). All imperial dimensions (inches) are rounded off.
Contact areas in orange.

III-37 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

Recommended wearstrip arrangement for Series 18 variant S18-44 HDK

Extruded wearstrips

2 10.1 (0.4) 2 (0.8) min.

(0.8) 8 (0.15)
Carryway

max. 30 max. 229 (9)

(1.18) WB
WB + 4 (0.16)

2 2 (0.8) min.
(0.8) 22.8 (0.9) 8 (0.15)
Returnway

22.2
(0.87)
max. 30 max. 305 (12)
(1.18) WB
WB + 4 (0.16)

Machined wearstrips
1 (0.04) 10.1 (0.4) 1 (0.04) min.
8 (0.15)
Carryway

max. 229 (9)

WB - 35 (1.38)
WB
WB + 3 (0.12)

1 (0.04) min.
1 (0.04) 22.8 (0.9) 8 (0.15)
Returnway

22.2
(0.87)
max. 305 (12)
max. 30
(1.18) WB
WB + 4 (0.16)

Dimensions in mm and inches (in). All imperial dimensions (inches) are rounded off.
Contact areas in orange.

III-38 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

3.3 CONVEYOR LAYOUTS

Guideline for curve direction

Curve application and belt edge color codes Series 11
To optimize performance and ensure a consistent belt pull When fitting the belt it is important to remember this code
capacity, the Series 11 utilizes a headed hinge pin, ensuring – blue always on the outside (of the last curve).
the pins are always in contact with the outermost hinge. For high speed applications the caps and Hold Down caps
are made in a special robust resistant material (HW material).
To benefit from this feature it is important that the pin head These can be identified by a darker shade, so that the out-
is located on the outer radius in the last curve. This is made side in HW will be dark blue and the inside will be light gray.
easy by the unique color coding on the Series 11. The positi-
on of the pin head is marked by blue side caps/Hold Down
caps (the opposite side is marked in white).

Inside (White) Outside (Blue)

Belt with POM caps, blue outside, white inside

Belt with HW caps, dark blue on the outside, light grey on the inside

III-39 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

Curve applications Series 18
Our recommendation is to place the head of the plastic pin
“outside” of the last curve in travel direction (blue line in
illustration)

Side flexing L Side flexing U Side flexing C Side flexing S

III-40 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

3.3 CONVEYOR LAYOUTS

Belt nomenclature and ordering guidelines Series 11

When ordering it’s important to consider the conveyor
layout as the belt is built to fit. The pattern will depend on
the direction of the last curve:
– If the last curve turns right, a clockwise belt needs to be
ordered for the curve.
– If the last curve turns left, a counter-clockwise belt needs CW = Clockwise or right hand curve
to be ordered for the curve.
A CW or a CCW code in the belt description indicates
whether the belt is to be used for a left hand or right hand
curve.

CCW = Counter clockwise or left hand curve

Series 11 with caps

Sketch

Belt designations S11-45 GRT CW POM-CR BL (POM BL/WT)

S11-45 GRT CCW POM-CR BL (POM WT/BL)

CW = Clockwise (= Pin head is located on left-hand side/outer radius on the last curve)
Description
CCW = Counter clockwise (= Pin head is located on right-hand side/outer radius on the last curve)
POM-CR = All side modules (blue) in POM-CR, center modules (white) in POM with flat cover caps on both sides
(POM BL/WT) = Caps in POM BL on the left hand side and POM WT on the right hand side

S11 CAP POM BL (or WT for CCW) S5/S11-45 GRT CM POM BL W100 S11 CAP POM WT (or BL for CCW)
Components
S11-45 GRT SML POM-CR BL W172 S4.1/S8/S11 PIN PBT BL D5 S11-45 GRT SMR POM-CR BL W122
S11-45 GRT SML POM-CR BL W122 S11-45 GRT SMR POM-CR BL W172

Minimum belt width: 175 mm (6.89 in)

Belt width Width increment: 25 mm (0.98 in)

III-41 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

Series 11 with Hold Down caps in HW

Sketch

Belt designations S11-45 GRT CW HD POM-CR BL (HW DB/LG)

S11-45 GRT CCW HD POM-CR BL (HW LG/DB)

CW = Clockwise (= Pin head is located on left-hand side/outer radius on the last curve)
Description CCW = Counter clockwise (= Pin head is located on right-hand side/outer radius on the last curve)
HD = Hold Down cap on both sides
POM-CR = All side modules (blue) in POM-CR, center modules (white) in POM
(HW DB/LG) = Hold Down caps in HW DB on the left hand side and HW LG on the right hand side

Components S11 CAP HDL HW DB (LG for CCW) S5/S11-45 GRT CM POM BL W100 S11 CAP HDR HW LG (DB for CCW)
S11-45 GRT SML POM-CR BL W172 S4.1/S8/S11 PIN PBT BL D5 S11-45 GRT SMR POM-CR BL W122
S11-45 GRT SML POM-CR BL W122 S11-45 GRT SMR POM-CR BL W172

Belt width Minimum belt width: 175 mm (6.89 in)

Width increment: 25 mm (0.98 in)
Belt width excludes the extending caps of each 10 mm (0.39 in),
overall belt width is width (Wxxx) + 20 mm (0.79 in).

III-42 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

3.3 CONVEYOR LAYOUTS

Belt nomenclature and ordering guidelines for combo belts

S11 and S5 ST can be combined. Combos will always have pins in stainless steel (SS). A combo can ensure the strength
of the S5 ST combined with the narrow radius of S11.

Conveyor layout options for combo belts

Combo belts combining the tight radius feature of S11 with the high strength of S5 ST will normally only be used for
uni-directional layouts (L, U and C) as the curve factor will depend on the direction of the turn.

L layout U layout C layout

S5 ST/S11 combo (clockwise)

Sketch

Belt designation S5 ST/S11-45 GRT CW POM-CR BL (POM WT)

CW = Clockwise (= SS pin with groove locked in the S5 ST module with clips on left-hand side)
Description
With flat cover caps on right hand side (inside radius on last curve) (in POM WT)
POM-CR = All side modules (blue) in POM-CR, center modules (blue) in POM
First listed name will be the left-hand side belt type (seen from above in travel direction)

Components S5 CLP ST POM WT S5/S11-45 GRT CM POM BL W100 S11 CAP POM WT
S5-45 GRT SML ST POM-CR DB W100 S5/S11-45 GRT CM POM BL W25 S11-45 GRT SMR POM-CR BL W122
S5-45 GRT SML ST POM-CR DB W75 S5/S11 PIN ST SS D5 S11-45 GRT SMR POM-CR BL W172

Belt width Minimum belt width: 175 mm (6.89 in)

Width increment: 25 mm (0.98 in)

III-43 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

For combo belts the text description shows how the belt is combined:
– S5 ST/S11 = S5 ST on the left hand side and S11 on the right hand side = a clockwise belt
– S11/S5 ST = S11 on the left hand side and S5 ST on the right hand = a counter-clockwise belt

S11/S5 ST combo (counter-clockwise)

Sketch

Belt designations S11/S5 ST-45 GRT CCW POM-CR BL (POM WT)

CCW = Counter clockwise (= SS pin with groove locked in the S5 ST module with clips on right-hand side)
Description
With flat cover caps on left hand side (inside radius on last curve) (in POM WT)
POM-CR = All side modules (blue) in POM-CR, center modules (blue) in POM
First listed name will be the left-hand side belt type (seen from above in travel direction)

Components S11 CAP POM WT S5/S11-45 GRT CM POM BL W100 S5 CLP ST POM WT
S11-45 GRT SML POM-CR BL W122 S5/S11-45 GRT CM POM BL W25 S5-45 GRT SMR ST POM-CR DB W100
S11-45 GRT SML POM-CR BL W172 S5/S11 PIN ST SS D5 S5-45 GRT SMR ST POM-CR DB W75

Belt width Minimum belt width: 175 mm (6.89 in)

Width increment: 25 mm (0.98 in)

III-44 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

3.3 CONVEYOR LAYOUTS

Spiral conveyors
Spiral conveyors are a special variant of side-flexing belts as Our side-flexing belt Series 5 and Series 9, S5 ST/S11 Combo
they consist of basically one curve. Spirals are always and Series 18 can be used in spirals.
ascending or descending along a rotating drum. One com-
plete revolution around the drum is called a “tier”. Spirals If you are planning a spiral conveyor please contact
can have up to 20 and more tiers. Please note that the col- customer service and send us the completed spiral
lapse factors and minimum inner radius apply for spiral checklist (see chapter 6.5 Questionnaires).
applications.

Example of declined conveying to join two production

units with different heights (1).
This type of design (without driven inner cage) should
not have more than 2 – 3 tiers. For inclined conveying, the
drive unit must be located at the end of the curve at the
top. Make sure that the arc of contact on the drive shaft is
approx. 180°.

Some possible layout options (2).

III-45 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

The main drive system is the driven inner cage, which con-
sists of vertical bars (3). The curved belt is supported on the
inner radius by the cage and is moved by traction between
the belt and the cage. The direction of rotation of the cage
determines whether the conveying is inclined or declined.
The drive and tensioning unit depicted in the sketch pro-
vides the necessary belt tension. The speed of the motor
must be coordinated with the speed of the cage drive.

It should be possible to move the tensioning unit a distance

corresponding to approx. 1 % of the belt length. The belt
can be supported by wearstrips as described in chapter 3.2.

F2 – F8 side modules (Series 9)

In spiral applications, drum radius and minimum radius of
the belt should be aligned. the drum radius however may
never be smaller than the belt radius – but should not be
significantly larger than the minimum radius of the belt.
A drum radius that is too high leaves space for the inside
side modules to move, causing an unstable belt run and
possibly product movement.

If you want to exceed the minimum radius we provide

Module p inside CC
special F-side modules which reduce the space on the
inside curve at higher radii. F2 34.05 2.12
F3 35.30 2.40
p inside = r drum ·p with: F4 36.30 2.65
r drum + WB p F5 37.85 3.10
= pitch
F6 39.35 3.68
p inside = inside pitch
c c = r drum
F7 41.05 4.58
r drum = radius of spiral drum
WB F8 42.35 5.50
WB = belt width
CC = collapse factor

Bearing tab (Series 5)

For smaller spirals with not more than 4 tiers, instead of a
rotating drum special bearing tab modules can be used.
The mounted roller bearings on the side modules run on a
rigid drum. Friction forces are thereby reduced significantly.

III-46 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

IV-1 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024
4 CALCULATIONS

4.1 Four step method

4.2 Calculation example
4.3 Shaft calculations
4.4 Temperature influence on belt dimensions

IV-2 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

4.1 FOUR STEP METHOD

The following four steps will guide you through your belt design process. The symbols used are as follows:

Designation Symbols Metric Imperial

Effective belt pull FU N lb

Adjusted belt pull Fadj N lb

Forces

N lb
Adjusted belt pull per mm/in belt width F’adj
mm ft
N lb
Admissible belt pull per mm/in belt width F’adm
mm ft
Nominal belt pull capacity N lb
F’nom
per mm/in belt width mm ft

Coefficient of friction belt to

µ acc – –
accumulated products
Factors & coefficients

Coefficient of friction belt to slider µs – –

Operational factor C Op – –

Temperature factor CT – –

Conversion factor g 9.81 1

Conveyor length/Center to center distance l c-c m ft

Elevation of conveyor he mm in
Conveyor dimensions

Angle of incline/decline αi

Mass of conveyed product mp kg slug

Mass of entire belt in conveyor mB kg slug

Belt width WB mm in

A complete list of all the symbols used in this Engineering Manual can be found in the appendix in chapter 6.2.

IV-3 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

A Calculate effective belt pull FU
Straight running

l1
Fu = µs · g · (mp + mB) [N, lb]

Inclining

Fu = µs · g · (mp + mB) ± g · mp · sin α [N, lb]

l1 +
—
(+ = inclined)
(– = declined)
h1

Straight running with accumulation

Fu = µs · g · (mp + mB) + µ acc · g · mp [N, lb]

Note: For side-flexing belts the belt tension within the curve is concentrated in the outer module only. Furthermore it has
to be taken into account that the additional radial forces directed to the inside of the curve lead to higher friction loss.

FU radius = Fu

For µs and µ acc see table friction factors 2.1.

IV-4 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

4.1 FOUR STEP METHOD

B Calculate adjusted belt pull Fadj

The measurable belt pull is higher if the optimal operating conditions cannot be obtained.
To take the operating conditions into account, the effective belt pull Fu is adjusted by the operational factor C Op

Fadj = FU · C Op [N, lb]

with:

Operational factor C Op

COp
Smooth operating conditions (smooth start) +0
Start-stop operation (start when loaded) + 0.2
Belt speed greater than 30 m/min (100 ft/min) + 0.2
Nose bar at one end + 0.4
Nose bar both ends + 0.8
Swan-neck inclined conveyor + 0.4

Choose from drive configuration:

Standard +0
Belt center drive (bi-directional) + 0.2
Lower head drive + 0.1
Tail drive (push configuration) + 0.4

1 + ∑ C1

Then calculate the adjusted belt pull per millimeter of belt width:

Fadj
F’adj = [N/mm, lb/ft]
WB

IV-5 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

C Calculate admissible belt pull Fadm
Temperature can reduce the maximum belt pull capacity. To take this effect into account the admissible belt pull
F’adm is calculated with temperature factor

F’adm = F’nom · C T [N/mm, lb/ft]

with:

Temperature factor CT
The tensile strength of the different materials increases at temperatures below 20 °C but at the same time other mechanical
properties are reduced at low temperatures. Therefore the C T factor is set to 1.0 at temperatures below 20 °C.
The temperatures relate to the actual belt temperature. Depending on the application and conveyor layout the tempera-
ture of the conveyed product may be different.

Celsius [°C] Fahrenheit [°F] Belt material

from from PE PP POM PA PA HT TPC1
– 60 – 76 1.0 – – – – –
– 40 – 40 1.0 – 1.0 – – –
– 20 –4 1.0 – 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
0 32 1.0 1.0* 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
+ 20 68 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
+ 40 104 0.90 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 0.87
+ 60 140 0.62 0.85 0.96 0.95 1.0 0.75
+ 80 176 – 0.65 0.75 0.72 1.0 0.67
+ 100 212 – 0.45 – 0.50 1.0 –
+ 120 248 – – – 0.40 0.9 –
+ 140 284 – – – – 0.8 –
+ 155 311 – – – – 0.7 –

* below + 10 °C avoid impact on belt and ensure smooth start; below + 5 °C PP is not recommended

D
Validation of belt selection
Criteria for determining belt selection:

F’adj < F’adm

If this criteria is not fulfilled, change the material or belt series with a higher F’nom value and repeat from Step A.

To calculate the utilization of belt strength use

F’adj
= utilization [%]
F’adm

IV-6 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

4.2 CALCULATION EXAMPLE

The example on the following pages shall illustrate the four step method.

The example on the left uses metric units. The example on the right uses imperial units

An easier and faster way of doing these calculations is to use our Siegling Prolink Calculation Program which you can
download at www.forbo.com/movement > E-Tools.

IV-7 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

Conveyor length l c-c = 4m 13.12 ft
Straight, no incline
Belt width WB = 1000 mm 3.28 ft
Product load per meter belt length mp = 700 kg/m 470 lb/ft
Start-stop operation, normal conditions
Belt support material: hardwood
Belt speed v = 10 m/min 32.81 ft/min

Calculate total product load:

mp = 700 kg/m · 4 m = 2800 kg mp = 470 lb/ft · 13.12 ft = 6172 lb

Choose series: S8-FLT POM

Belt weight according to data sheet: m’B = 11 kg/m2 Belt weight according to data sheet: m’B = 2.3 lb/ft2

Calculate total belt weight:

mB = 11 kg/m2 · 8 m · 1 m = 88 kg mB = 2.3 lb/ft2 · 26.24 ft · 3.28 ft = 194 lb

Step A
Material pair hardwood. Material pair hardwood.
POM under dry, regular conditions: µs = 0.22 POM under dry, regular conditions: µs = 0.22
S8 FLT POM: F’nom = 40 N/mm S8 FLT POM: F’nom = 2740 lb/ft

Calculate effective belt pull:

FU = 0.22 · 9.81 · (2800 kg + 88 kg) = 6232.88 N FU = 0.22 · 1 · (6172 lb + 194 lb) = 1400.52 lb

Step B
Start-stop and normal operating conditions: C Op = 1.2 Start-stop and normal operating conditions: C Op = 1.2

Calculate adjusted belt pull:

Fadj = 1.2 · 6232.88 N = 7479.46 N Fadj = 1.2 · 1400.52 lb = 1680.62 lb

7479.46 N = 7.48 N/mm

F’adj = F’adj = 1680.62 lb = 512.38 lb/ft
1000 mm 3.28 ft

IV-8 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

4.2 CALCULATION EXAMPLE

Step C
Operating temperature 65 °C: C T = 0.96 Operating temperature 65 °C: C T = 0.96

Calculate admissible belt pull:

F’adm = 40 N/mm · 0.96 = 38.4 N/mm F’adm = 2740 lb/ft · 0.96 = 2630.4 lb/ft

Step D
Validate belt selection:
F’adj = 7.48 N/mm < 38.4 N/mm = F’adm F’adj = 512.38 lb/ft < 2630.4 lb/ft = F’adm

Utilization:
7.48 : 38.4 = 19.5 % 512.38 : 2630.4 = 19.5 %

The belt selection is fine. If you calculate a utilization of > 80 % you need to increase admissible belt pull
by changing the material or series selection. Then restart the four step method.

IV-9 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

4.3 SHAFT CALCULATIONS

Shaft load Fs
——————
√ adj2 + (ms · g)2
Fs = F with:
Fs = shaft load [N, lb]
Fadj = adjusted belt pull [N, lb]
ms = mass of shaft [kg, lb]
g = force conversion factor [9.81 m/s2, 1]

Example:
Fadj = 7479.46 N Fadj = 1680.62 lb
1 m x 60 mm square steel shaft: ms = 28.26 kg 1 m x 60 mm square steel shaft: ms = 18.99 lb

————————————— ——————————
Fs = √(7479.46 N)2 + (28.26 kg · 9.81 m/s2)2 = 7484.6 N Fs = √(1680.62 lb)2 + (18.99 lb · 1)2 = 1680.73 lb

Shaft torque

M = Fadj · D0 with:
2000 M = torque [Nm, ftlb]
Fadj = adjusted belt pull [N, lb]
D0 = pitch diameter of sprocket [mm, in]

Example:
Fadj = 7479.46 N Fadj = 1680.62 lb
Sprocket S8 Z15: D0 = 124 mm Sprocket S8 Z15: D0 = 0.41 ft

M = 7479.46 N · 124 mm = 463.73 Nm M = 1680.62 lb · 0.41 ft = 341.73 lbft

2000 2000

IV-10 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

4.3 SHAFT CALCULATIONS

Shaft deflection

The deflection can be calculated using the following formulas: Material E in E in

N
3 [ ]
MPa = [106 psi]
ys = 5 · Fs · lb [mm, in] mm2
384 · E · Steel 200000 29.01
Stainless steel 180000 26.11
with: Aluminum 70000 10.15

ys = shaft deflection [mm, in]

Fs = shaft load [N, lb] Shaft type
lb = bearing center distance [mm, in] π · ds4
Round
64
E = modulus of elasticity [MPa, psi] dout4 – din4
Hollow round π ·
= area moment of inertia [mm4, in4] 64
WS 4
Ws = edge length of square shaft [mm, in] Square
12

ds, din, dout = diameter of shaft [mm, in] WS4 – (WS – 2 · ts)4
Hollow square
12
ts = wall thickness of shaft [mm, in]

Example:
Fs = 7484.6 N Fs = 1680.73 lb
lb = 1200 mm lb = 47.24 in
E = for Steel: 200000 MPa E = for Steel: 29.01 · 106 psi

Calculate area moment of inertia for square shaft Calculate area moment of inertia for square shaft
with edge length Ws = 60 mm: with edge length Ws = 2.36 in:
4 4
= (60 mm) = 1080000 mm4 = (2.36 in) = 2.59 in4
12 12

Calculate ys: Calculate ys:

ys = 5 · 7484.6 N · (1200 mm)³ = 0.78 mm ys = 5 · 1680.73 lb · (47.24 in)³ 4 = 0.031 in

384 · 200000 N/mm2 · 1080000 mm4 384 · 29007547 psi · 2.59 in

IV-11 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

Shaft torsion

φ = 90 · Fadj · D0 · ls
π · G · IT

with:
φ = torsion angle in drive shaft [°]
Fadj = adjusted belt pull [N, lb]
D0 = pitch diameter [mm, in]
ls = shaft length [mm, in]
G = modulus in shear strength [MPa, psi]
lT = torsional inertial force [mm4, in4] Material G in G in
N
[ ]
MPa =
mm2
[106 psi]

For proper engagement we recommend not exceeding φ by 0.5 ‰ Carbon steel 80000 11.6
of shaft length ls in mm. Stainless steel 75000 10.88
Aluminum 27000 3.92

Shaft type IT [mm4]

ds4
Round π ·
32
dout4 – din4
Hollow round π ·
32

Square 1/12 · WS4

WS4 – (WS – 2ts)4

Hollow square
12

Example:
Fadj = 7479.46 N Fadj = 1680.62 lb
Sprocket S8 Z15: D0 = 124 mm Sprocket S8 Z15: D0 = 4.88 in
ls = 1300 mm ls = 51.18 in
G for carbon steel: 8000 MPa G for carbon steel: 11.6 · 106 psi

Calculate torsional inertia force lT for square shaft Calculate torsional inertia force lT for square shaft
with edge length Ws = 60 mm with edge length Ws = 2.36 in:

IT = 0.141 · (60 mm)4 = 1827360 mm4 IT = 0.141 · (2.36 in)4 = 4.37 in4

φ = 90 · 7479.46 N · 124 mm · 1300 mm φ = 90 · 1680.62 lb 6· 4.88 in · 51.18 in = 0.236°

= 0.236°
π · 80000 MPa · 1827360 mm4 π · 11.6 · 10 psi · 4.37 in4

0.5 ‰ of 1300 mm = 0.65 > 0.236 = φ 0.5 ‰ of 1300 mm = 0.65 > 0.236 = φ

IV-12 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

4.3 SHAFT CALCULATIONS

Power requirement at the drive drum

PS = Fadj · v with:
60000 PS = power at drive end of shaft [kW, hp]
Fadj = adjusted belt pull [N, lb]
v = speed [m/min, ft/min]

Example:

Ps = 7479.46 N · 10 m/min = 1.25 kW Ps = 1680.62 lb · 32.81 ft/min = 341.73 hp

60000 33000

Please note that the calculated power is the net power necessary at the drive drum and does not take efficiency losses of
e.g. the motor or gearbox into account. Furthermore it is recommend to install a motor with a reasonable reserve capacity.

Shaft revolutions

RS = v · 1000 RS = v · 12
D0 · π D0 · π

with:
RS = shaft revolutions [1/min]
v = belt speed [m/min, ft/min]
D0 = pitch diameter [mm, in]

Example:
v = 10 m/min v = 32.81 ft/min
Sprocket S8 Z15: D0 = 124 mm Sprocket S8 Z15: D0 = 4.88 in

Rs = 10 m/min · 1000 = 25.67 1

Rs = 32.81 ft/min · 12 = 25.68 1
124 mm · π min 4.88 mm · π min

IV-13 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

4.4 TEMPERATURE INFLUENCE
ON BELT DIMENSIONS

Plastics can expand or contract significantly when temperatures

fluctuate. To calculate dimension changes in width and length,
the following formulas are used

Material α* α*
Δ lB = lB · (T2 – T1) · α [mm, in]
mm 10 -6 · in
Δ W = WB · (T2 – T1) · α [mm, in] m · °C in · °F
PA 0.12 66.6
Δl = change in length [mm, in]
PE 0.21 116.6
Δ WB = change in width [mm, in] POM 0.12 66.6
+ = elongation PP 0.15 83.3
– = contraction Metals
lB = belt length at initial temperature [m, in] CS 0.012 6.6
SS 0.017 9.4
WB = belt width at initial temperature [m, in]
SSS 0.016 8.9
T2 = operating temperature [°C, °F] * Average values for the admissible temperature range
T1 = initial temperature (normally 21 °C/70 °F) [°C, °F]
Complete list for expansion coefficient of all materials
α = coefficient of thermal expansion can be foud on page VI-15.
(see table) [mm/m °C, 106 in/in °F]

-6
Conversion: 10 in = 555.5 mm
in · °F m · °C

Example:
A
t an ambient temperature of 20.1 °C, the belt is At an ambient temperature of 70 °F, the belt is
used for conveying hot goods, resulting in an used for conveying hot goods, resulting in an
operating temperature of 90 °C. Belt length 30 m, operating temperature of 194 °F. Belt length 1181.1 in,
belt width 1 m, belt material polypropylene. belt width 39.37 in, belt material polypropylene.
-6
Δ lB = 30 m · (90 – 21) °C · 0.15 mm = 310.5 mm Δ lB = 1181.1 in · (194 – 70) °F · 83.3 10 in = 12.2 in
m · °C in · °F
mm = 10.35 mm -6
Δ WB = 1 m · (90 – 21) °C · 0.15 Δ WB = 39.37 in · (194 – 70) °F · 83.3 10 in = 0.41 in
m · °C in · °F

The increase in belt length of 315 mm is significant which means that the returnway must be able to absorb the
additional belt sag. In order to accommodate the increase in width, the conveyor frame must have a wider design.

When operating at temperatures below 21 °C (70 °F), the length and width contract. Especially in freezer applications, the
reduction in length and width can be significant and this must be accommodated in the conveyor design and during belt
installation. The initial belt length needs to be considered in particular when belts are installed at ambient temperatures but
are expected to subsequently operate below freezing point, resulting in a significantly shorter belt length.

IV-14 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

V-1 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024
5 OPERATING
INSTRUCTIONS

5.1 Preparing for the installation

5.2 Sprocket installation
5.3 Joining belt sections –
installing and removing hinge pins
5.4 Installing a modular belt
5.5 Maintenance and repair
5.6 Cleaning
5.7 Preventive maintenance and troubleshooting

V-2 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

5.1 PREPARING FOR THE INSTALLATION

Steps prior to belt installation Additional inspection and checklist for radius
conveyors utilizing Series 5, Series 9 and Series 11
– Inspect the condition and functionality of the conveyor – For Series 11 conveyors, verify the conveyor is built to
and all relevant conveyor components, i.e. drives, drive Forbo Movement Systems specifications as outlined in
chains or belts, shafts, sprockets, wearstrips, bearings, sup- “Series 11/Combo belts – Design guidelines and recom-
port shoes and rollers. Repair or replace any damaged or mendations for use” (ref. no. 201).
worn components. – Using a section of the belt, ensure the belt can move free-
– Pay particular attention to the condition of the wearstrips. ly on the wearstrips through the entire belt path on both
Even if the wearstrips are new, make sure the surface is carryway and returnway.
clean and smooth and has no particles such as sand, dust – Using a section of the belt, ensure the belt engages cor-
or weld splatter embedded. New wearstrips may have rectly with drive and idler sprockets without touching any
become dirty if work on the conveyor has taken place obstructions such as transfer plates.
after the wearstrips were installed. Running a hand over
the wearstrip surface will reveal embedded particles. If the – Ensure the sidewall-mounted wearstrips in the curves are
surface is not smooth, the wearstrip must either be correctly positioned to prevent the outer edge of the belt
replaced or the embedded particles must be removed. from lifting as the belt goes through the curve(s) and is
pushed against the wearstrips guiding the inside of the
– Failure to ensure clean and smooth wearstrip surfaces belt.
prior to installing the belt may reduce the belt life signifi-
cantly. – After installing the entire belt, and prior to starting the
drive motor, check that the belt can move freely on the
– Check wearstrip joints for alignment and smoothness. wearstrips without constrictions on the carryway and the
Verify correct height between wearstrips and drive and returnway.
idler shafts to ensure correct sprocket engagement. If
applicable, verify the distance between sprockets and – If possible, start the conveyor at low speed and verify that
snub rollers as well as the distance between returnway the belt is running smoothly, engages with all sprockets
rollers. and that no belt lifting is occurring.

– If necessary, clean the conveyor, including frame, carryway

and returnway supports, shafts, support rollers and shoes
and replace any damaged or worn components.
– If possible, do not unpack the belt until immediately
before the installation. Unpack the belt at the installation
site and avoid dragging or rolling the belt over rough or
dirty floors.

V-3 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

5.2 SPROCKET INSTALLATION

Belt tracking
Correct belt tracking are realized by either guiding wear-

strips or by one (1) of the sprockets on drive and idler shaft.

Forbo Movement Systems recommend guiding side-flexing

belts using the wearstrip (see next page). For straight run- 1
ning belts, either tracking method can be used.

Belt tracking by sprockets

When using sprockets for tracking the centermost sprocket
must be securely locked to the shaft by retainer rings,

Seeger circlip rings or similiar (1).

Only lock and secure the center sprockets on the shafts.

All other sprockets must be allowed to move freely on the

shaft to accommodate variations in the belt width if chang- 2
es in operating temperature occur (2).

By locking the centermost sprocket equal distribution of

belt width expansion and contraction is ensured.

When installing sprockets for belts with profiles an side

guards, do not position sprockets directly underneath the

side guards.

For the required number of sprockets please see chart in

chapter 3.2.

Sprocket alignment
Make sure all sprocket teeth are aligned when installing the
sprockets (3). Failure to do so will prevent the sprockets from
engaging correctly with the belt.

V-4 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

5.2 SPROCKET INSTALLATION

Belt tracking by side wearstrips (side-flexing belts)

When belts are guided by wearstrips mounted on the
conveyour sidewalls, all sprockets must be allowed to move
freely on the shaft.

Sprocket engagement Series 5, 11, Combo (S5 ST/S11)

The teeth of the sprocket must engage into the mesh of
the belt at the areas marked by the arrows.

For Series 5, the single-row sprockets must not be installed

with the sprocket teeth engaging in the gap between side
modules and center modules. The first sprocket should be
positioned 62.5 mm from belt edge (see picture below).

By using G or RG tab modules, the tab can limit the sprock-

et position. Please check always the proper sprocket
engagement into the mesh of the belt.

62.5 (2.5)

V-5 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

Sprocket engagement Series 18
Two row sprocket for bi-directional drive.
The sprocket should press to the eyelet for required drive
direction.

By using G tab modules, the tab can limit the sprocket posi-
tion. Please check always the proper sprocket engagement
into the mesh of the belt.

Our recommendation is to place the first sprocket as

close as possible to the belt edge. The below illustration
shows the minimal sprocket distance in relation to the
used outside modules (collapse factor 2.2 or 1.7).
S18 Combo belt is a combination of both types.

S18-44 2.2 SM B SM A

14.6 (0.58) 21.0 (0.83)

S18-44 1.7 SM B SM A

78.1 (3.08) 71.8 (2.83)

V-6 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

5.2 SPROCKET INSTALLATION

Sprocket positions and installation Series 11

Series 11 features a special concept where the load is distrib- Forbo Movement Systems recommends fixing the outer
uted over the outermost hinges by moving the outermost idlers on the shaft and preventing them from moving side-
sprocket 75 mm (2.95 in) from the belt edge. At the outer- ways by using retainer rings or other methods. As the belt is
most part of the belt it is supported by idlers (sprocket with- guided by the wearstrips, the sprockets should not be fixed
out teeth) preventing the belt from deflecting at the trans- and should be free to move sideways on the shaft.
fer point.
Maximum distance between sprockets is 75 mm (2.95 in).

Idler Idler

27.5 (1.08) 27.5 (1.08)

75 (2.95) 75 (2.95)

Dimensions in mm and inches (in).

All imperial dimensions (inches) are rounded off.

V-7 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

V-8 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024
5.3 JOINING BELT SECTIONS

Installing and removing hinge pins

Depending on the series, Siegling Prolink Modular Belts uti- more than twice the width of the longest pin, with three
lize hinge pins with heads and locking collars or with lock- pins per row. In case of the latter, an extruded head-less and
ing collars only. Series 5 and Series 9 belts in radius belt collar-less pin is floating between two pins with molded
applications utilize stainless steel pins with machined heads and/or locking collars.
grooves.
For instructions on how to install and remove hinge pins,
If the belt is wider than the longest molded pin, it is either please refer to the specific belts series shown in the illustra-
assembled with two molded pins per row, or if the belt is tions below.

Series 1, 2, 3, 4.1, 8

Assembly

Disassembly

Series 5

Assembly

Disassembly

V-9 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

Series 5 ST

Assembly

Disassembly

Combo belts (S5 ST and S11)

Assembly

Disassembly

Series 6.1, 10

Assembly

Disassembly

V-10 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

5.3 JOINING BELT SECTIONS

Series 7

Assembly

Disassembly

Series 9

Assembly

Disassembly

Series 11

Assembly

Disassembly

V-11 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

Series 13

Assembly

Disassembly

Series 13 ProSnap (PSP)

Assembly

Disassembly

V-12 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

5.3 JOINING BELT SECTIONS

Series 14, 15

Assembly

Disassembly

Assembly

Disassembly

Series 17

Assembly

Disassembly

V-13 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

Series 18

Assembly

1 2 3

Disassembly

Small plugs for extruded or steel pins (Series 4.1 and 8)

Assembly

Disassembly

V-14 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

5.3 JOINING BELT SECTIONS

Belts with more than one pin

Assembly

1 2 3

Disassembly

Alternativ options for belts with more than one pin per hinge
Series 4.1, 6.1, 8, 10, 13

Disassembly

V-15 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

5.4 INSTALLING A MODULAR BELT

General belt travel direction

If the travel direction is not mentioned in the datasheet
(chapter 1), the Prolink belt has a bi-directional drive system.

Nevertheless, the conveyor design may cause a friction/

catch point between belt edge and wear stripe or conveyor
parts.

Our recommendation is, to choose the belt travel direction

to press the outside belt edge to the inner belt side (sup-
port by inside edge).

(Remark: A spiral application with an overdrive system will

reverse the belt travel direction)

V-16 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

5.4 INSTALLING A MODULAR BELT

Installation
– Lay the belt/belt sections flat on the wearstrips on the
conveyor frame. Join belt sections using the hinge pins
included with the shipment (1–4). Avoid impact to belt
and sprockets during installation.

1 Move both belt ends until they 2 Insert rod

interlink correctly

3 Gently tap its head into 4 Cut protruding rod end slightly
retaining position behind belt edge

– Make sure the belt is not under tension when joining belt
sections and ensure correct sprocket engagement when
pulling the belt around drive and idler sprockets (5).
– If applicable, ensure correct belt length by allowing an
appropriate amount of catenary sag between snub rollers
and support rollers (5).
5
– Ensure correct running direction when installing a belt
with side guard or profiles (6).
– Always follow the conveyor manufacturers operating
instructions when operating the conveyor and the belt.

V-17 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

5.5 MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR

– All modular belts stretch as they break in during the first Broken or worn parts must be replaced immediately to
few weeks of operation. This is normal and should be ensure problem-free operation.
expected. Depending on the belt load and operating
environment, additional belt stretching is common. Do not mix new and used sprockets at the same shaft. To
– After the initial break-in period, the belt will probably have ensure the optimum performance and wear life, Forbo rec-
to be shortened. This can be accomplished by adjusting ommends changing the sprockets and the belts at the same
the take-up mechanism, if there is one, or by removing time.
one or more row(s) of belting.
– If the belt has more than one module across the width,
verify the integrity of the belt bricklaying pattern after
removing the excess belt length. If the pattern is compro-
mised, remove one additional row of belting or reinsert a
row.
– Ensure an appropriate amount of catenary sag on the
returnway after shortening the belt.
– Inspect the belt regularly to make sure it is operating
properly. The frequency of the inspections depends on
the general operating conditions, e.g. load, speed, abra-
siveness of the application, cleaning intervals, operating
temperature, etc.
· Inspect sprockets for wear and alignment.
heck that the belt is tracking properly.
·C

· Inspect belt modules, profiles and side guards
for damage and wear.
· Inspect the belt for protruding hinge pins.
· Inspect the conveyor for loose wearstrips/belt supports.

V-18 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

5.6 CLEANING

– Regular cleaning is highly recommended. Cleaning reduc- –V

erify that the cleaning agent is suitable for the specific
es the overall wear of the belt, sprockets and hinge pins belt material prior to cleaning.
and increases belt life. The specific cleaning intervals · If in doubt about the suitability of the cleaning solution,
depend on the application and the operating environ- please consult the supplier of the cleaning solution.
ment.
·W
hen using hot water for cleaning, do not exceed the
– Optimal cleaning solutions and methods depend on the maximum temperature allowed for the belt material.
specific application and industry requirements. The food
processing industry has exceedingly stringent hygiene · Never
exceed the recommended chemical concentra-
and sanitation requirements, such as HACCP, and increas- tion or the exposure time of the cleaning solution. High
ingly follows sanitation benchmarks set by the Global chemical concentrations, and high chlorine concentra-
Food Safety Initiative. Adhering to the applicable sanita- tions in particular, will degrade plastic materials prema-
tion standards is the responsibility of the user. turely.

– Belt materials are often selected based on application ·A

lways rinse the belt thoroughly with water after
requirements, e.g. abrasion resistance, load and operating cleaning.
temperature. However, different materials have different
levels of chemical resistance (please see chapter 2.1
”Plastic materials (Properties)“ for the relative chemical
resistance of standard belt materials against commonly
used chemicals).

V-19 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

5.7 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
AND TROUBLESHOOTING

The belt is not tracking properly; the belt edges touch the frame
Sprockets are not aligned If the total number of teeth of a sprocket with a square bore is not divisible by 4, the
sprockets must be “timed” by aligning the teeth.

Sprockets on the drive and/or idler shafts are misaligned; The center sprocket on the drive and idler shafts must be aligned, positioned in the
the locked center sprocket on either shaft is incorrectly center of the shaft and engage the belt. Check the retaining devices to ensure the
positioned or loose center sprockets are securely fastened on the shafts.

Conveyor frame is not level and square Check and adjust if necessary.

Drive and idler shafts are not level and/or square with Check and adjust if necessary.
each other

Two or more belt sections are misaligned and joined Inspect belt for unevenly joined belt sections; realign the belt section(s).
incorrectly, i.e. the belt edges are not straight

Sprockets do not engage correctly or sufficiently

Incorrect “A” dimension and/or too large a gap between Adjust the position of the shaft(s) to attain the recommended dimensions.
sprockets and end of wearstrips

Sprockets are not aligned If the total number of teeth of a sprocket with a square bore is not divisible by 4, the
sprockets must be “timed” by aligning the teeth.

Check if the axial position of the sprockets are aligned to the engagement points of the
belt. Check if the sprockets can freely move sideways on the shaft.

Insufficient belt tension Make sure there is sufficient catenary sag to provide back tension. This can be ensured
by using a weighted roller (see chapter 3.3)

Not enough belt wraps around the sprockets The recommended belt wrap around the sprocket is between 180° and a minimum of
150°. To ensure a 180° wrap, install a snub roller or move the existing snub roller.

V-20 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

5.7 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
AND TROUBLESHOOTING

Excessive sprocket wear

Abrasive conditions Improve cleaning methods and frequency or add protective shields to reduce the
amount of abrasive material coming into contact with the belt and sprockets.
Use TPC1 sprockets or stainless steel sprockets.

Not enough sprockets Verify that the recommended minimum number of sprockets is used. Too few
sprockets will cause premature sprocket wear. Add sprockets if necessary.

Sprockets are not aligned If the total number of teeth of a sprocket with a square bore is not divisible by 4, the
sprockets must be “timed” by aligning the teeth.

Incorrect “A” dimension and/or too large a gap between Adjust the position of the shaft(s) to attain the recommended dimensions.
sprocket and end of wearstrips

Sprockets on the drive and/or idler shaft are misaligned; The center sprocket on the drive and idler shafts must be aligned, positioned in the
the locked center sprocket on either shaft is incorrectly center of the shafts and engage the belt. Check the retaining devices to ensure the
positioned or is loose center sprockets are securely fastened on the shafts.

High belt speed High belt speed will increase sprocket wear, especially on conveyors with a short center
distance. Reduce speed if possible.

High belt tension High belt tension will increase sprocket wear. Make sure there is an appropriate amount
of catenary sag.

Excessive belt wear

Abrasive conditions Improve cleaning methods and frequency or add protective shields to reduce the
amount of abrasive material coming in contact with belt and sprockets. Use TPC1
sprockets or stainless steel sprockets.

Incorrect belt material Check material specifications to ensure the optimal material is used. Contact your
Forbo Movement Systems sales representative for a recommendation.

Incorrect wearstrip material Check material specifications to ensure the optimal material is used. Contact your
Forbo Movement Systems sales representative for a recommendation.

Incorrect wearstrip arrangement Check the wearstrips are placed according to design guidelines. Contact your Forbo
Movement Systems sales representative for recommendations.

Product loading If wear occur where product is loaded onto the belt, reduce the distance between the
product and the belt if possible.

High belt speed High belt speed will increase wear, especially on conveyors with a short center distance.
Reduce belt speed if possible.

V-21 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

Belt stretching; excessive catenary sag
Abrasive conditions Improve cleaning methods and frequency or add protective shields to reduce the
amount of abrasive material coming in contact with belt and sprockets. Use TPC1
sprockets or stainless steel sprockets.

Incorrect belt tension Adjust tension by adding or reducing catenary sag.

Incorrect belt or hinge pin material Check belt and hinge pin material used. Contact your Forbo Movement Systems
sales representative to confirm the correct material for the application.

Varying operating temperature Varying operating temperatures can cause the belt to elongate and/or contract
significantly. Verify that the catenary sag can accommodate the elongation/contrac-
tion. It may be necessary to install a gravity take-up or a pneumatic tensioning device.

Hinge pins are migrating out of the belt

Pins are not properly locked Check if pin heads, locking collars, clips or belt edge modules are damaged. Replace if
necessary.

Pins elongate due temperature Select appropriate pin material with in consultation with Forbo Movement Systems.
Shorten pins and reinstall/replace with new, shorter pins.

Pins elongate due to high load High transverse forces on pin. Conveyor frame is not level and square. Check frame and
adjust accordingly.

Pins do not lock correctly and are too loose or too tight. Verify the pins are of the correct type.

Pins cannot be easily extracted In abrasive applications “camshafting” can occur (uneven lateral wear of the hinge pins).
This can make it difficult to extract the hinge pins, particularly in wide belts. Cut off the
hinge pin locking collar and carefully knock out the hinge pin from one side, using a
suitable steel pin and a hammer.

V-22 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

VI-1 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024
6 APPENDIX

6.1 Glossary
6.2 Glossary of symbols
6.3 Additional tables
6.4 Conversion table metric/imperial
6.5 Questionnaire
6.6 Notes
6.7 Legal notes

VI-2 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

6.1 GLOSSARY

A Term Explanation

Accumulation length Length of product accumulation in running direction of the belt. Also known as “Back-up length”

Adjusted belt pull Effective pelt pull which is adjusted by taking into account the operational factor

Admissible belt pull Actual allowable belt pull after weakening effects like temperature are taken into account in the nominal belt
strength

B Back flex Opposite of front flex. Negative bending of the belt.

Backed up product load The load (product weight) accumulating on top of the belt

Back-up length Length of product accumulation in running direction of the belt. Also referred to as “Accumulation length”

Belt width Shortest distance between belt edges

Bi-directional drive Drive system with a motor on each side allowing the conveyor to run in both directions

Brick-laid pattern Belt modules are staggered from row to row like bricks in a wall. This is to avoid cross joints.

C Carryway Transport side of the belt.

Catenary sag Unsupported part of belt which provides tensioning of the belt

CCW Abbreviation for counter-clockwise

Center drive Or Omega drive. A conveyor with the drive shaft located below the conveyor on the return path with the belt
wrapping around the sprocket like an upside-down Ω.

Chordal action See “Polygon effect”

Coefficient of friction Ratio between the force required to move two sliding surfaces over each other, divided by the force pressing them
together

Coef. of friction Defines the resistance to sliding between the belt and the radius wearstrip exposed to the radial force in a curve.
Belt – Curve This is normally between the inner wearstrip and the belt edge

Coef. of friction Defines the resistance to products sliding on the belt surface. Mainly relevant for load calculation on accumulating
Belt – Product conveyor

Coef. of friction Defines the resistance to sliding between the conveyor bed (slider) and the bottom side of the belt
Belt – Slider

Coefficient of thermal Coefficient used to calculate the change in dimensions due to a temperature change
expansion

Collapse factor Defines the minimum inside radius a side flexing PMB is capable of as a function of the belt width

Conveyed load Total weight of product conveyed on the belt

Conveying length Center to center distance (C – C), measured from conveyor head to tail at center of the drive/idler shaft

VI-3 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

Term Explanation

CW Abbreviation for clockwise

D Decline conveyor Lowerator. A (section of) conveyor lowering products from a higher level to a lower level

E Effective belt pull Belt pull calculated by taking weight of belt, product and friction forces into consideration

Elevation The vertical change in altitude for an incline conveyor

EU Material complies with standards for food contact articles in at least one member state of the European Union

F FDA Food and Drug Administration. Federal US agency which regulates materials that may come in contact with food

Finger plates Special transferplate used only for raised rib belts. It ensures smooth product transfers.

Flat top belt Standard belt with a flat smooth surface

G Gravity take-up System which uses a weighted roller (->gravity) to tension the belt

Grid top Mesh or web like surface structure with a very large open area (> 40 %)

H Hold Down Tab Special modules which can be inserted into the middle of the belt to hold it down in back-flexing sections

I Idling shaft The shaft of a conveyor that is not driven (most tail shafts)

Incline conveyor A (section of) conveyor lifting products up an incline

Indent Distance of width from the belt edge to beginning of a structure (e.g. side guard, profile, etc.)

L Lower head drive Conveyor with lowered drive shaft to reduce the transfer gap

N Nominal belt pull Maximum theoretical belt pull under ideal conditions

NSF International NSF International is a product testing, inspection and certification organization based in Ann Arbor, Michigan

O Omega drive See “Center drive”

Open hinge Hinges that are easy to clean

Opening Percent open area of a belt’s surface

Operational factor Operational factor is used to calculate adjusted belt pull from effective belt pull

P Pitch Distance between pins

Pitch diameter Effective diameter of a sprocket

VI-4 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

6.1 GLOSSARY

Term Explanation

PMB Plastic Modular Belt

Polygon effect Also referred to as “chordal action”. An impression of the variation in linear belt speed cause by the sprocket
not forming a true arc but a polygon.

Profile Profile modules have a molded vertical plate used to elevate products on incline conveyors.

Pusher drive Tail driven conveyor

PV limit A value defined for two mating materials which expresses the pressure (P) and velocity(V) limitations when
materials side against each other

S Screw-operated take-up Rigid pre-tensioning system using screws

Side flexing belt Belt with the ability to side flex allowing it to run in curves. May also be referred to as radius conveyors/belts.

Side guards Small plates that are assembled close to belt edge to prevent product falling from the belt edge

Slider bed Fully closed plate supporting the belt (may have holes or gaps to allow dirt or debris to escape)

Slider support See “wearstrip”

Spiral conveyor Belt helically wrapped around a drum.

Sprocket Wheel with teeth that engages with the modules of a belt to provide positive torque transmission

Structure Parts of a module or belt which provide specific attributes.

T Take-up Belt tensioning device

Temperature expansion Coefficient of thermal expansion is used to calculate the change in dimensions due to temperature changes
coefficient

Temperature factor, cT Polymers (plastic) get softer with increasing temperature. The temperature factor will reduce the belt pull capacity
with increasing temperature depending on belt material.

Thermal expansion Temperature dependent change in dimension (+ or –) caused by the material's temperature expansion coefficient

Total belt length Actual belt length necessary to wrap around the conveyor

U USDA United States Department of Agriculture. US federal agency which has defined requirements for equipment which
may be in contact with meat and poultry or dairy. Compliance verification for PMB is managed by NSF International

V V-shape arrangement Belt wearstrips arranged in V-shape or “chevron”

W Wearstrip Plastic strips on which the belt runs or is guided.

VI-5 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

6.2 GLOSSARY OF SYMBOLS

Designation Symbols Metric Imperial

Effective belt pull FU N lb

Adjusted belt pull Fadj N lb

N lb
Adjusted belt pull per mm/ft belt width F’adj
mm ft

Admissible belt pull Fadm N lb

Forces

N lb
Admissible belt pull per mm/ft belt width F’adm
mm ft
N lb
Nominal belt pull per mm/ft belt width F’nom
mm ft

Nominal belt pull in curve Fnom, curve N lb

Shaft load FS N lb

Coefficient of friction belt to accumulated products µ acc – –

Coefficient of friction belt to slider µs – –

Coefficient of friction belt to curve side support µc – –

Factors & coefficients

mm in
Coefficient of thermal expansion α m·K m · °F

Operational factor C Op – –

Temperature factor CT – –

Collapse factor CC – –

Conversational factor g 9.81 m/s2 1

Conveyor length/Center to center distance l c-c m ft

Elevation of conveyor he m ft

Angle of incline/decline αi ° °
Conveyor dimensions

Angle of curve αc ° °

Accumulation length lacc mm in

Mass of conveyed product mP kg lb

Mass of accumulated products macc kg lb

Mass of entire belt in conveyor mB kg lb

VI-6 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

6.2 GLOSSARY OF SYMBOLS

Designation Symbols Metric Imperial

kg lb
Mass of belt (see data sheet) m’B
m2 ft2
m ft
Belt speed v
min min

Belt length lB mm in

Belt width WB mm in

Width deviation Wdev % %

Minimum belt width Wmin mm in

Effective belt width Wb, eff mm in

Width increment Winc mm in

Belt dimensions

Width tolerance Wtol % %

Belt pitch p mm in

Pin diameter dpin mm in

Height of pin bore position hpin mm in

Module thickness hm mm in

Inner side flex radius r1 mm in

Front flex radius on rollers r2 mm in

Back flex radius on load bearing rollers r3 mm in

Back flex radius on Hold Down shoes r4 mm in

Back flex radius on rollers r5 mm in

Structure height
hs mm in
(e.g. FRT, roller above surface, etc.)

Structure width w mm in

Indent of structures
a mm in
Structure dimensions

(profiles, FRT, roller tops, PRR cut-out)

Distance between structures across belt width (profiles, FRT, roller) b mm in

Structure (roller) distance increment binc mm in

Spacing between structures in

s mm in
travel direction (profiles, FRT, roller)

Roller diameter drol mm in

Number of rollers across belt width nrol – –

VI-7 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

Designation Symbols Metric Imperial

Calculated motor power PM kW hp

Power requirement at drive shaft PS kW hp

Torque M Nm ft · lb

Shaft revolutions Rs rpm rpm

Mass of shaft ms kg lb

Shaft deflection ys mm in

Shaft length ls mm in
Shaft & Drive dimensions

Shaft diameter ds mm in

Shaft edge length (square and hexagon) Ws mm in

Shaft wall thickness of hollow shafts ts mm in

Width of keyway WK mm in

Diameter + keyway height dK mm in

Height of keyway hK mm in

Bearing center distance lb mm in

Torsion angle φ ° °

N lb
Modulus of elasticity E
mm2 in2

Geometrical moment of inertia mm4 in4

Axis to wearstrip top A mm in

Axis to belt top B mm in

Sprocket dimensions

Axis to conveyor frame Cmin mm in

Sprocket pitch diameter D0 mm in

Sprocket width Wspr mm in

Number of sprockets nspr – –

Temperature T °C °F

VI-8 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

6.3 ADDITIONAL TABLES

Shaft dimensions for molded sprockets

Metric

Nominal shaft width Ws [mm]

Square shafts WS

SQ 20 mm 20 ± 0.15
SQ 25 mm 25 ± 0.15
SQ 30 mm 30 ± 0.15
SQ 40 mm 40 ± 0.2
SQ 60 mm 60 ± 0.2
SQ 80 mm 80 ± 0.2
SQ 90 mm 90 ± 0.2

Nominal shaft diameter [mm]

Round shafts ds Tol. WK Tol. hK Tol. dK Tol.
RD 20 mm 20 – 0.21 6 – 0.3 2.8 – 0.2 22.8 – 0.41
RD 25 mm 25 – 0.21 8 – 0.4 3.3 – 0.2 28.3 – 0.41
RD 30 mm 30 – 0.21 8 – 0.4 3.3 – 0.2 33.3 – 0.41
RD 40 mm 40 – 0.25 12 – 0.4 3.3 – 0.2 43.3 – 0.45
RD 50 mm 50 – 0.25 14 – 0.4 3.8 – 0.2 53.8 – 0.45
RD 60 mm 60 – 0.3 18 – 0.4 4.4 – 0.2 64.4 – 0.5

Imperial

Nominal shaft width Ws [in] WK

Square shafts hK

SQ 1 in (1") 1 ± 0.006
SQ 1.25 in (1 ¼") 1.25 ± 0.006
SQ 1.5 in (1 ½") 1.5 ± 0.006
SQ 2.0 in (2") 2 ± 0.008
dK

SQ 2.5 in (2 ½") 2.5 ± 0.008

SQ 3.5 in (3 ½") 3.5 ± 0.008

Nominal shaft diameter [in]

Round shafts ds Tol. WK Tol. hK Tol. dK Tol. dS

RD 0.75 in (¾") 0.75 – 0.008 0.188 – 0.001 0.087 – 0.015 0.837 – 0.023
RD 1 in (1") 1 – 0.008 0.25 – 0.001 0.114 – 0.015 1.114 – 0.023
RD 1.19 in (1 3⁄16") 1.187 – 0.010 0.25 – 0.001 0.118 – 0.015 1.306 – 0.025
RD 1.25 in (1 ¼") 1.25 – 0.010 0.25 – 0.001 0.118 – 0.015 1.368 – 0.025
RD 1.44 in (1 7⁄16") 1.438 – 0.010 0.375 – 0.001 0.169 – 0.015 1.607 – 0.025
RD 1.5 in (1 ½") 1.5 – 0.010 0.375 – 0.001 0.169 – 0.015 1.669 – 0.025
RD 1.94 in (1 15⁄16") 1.938 – 0.010 0.5 – 0.002 0.224 – 0.015 2.162 – 0.025
RD 2 in (2") 2 – 0.012 0.5 – 0.002 0.224 – 0.015 2.224 – 0.027
RD 2.5 in (2 ½") 2.5 – 0.012 0.625 – 0.002 0.28 – 0.015 2.78 – 0.027

Shaft dimensions (round and square) according to ISO 286-2 h12 (or closer degree of
tolerance e.g. h7) can be used.
Key material according to ISO 286-2 h9 can be used.

VI-9 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

Bore size dimensions at Prolink sprockets
To fulfill the correct fitting to the shaft, the bore size dimen-
sion of our Siegling Prolink sprockets has to fulfill our quality
requirements. To consider the shape and position tolerance
of the bore size, our Siegling Prolink sprockets will be
checked by plug gauges.

A check of the bore size by caliber is not possible (will not

consider the shape and position tolerance).

The dimensions of the bore size (see table below).

Metric Imperial

Bore size Bore diameter [mm] Bore size Bore diameter [mm]
Square hub Square hub
SQ 20 mm 20.3 ± 0.15 SQ 1 in (1") 25.7 ± 0.15
SQ 25 mm 25.3 ± 0.15 SQ 1.25 in (1 ¼") 32.05 ± 0.15
SQ 30 mm 30.3 ± 0.15 SQ 1.5 in (1 ½") 38.4 ± 0.15
SQ 40 mm 40.4 ± 0.2 SQ 2 in (2") 51.2 ± 0.2
SQ 60 mm 60.4 ± 0.2 SQ 2.5 in (2 ½") 63.9 ± 0.2
SQ 80 mm 80.4 ± 0.2 SQ 3.5 in (3 ½") 89.3 ± 0.2
SQ 90 mm 90.4 ± 0.2
Round hub
Round hub RD 0.75 in (¾") 19.15 ± 0.1
RD 18 mm 18.1 ± 0.1 RD 1 in (1") 25.5 ± 0.1
RD 20 mm 20.1 ± 0.1 RD 1.19 in (1 3⁄16") 30.26 ± 0.1
RD 25 mm 25.1 ± 0.1 RD 1.25 in (1 ¼") 31.85 ± 0.1
RD 30 mm 30.1 ± 0.1 RD 1.44 in (1 7⁄16") 36.6 ± 0.1
RD 40 mm 40.1 ± 0.1 RD 1.5 in (1 ½") 38.2 ± 0.1
RD 50 mm 50.1 ± 0.1 RD 1.94 in (1 15⁄16") 49.3 ± 0.1
RD 60 mm 60.1 ± 0.1 RD 2 in (2") 50.9 ± 0.1
RD 2.5 in (2 ½") 63.6 ± 0.1

VI-10 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

6.3 ADDITIONAL TABLES
Metric shaft · Round

Groove dimensions for circlips

Metric

Groove width – m Groove diameter – DS

Shaft diameter Circlip tolerance H13 tolerance h12 Groove distance – W
[mm] [mm]
Square shaft
SQ 20 mm DIN 471 – 28x1.5 1.6 26.6 Sprocket width (b) + 1 mm
SQ 25 mm DIN 471 – 35x1.5 1.6 33.0 Sprocket width (b) + 1 mm
SQ 40 mm DIN 471 – 56x2 2.2 53.0 Sprocket width (b) + 1 mm
SQ 60 mm DIN 471 – 85x3 3.2 81.5 Sprocket width (b) + 1 mm
SQ 80 mm DIN 471 – 115x4 4.2 111.0 Sprocket width (b) + 1 mm
SQ 90 mm DIN 471 – 127x4 4.2 123.0 Sprocket width (b) + 1 mm

Round shaft
RD 20 mm DIN 471 – 20x1.2 1.3 19.0 Sprocket width (b) + 1 mm
RD 25 mm DIN 471 – 25x1.2 1.3 23.9 Sprocket width (b) + 1 mm
RD 30 mm DIN 471 – 30x1.5 1.6 28.6 Sprocket width (b) + 1 mm
RD 40 mm DIN 471 – 40x1.75 1.9 37.5 Sprocket width (b) + 1 mm

Imperial

Groove width – m Groove diameter – DS

Shaft diameter Circlip tolerance H13 tolerance h12 Groove distance – W
[in] [in]
Square shaft
SQ 1.5 in (1 ½") SH-212 0.086 2.003 Sprocket width (b) + 3/64 in
SQ 2.5 in (2 ½") SH-354 0.12 3.357 Sprocket width (b) + 3/64 in
SQ 2.5 in (2 ½") SH-350* 0.12 3.316 Sprocket width (b) + 3/64 in
SQ 3.5 in (3 ½") SH-500 0.12 4.79 Sprocket width (b) + 3/64 in

Round shaft
RD 0.75 in (¾") SH-75 0.046 0.704 Sprocket width (b) + 3/64 in
RD 1 in (1") SH-100 0.046 0.94 Sprocket width (b) + 3/64 in
RD 1.19 in (1 3⁄16") SH-118 0.056 1.118 Sprocket width (b) + 3/64 in
RD 1.25 in (1 ¼") SH-125 0.056 1.176 Sprocket width (b) + 3/64 in
RD 1.38 in (1 3⁄8") SH-137 0.056 1.291 Sprocket width (b) + 3/64 in
RD 1.44 in (1 7⁄16") SH-143 0.056 1.35 Sprocket width (b) + 3/64 in
RD 1.5 in (1 ½") SH-150 0.056 1.406 Sprocket width (b) + 3/64 in

* alternativ to SH-354

W m DS
W m DS

VI-11 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

VI-12 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024
6.3 ADDITIONAL TABLES

Minimum design radii

Standard conveyors

r1 Side flex radius

r2 Front flex radius
r3 Load bearing roller

r2 r5 r5 Drive sprocket r4 Hold Down shoe

r5 Back flex roller

Centre drive conveyors

r5 r5 r5 r5 r5
r2 r2
r3
Drive sprocket

r5 r5
r2 r2
r3 r3

Drive sprocket

Inclined conveyors

r2 Drive sprocket

r4
r5 r5

Nose bar conveyors Curve conveyors

Drive sprocket
Nose bar r2
r5 r1 (left curve)
(right curve) r1

Drive sprocket Belt width, b0

VI-13 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

Front flex radius* Back flex radius on
Belt types Pitch load bearing Hold Down
on rollers r2 rollers r3 shoes r4 rollers r5

S1-x FLT / NSK / FRT / SRS / RRB 2 in 2 in 4 in/100 mm 6 in 2 in/50 mm

S1-PMU with SG ** 50 mm 50 mm 6 in/150 mm 150 mm 6 in/150 mm
S2-x FLT / GRT 1 in/25 mm
1 in 1 in 2 in 3 in
S2-57 RRB 2 in/50 mm
25 mm 25 mm 50 mm 75 mm
S2-x PMU with SG ** 2 in/50 mm
S3-x FLT / LRB 2 in 2 in 4 in/100 mm 6 in 2 in/50 mm
S3-x with SG ** 50 mm 50 mm 6 in/150 mm 150 mm 6 in/150 mm
S4.1-x FLT / NPY / NTP 0.55 in 0.45 in 1 in 1.5 in 0.5 in/12.5 mm
S4.1-0 FRT1 14 mm 11 mm 25 mm 38 mm 0.7 in/16.5 mm
S5-45 GRT / NTP / FRT 1 in/25mm 2 in/50 mm 1 in/25 mm
1 in 3 in
S5-45 PMU with SG ** 1 in/25mm 3 in/75 mm 3 in/75 mm
25 mm 75 mm
S5-45 G / RG 2 in/50 mm 2 in/50 mm 1 in/25 mm
S6.1-x FLT / CTP / NPT / PRR 2 in 2 in 4 in/100 mm 6 in 2 in/50 mm
S6.1-x PMU with SG ** 50 mm 50 mm 6 in/150 mm 150 mm 6 in/150 mm
1.6 in 1.6 in 3.2 in 4.8 in 1.6 in
S7-x FLT / NSK / FRT / SRS / PRR
40 mm 40 mm 80 mm 120 mm 40 mm
S8-x FLT / NSK / RAT / FRT / SRS / PRR 2 in 1 in/25 mm
S8.1-30 FLT GT 1 in 1 in 50 mm 3 in 1.25 in/30 mm
S8-0 RTP A90 25 mm 25 mm 75 mm
3 in/75 mm 3 in/75 mm
S8-0 PMU with SG **
S9-57 GRT / NTP 2 in 2 in 4 in/100 mm 6 in 2 in/50 mm
S9-57 PMU with SG ** 50 mm 50 mm 6 in/150 mm 150 mm 6 in/150 mm
S10-x FLT / NTP / LRB / FRT1 1 in 1 in 2 in/50 mm 3 in 1 in/25 mm
S10-0 PMU with SG ** 25 mm 25 mm 3 in/75 mm 75 mm 3 in/75 mm
S11-45 GRT / NTP / FRT 1 in 1 in 2 in 6 in/150 mm 1 in
S11/S5 combo 25 mm 25 mm 50 mm 3 in/75 mm 25 mm
0.315 in 0.118 in*** 0.6 in 0.9 in 0.3 in
S13-x FLT / NPY / CTP
8 mm 3 mm*** 16 mm 24 mm 8 mm
0.5 in 0.38 in 1 in 1.5 in 0.5 in
S14-x FLT
12.7 mm 9.5 mm 25.4 mm 38.1 mm 12.7 mm
0.5 in 0.25 in 1 in 1.5 in 0.5 in
S15-47 GRT / RSA
12.7 mm 6.4 mm 25.4 mm 38.1 mm 12.7 mm
1 in 1 in 2 in 3 in 1 in
S17-0 FLT / SRS
25 mm 25 mm 50 mm 75 mm 25 mm
S18-44 GRT (G) / FRT1 / HDK 2.2 / 1 in 1 in 2 in 3 in 1 in
GRT 1.7 25 mm 25 mm 50 mm 75 mm 25 mm

Using larger radii than listed will reduce wear on belt, rollers and/or shoes.
Larger radii will also likely reduce noise levels and make the belt run more smoothly.

* Depending on the application (e.g. knife edge) smaller radii are possible -> speed, noise, conveying goods (jiggle)
** Back flex radius depends on profile height and distance
*** Knife edge/nose bar

VI-14 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

6.3 ADDITIONAL TABLES

Load index
The following table shows the changes in load capacity between different materials and over all available series.

Straight running belts Side flexing belts

Series PE PP POM PA Series PE PP POM PA

S1 60 % 100 % 133 % – S5 – 56 % 100 % –
S2 10 % 17 % 23 % 17 % S5 RG, S5 ST – 67 % 117 % –
S3 20 % 40 % 53 % – S9 – 89 % 156 % 124 %
S4.1 10 % 17 % 33 % 33 % S11 – 33 % 56 % 56 %
S5 33 % 60 % 83 % – S18 – 56 % 89 % –
S6.1 43 % 60 % 100 % 100 %
S7 60 % 100 % 200 % –
S8, S8.1 – 67 % 133 % 100 %
S8-0 RTP – – 67 % –
S9 40 % 73 % 100 % 80 %
S10-0 FLT, S10-0 NTP, S10-0 FRT1 20 % 27 % 67 % –
S10-22 FLT 10 % 17 % 37 % –
S10-36 FLT, S10-36 LRB 13 % 20 % 43 % 43 %
S11 – 30 % 50 % 50 %
S13 – – 13 % –
S14 22 % 30 % 80 % –
S15 – 8% 17 % 15 %
S17 – 60 % 107 % –

General material data

Material Coefficient of thermal Density E-modulus Melting point Electrical surface
expansion ISO 1183 ISO 527 ISO 11357 resistivity
-6
IEC60093
mm
[
m · °C ] [ 10
in
in · °F ] [ mkg ]3 [MPa] [°C] [°F] [Ω]

PA 0.12 66.6 1120 3400 221 429.8 1014

PA-HT 0.1 55.5 1360 10000 262 500 1013
PBT 0.16 88.8 1300 2500 223 433.4 1013
PE 0.21 116.7 964 1150 135 275 –
PE-I 0.21 116.7 960 1100 – – –
PE-MD 0.21 116.7 984 1100 – – –
PLX 0.1 174.6 1240 1650 220 428 1014
POM 0.12 66.6 1410 2850 166 330.8 1014
POM-HC 0.12 66.6 1410 2580 166 330.8 < 106
POM-CR 0.11 66.6 1410 2500 162 323.6 –
POM-MD 0.12 66.7 1476 2800 166 330.8 1012
PP 0.15 83.3 905 1550 165 329 –
PP-MD 0.15 83.3 990 1500 – – –
PP-SW 0.15 83.3 910 1500 167 333 –
PXX-HC 0.15 83.3 1150 2000 165 329 < 103
TPC1 0.185 102.8 1240 310 212 413.6 1012

VI-15 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

Dimension deviation
Belt material
Belt type
PE POM PP PXX-HC PA PA-HT
S1 - 0 FLT – 0.35 % – 0.75 % 0.00 % 0.00 % – 1.10 %
S1 - 0 FRT1, NSK, SRS – – 0.75 % – – – –
S1 - 18 FLT 0.15 % – 0.70 % 0.00 % – – 1.10 %
S2 - 0 FLT – 0.20 % – 0.30 % 0.25 % – – –
S2 - 12 FLT 0.00 % – 0.10 % 0.20 % – – –
S2 - 0 FRT1 – – 0.30 % – – – –
S2 - 57 GRT – 0.20 % – 0.20 % 0.20 % 0.20 % – 1.30 %
S2 - 57 RRB – 0.20 % – 0.20 % 0.20 % – – –
S3 - 0 FLT – 0.20 % – 0.30 % 0.05 % – – –
S3 - 0 LRB – 0.20 % – 0.30 % – – – –
S3 - 16 FLT – 0.20 % – 0.30 % 0.05 % – – –
S3 - 16 LRB – 0.20 % – 0.05 % – – –
S4.1 - 0 FLT, FRT1 – 0.10 % 0.10 % 0.25 % 0.25 % – –
S4.1 - 0 NPY – 0.10 % 0.10 % 0.25 % – – –
S4.1 - 21 FLT – 0.10 % 0.10 % 0.25 % – – 1.20 %
S4.1 - 21 NTP – 0.10 % 0.10 % 0.25 % – – –
S5 - 45 GRT 0.00 % 0.00 % 0.00 % – 0.00 % –
S6.1 - 0 CTP, NTP – 0.65 % – 0.65 % 0.00 % – – –
S6.1 - 0 FLT – 0.65 % – 0.65 % 0.00 % – 0.00 % –
S6.1 - 21 FLT – 0.50 % – 0.50 % 0.00 % – – –
S6.1 - 23 FLT – 0.50 % – 0.50 % 0.00 % – 0.83 % –
S6.1 - 36 FLT – 0.50 % – 0.50 % 0.00 % – – –
S7 - 0 FLT – 0.35 % – 0.75 % 0.00 % – 0.13 % – –
S7 - 0 FRT1 – 0.35 % – 0.75 % 0.00 % – – –
S7 - 0 NSK, SRS – – 0.75 % – – 0.13 % – –
S7 - 6 FLT 0.00 % – 0.70 % 0.00 % – – –
S7 - 6 NSK – – 0.70 % – – – –
S8 - 0 FLT – 0.31 % – 0.31 % 0.00 % 0.00 % – 1.49 %
S8 - 0 FRT1 – – 0.31 % 0.00 % – – –
S8 - 0 NSK, SRS – – 0.31 % 0.00 % 0.00 % – –
S8 - 25 RAT – 0.31 % – 0.61 % 0.00 % – – 1.53 %
S8.1 - 30 FLT – 0.31 % – 0.58 % 0.00 % – – –
S8 - 0 RTP A90 – – 0.31 % – – – –
S9 - 57 GRT 0.00 % 0.00 % 0.00 % – 0.00 % –
S10 - 0 FLT 0.00 % 0.00 % 0.26 % – 0.74 % –
S10 - 0 NTP, FRT1 0.00 % 0.00 % 0.26 % – – –
S10 - 22 FLT 0.00 % 0.00 % 0.26 % – – –
S10 - 36 FLT 0.00 % 0.00 % 0.26 % – 0.74 % –
S10 - 36 LRB 0.00 % 0.00 % 0.26 % – – –
S11 - 45 GRT – 0.00 % 0.20 % – 0.60 %
S13 - 0 FLT, NPY, CTP – 0.23 % – 0.89 % 1.38 % –
S13 - 34 FLT – 0.23 % – – 1.38 % –
S14 - 0 FLT – 0.13 % 0.00 % 0.43 % – – –
S14 - 25 FLT – 0.13 % 0.00 % 0.43 % – 0.92 % –
S14 - 25 CUT – 0.00 % 0.43 % – – –
S14 - 25 FRT1 – – 0.00 % – – –
S15 - 47 GRT, RSA – – 0.40 % – 1.00 % – 0.40 % –
S17 - 0 FLT – – 0.09 % 0.35 % – – –
S17 - 0 SRS – – – 0.35 % – –
S18 - 44 GRT 2.2 – – 0.10 % 0.50 % – 0.85 % –
S18 - 44 HDK – – 0.10 % 0.50 % – 0.85 % –
S18 - 44 GRT 1.7 – – 0.10 % 0.50 % – – –
S18 - 44 FRT1 2.2 – – 0.50 % – – –

VI-16 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

6.3 ADDITIONAL TABLES

Dimension tolerance
Belt Series Tolerance
S1, S2, S3, S4.1, S6.1, S7, S8, S10, S13, S14, S15, S17, S18 ± 0.2 %
S5, S9, S11 ± 0.3 %

Example:
S6.1-23 in POM with nominal width of 600 mm S6.1-23 in POM with nominal width of 23.62 in

Deviation:
– 0.5 %: 600 · (1 – 0.005) = 597 mm 23.62 · (1 – 0.005) = 23.50 in
Tolerance:
± 0.2 %: 600 · 0.002 = 1.2 mm 23.62 · 0.002 = 0.05 in

Actual belt width:

597 ± 1.2 mm 23.50 ± 0.05 in

Drainage capacity/flow rate of Prolink belts

The percentage of open area for Siegling Prolink belts and
modules is shown in the nomenclature e.g. S6.1-36 FLT or water tank
S8-25 RAT. Also, chapter 1.2 (“Detailed series information”) of
the PEM shows the percentage of open area for each avail-
able surface pattern. More detailed information on the belt
opening is shown in the surface pattern dimensions.
shutter
The percentage of open area refers to how much light pass-
es through. It is calculated by the relation of the open to the
closed surface area, using a representative belt section of
the CAD model. This theoretical value gives the possibility
to compare the different Siegling Prolink series according
the open area.

flow area belt sample

The real permeability or drainage capacity of a belt is related D = 100 mm
to the “FLOW RATE” of the medium through the belt. This
“drainage capacity” will be influenced by the percentage of
open area, but also by the flow of the fluid, and the mod-
ules roundings and gaps.

VI-17 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

For this reason, Forbo Siegling has developed a drainage Test results:
test for modular belts. The published “FLOW RATE” is – Diagram 1 shows the average flow rate for different
defined in liters per second (l/s) and will support our cus- Siegling Prolink belt types.
tomer when choosing the right belt for a water drainage
application. (Custom testing with other fluids is possible.) – The maximum flow rate of the test set-up is 18.3 l/s ->
without a belt.
Test setup: – “Closed series” have the lowest flow rate, but they are
– Representative belt area (real sample, stretched) water permeable.

– Large volume of water (> 50 l) – A food series with smooth rounded surfaces like S6.1-36
and S10-36 shows a high flow rate (12.4 – 12.8 l/s).
– Defined flow area (D = 100 mm -> 78.5 cm²
[D = 3.94 in -> 12.2 in²]) – The curve belts S5-45 GRT and S9-57 GRT are tested as
straight running samples. The flow rate of S5-45 GRT is
– Time measurement by video analysis not in line with the percentage of open area, which may
(when the fluid flow is constant, the time for 50 l water be due to turbulent water flow caused by the elongated
volume to flow will be measured) holes.
– Comparison tests (same settings for all tests)

Flow rate (l/s)

18.3
18

16
14.7
13.7 13.6 14.1
14
12.4 12.8
12 11.4

9.7 9.7 9.9

10
8.1 8.3 8.4
8 7.3 7.5

6
4.1
4
2.2
2 1.4 1.2
0.6 0.9 0.9

0
LT
FLT

FLT

lt
RA

be
0F

7G
7R
0-0

-0

-6

-12

-18

36
-25

no
-45

-57

-57
.1-

.1-

0-2

4-2

0-3

5-4
S7

5-4
.1-

.1-

.1-
S1

S1
S6

S9
S1

S1
S4

VI-18 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

6.4 CONVERSION TABLE METRIC/IMPERIAL

Metric Multiply Imperial Multiply Metric

Length
millimeter 0.03937 inch 25.4 millimeter
meter 39.37 inch 0.0254 meter
millimeter 0.0033 foot 304.8 millimeter
meter 3.281 foot 0.3048 meter

Area
square millimeter 0.00155 square inch 645.2 square millimeter
square meter 1550 square inch 0.000645 square meter
square millimeter 0.00001 square foot 92.903 square millimeter
square meter 10.764 square foot 0.0929 square meter

Volume
cubic meter 35.31 cubic foot 0.0283 cubic meter
liter 0.0353 cubic foot 28.32 liter

Speed
meter/min 0.0547 foot/second 18.29 meter/min
meter/min 3.281 foot/minute 0.3048 meter/min

Mass and Density

kilogram 2.205 pound 0.4536 kilogram
kilogram/cubic meter 0.0624 pound/cubic foot 16.02 kilogram/cubic meter

Force
kilogram-force 2.204 pound-force 0.4537 kilogram-force
newton 0.225 pound-force 4.448 newton

Torque
Newton meter 88.512 inch pound 0.113 Newton meter

Power
watt 0.00134 horsepower 745.7 watt

Pressure
kilogram/square meter 0.00142 pound/square inch 703.072 kilogram/square meter

Temperature
°C 5
°C 9·

( )
5
+ 32° °F
9
· (°F – 32°) °C

VI-19 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

6.5 QUESTIONNAIRE

See following pages

VI-20 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

Bent profiles –
Specification sheet modular belts

Please fill in the orange colored fields and add this document
to your order in SAP

Company

Base profile used

Art. # Description

SAP Nomenclature (only relevant in case inventory is needed)

Art. # Description h2

98xxxx99 “base profile #” @xxx h_s/h1/h2 MM @

Bending details
h_s
Designation Description Dimensions Constrains
h1
@ Bending angle from vertical 0° to 90°
h_s Final total height above base
h1 Height of bending point > 54 – hm
hm
h2 Length of the bent section > 19 mm

Example

Base profile used

Art. # Description )
2.36
98088499 S6.1-0 FLT PMU PP-HA WT H100 W200 6 0(

SAP Nomenclature (only relevant in case inventory is needed)

75 (2.95)

Art. # Description
40 (1.57)

98xxxx99 98088499 @55 75/40/60 MM

Bending details
Designation Description Dimensions
@ Bending angle from vertical 55°
h_s Final total height above base 75 mm
h1 Height of bending point 40 mm
h2 Length of the bent section 60 mm

VI-21 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

Application check list
Name: Date: modular belts
Customer data
Company/Customer name: Contact person:
Customer type (x): OEM Dealer/Distributor End user
End user name:

Application data Belt data

Industry: New belt Retrofit Original belt from:
Belt type: Belt pitch: mm/In
Application:
Belt color:
Conveyed product:
Belt material:
Wrapping/Container (x): POM PP PE PA
Non Cardboard Plastic container Stainless steel steel Other:
Shrink wrapped Flow pack Wood
Pin material:
Glass Steel cans Alu cans
POM PP PE PA
Steel trays Plastic trays Strapped
Stainless steel Steel Other:
Other
Pin retention system:
Item size: mm Inch Clips Integrated in pin Other:
LxWxH: Ø x H: Belt configuration:
Load (delete incorrect units): kg/item or lb/item Belt length: mm/In Belt width: mm/In
kg/m or lb/ft kg/m² or lb/ft² Top accessories (like Profiles):
Throughput (delete incorrect units): Type & height: Side indent: Pitch:
item/min kg/min or lb/min Side accessories (like SG):
Belt speed: m/min or ft/min Type & height: Side indent:

Sprocket data
Conveyor layout
Drive shaft:
Distance between shafts: C-C: mm/In
Size: z = per shaft: pcs
Top view: Straight Side flexing/curved conveyor Pitch diameter: mm/In “A” dimension: mm/In
Bore type: ● ● + keyway ■
Side view: Straight Incline Decline
Bore size:
Angle to horizontal: °
Idler shaft:
Start/stop operation:
Size: z = per shaft: pcs
No (continuous drive) Yes nos. of stop/hour:
Pitch diameter: mm/In “A” dimension: mm/In
Product indexing
Bore type: ● ● + keyway ■
Accumulation: Bore size:
No Full Partly, length:
Wearstrip/Wearbed data
Operating temperature:
Material:
Minimum: C°/F° Normal: C°/F°
PE HD 1000/UHMW PE PE HD 500/HMW PE
Maximum: C°/F°
Stainless steel Other:
Is the belt lubricated?
Configuration:
No Yes, type
Wear strips size (WxT): Spacing:
Is the belt exposed to chemicals during operation? Herringbone size (WxT): Spacing:
No Yes, type Solid sheet/full belt support Other:

Is the belt exposed to chemicals during cleaning?

No Yes, type

VI-22 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

Name: Date:

Sketch of conveyor, stating travel direction and location of drive motor.

Are there currently reports of any problems with this application? No Yes, please describe:

What is the main reason for the customers interest in a new belt?
New application/New conveyor
New demands on existing conveyor, please describe:

Current belt is showing: Significant wear, age of existing belt: year(s)

Significant breakages, cause of breakages:
Brittleness/aging/chemical degradation

Additional data or information:

Forbo Siegling GmbH

Lilienthalstraße 6/8, D-30179 Hannover
Phone +49 511 6704 0
www.forbo-siegling.com, [email protected]

VI-23 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

Spiral data form
Name: Date:
modular belts
Customer data
Company/Customer name: Contact person:
Customer type: OEM Dealer/Distributor End user
End user name:
Spiral belt: New Retrofit

Application data Air circulation

No circulation No directional air flow
Product Forced circulation High air velocity
Specify:
Product parameters
Product size: Max overall dimensions product or packing Temperature infeed: °C °F
Length lp: mm in Temperature outfeed: °C °F
Width bp: mm in
Operating parameters
Height hp: mm in Dwell time: min
Weight mp per unit: g lbs Max belt speed v: m/min ft/min

Packing None On tray, pan In box Production output

Packing material (e.g. in poly bags): Production rate: units/h
Throughput (capacity): kg/h lbs/h
Weight Packing per unit: g lbs
Operating conditions
Product properties
Electrical control of belt & drum drive:
Soft, delicate Wet Fatty, sticky
Direct start of belt & drum drive
Crumbly Other:
Soft start (over frequency converters)
Product arrangement Production:
on belt at in feed: Continuous, few changes
Frequent product & speed changes

Cleaning
No periodical cleaning Not specified
Number of products per row nr: prod./row
Cleaning process
Number of rows of belt nl: rows/m rows/ft Only dry with brush, aspirator Wet cleaning
Max product load on belt: kg/m lbs/ft Cleaning system installed High pressure
Or define on collapsed belt: Cleaning conditions
Min gap between products: mm in Water cold (< 32 °C/90 °F) Water hot (> 33 °C/91 °F)
Products not ordered (weight reasonably distributed) Water – Steam (100 °C/212 °F) Other:

Products in heaps (weight concentrations) Use of chemicals

No chemicals used Usual household cleaners
Required Accessories:
Use of cleaning agents/disinfectants (brand, type, name):
Side guards Lane dividers

Process Cleaning cycle

Daily Weekly Other:
Freezer Cooler Proofer
Other: Cleaning duration
Process conditions Up to 1h 1 to 3h Other:
Temperature: °C °F
Rel Humidity: %

VI-24 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

Spiral layout Main dimensions of spiral
Double Spirals have generally same dimensions; if Spiral A not
Type and configuration
identical B -> Indicate both dimensions first A/second B
Single unit Drum/Cage-Diameter Di: mm in
Upgoing Downgoing
Belt width bo: mm in
Direction of rotation: Tier height h: mm in
Clockwise Counter-clockwise Number of tiers n:
Angle between In- and Outrun: Inrun length lin: mm in
0° (Straight) 90° Outrun length lout: mm in

Take-up roller:
Free travel height hc: mm in

Only for dual spirals:

Crossover length between spirals Ltrans: mm in

180° 270°

Double unit
Up-downgoing Down-upgoing

Disposition crossover (transfer-conveyor)

Straight Diagonal

Indicate running direction (fix In-& Outrun-side)

From A (= Inrun) to B From B (= Inrun) to A

Drum design

Drum cylinder made with metal sheet-jacket
With closed sheets With perforated sheets
Cage = Drum made of vertical bars
Spacing of vertical bars: mm in

Dimensions of bar profile: mm in
(Round -> d, square, rectangular s1 x s2)
Indicate position of In- and Outrun with 1 to 8
Cage bars
Inrun: Position Outrun: Position
Without caps With caps; material:

Room dimensions (indicate if limited)
Available room max.
Length: m ft
Width: m ft

Height: m ft

Remark: If configuration not given above sketch on separate sheet!

VI-25 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

Retrofit data Carry way: Belt support
Number of belt supports x:
Customer requirements/problem description Spacing between supports b1: mm in
Indicate the reasons why the customer wants a refit. Distance belt edge – outside support ba: mm in
Support-rail thickness sr: mm in
Product problems
Support-rail height hr: mm in
Product marked Product sticks
Driving problems
Belt jumps, jerky movement Outer belt edge lifts up

Sanitation problems
Blackening, black spots Belt soiled with debris
Cleaning problems
Frequent cleaning required Cleaning cycle too long
Lifetime too short

Belt life time too short Excessive wear
Problem description:
Please describe current problems and also what the customer expects!
Wear strips (carry way)
Profile:
Height hw: mm in
Tentative time schedule
Width sw: mm in
Realization planned for:
Material:
HDPE or UHMW (min PE 500) Other:
Spiral belt
Condition:
Belt-type to be replaced In good condition, usable
Steel mesh belt Plastic modular belt Needs immediate replacement
Hybrid belt (SS & plastic)
Remark cage bars: Please fill in position “drum design” on
Manufacturer previous page.
Company name:
Cage bar caps
Belt specification Profile:
Product name/code/type:
Material:
Pitch: mm in
HDPE or UHMW (min PE 500) Other:
Belt material:
Condition:
Current condition of belt In good condition, usable Worn, scratched
In good condition Belt worn, old With defects (gaps, gauges, etc)
Stretched, partly deformed Belt fractured, partly broken
Hold downs
Required accessories No hold downs installed Safety belt flip up present
Friction modules Flights/Profiles
Location:
Nub top Radius expansion tabs S9
Outside belt edge Inside belt edge
Additional details: Type:
Continuous guide Several shoes
Spiral conveyor
Take-up roller: Please see spiral sketch on previous page.
Current condition of spiral general impression
Manufacturer: Compensation for belt elongation
Number of take-up rollers:
Year of construction:
In good condition, clean weak, deformed If design differs from “Main dimensions of spiral” on previous page:
Poor maintenance, dirty worn, damaged Estimate compensation way: m ft

Belt drive position

A: Sprocket on belt backside B: Sprocket on belt topside

Forbo Siegling GmbH

Lilienthalstraße 6/8, D-30179 Hannover
Phone +49 511 6704 0
www.forbo-siegling.com, [email protected]

VI-26 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

6.6 NOTES

VI-27 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

6.7 LEGAL NOTES

Forbo Siegling GmbH (“Forbo”) provides this Engineering

Manual for information purposes only. While Forbo endeav-
ors that its recommendations, operating instructions, details
and information on suitability and use of our products are as
accurate and complete as possible, Forbo does not make
any representation or warranty of any kind whatsoever,
neither expressed nor implied, with respect to any informa-
tion contained in this Engineering Manual unless otherwise
expressly set forth in writing by duly authorized representa-
tives of Forbo. It is your sole responsibility to perform appro-
priate testing of our products and their merchantability and
fitness for a particular purpose, and Forbo does not accept
any liability for any damages, including but not limited to
property damages and personal injury, in connection with
your reliance on any information contained in this
Engineering Manual or any technical and/or other support
which Forbo may have provided to you.

This Engineering Manual is Forbo property. Any reproduc-

tion, transmission or other use of this Engineering Manual
or part(s) thereof is only permissible with Forbo’s written
consent.

Forbo reserves the right to modify the content of this

Engineering Manual at any time and without prior notice
to you. The latest version of this Engineering Manual can
be downloaded from our website at www.forbo.com/
movement/en-gl/.

VI-28 Siegling Prolink Engineering Manual · 01/2024

Siegling – total belting solutions

Committed staff, quality oriented organization and

production processes ensure the constantly high standards
of our products and services.

Forbo Movement Systems complies with total quality man-

agement principles. Our quality management system has
ISO 9001 certification at all production and fabrication sites.
What’s more, many sites have ISO 14001 environmental
management certification.

01/24 · GB · Reproduction of text or parts thereof only with our approval. Subject to change.
Ref. no. 888-2
Our service – anytime, anywhere
Forbo Movement Systems employs around 2,500 people
in its group of companies. Our products are manufactured
in ten production facilities across the world.
You can find companies and agencies with warehouses
and workshops in over 80 countries.
Service points are located in more than 300 places worldwide.

Forbo Siegling GmbH

Lilienthalstrasse 6/8, D-30179 Hannover
Phone +49 511 6704 0
www.forbo-siegling.com, [email protected]

Full A Concise Guide To Macroeconomics What Managers Executives and Students Need To Know 2nd Edition Edition Moss PDF All Chapters
No ratings yet
Full A Concise Guide To Macroeconomics What Managers Executives and Students Need To Know 2nd Edition Edition Moss PDF All Chapters
29 pages
Project Report On Design of Belt Conveyor
100% (1)
Project Report On Design of Belt Conveyor
13 pages
Account Payable Dashboard Template
No ratings yet
Account Payable Dashboard Template
5 pages
IB Economics Exam Notes
100% (11)
IB Economics Exam Notes
30 pages
Modular Belts
No ratings yet
Modular Belts
34 pages
Forbo Conveyors
No ratings yet
Forbo Conveyors
14 pages
Forbo Siegling MPB
No ratings yet
Forbo Siegling MPB
28 pages
269-fms Siegling-Belting Food en PDF
No ratings yet
269-fms Siegling-Belting Food en PDF
20 pages
224 Fms Transilon Product Range en
No ratings yet
224 Fms Transilon Product Range en
18 pages
Tobacco: Belting
No ratings yet
Tobacco: Belting
8 pages
Transtex en
No ratings yet
Transtex en
8 pages
Benefit 0213 en
No ratings yet
Benefit 0213 en
4 pages
266 en
No ratings yet
266 en
20 pages
Movement: Is Our Business
No ratings yet
Movement: Is Our Business
12 pages
Technical Information 1: Storage, Finishing, Fitting
No ratings yet
Technical Information 1: Storage, Finishing, Fitting
12 pages
228 Fms - Siegling Belting Tobacco - en
No ratings yet
228 Fms - Siegling Belting Tobacco - en
8 pages
269-Fms Siegling Belting Food en
No ratings yet
269-Fms Siegling Belting Food en
32 pages
Forbo - Food
No ratings yet
Forbo - Food
32 pages
Ref - No.888-2 1.2 S13
No ratings yet
Ref - No.888-2 1.2 S13
9 pages
269 en
No ratings yet
269 en
32 pages
269 en
No ratings yet
269 en
32 pages
Ref - No.888-2 1.2 S18
No ratings yet
Ref - No.888-2 1.2 S18
6 pages
Sincronicas Con Cover Actualizado 2023 Jason
No ratings yet
Sincronicas Con Cover Actualizado 2023 Jason
58 pages
MCB File
No ratings yet
MCB File
12 pages
284-Fms Siegling-Belting Paper Print en
No ratings yet
284-Fms Siegling-Belting Paper Print en
4 pages
284-fms Siegling-Belting Paper Print en
No ratings yet
284-fms Siegling-Belting Paper Print en
4 pages
Leaflet Conveyor Belts Textile 2398 en
No ratings yet
Leaflet Conveyor Belts Textile 2398 en
12 pages
Eagle
0% (1)
Eagle
48 pages
Textiles Yarn Production: Siegling
No ratings yet
Textiles Yarn Production: Siegling
20 pages
FLEXLINK Stainless Steels Structures HiRes
No ratings yet
FLEXLINK Stainless Steels Structures HiRes
62 pages
Recommendations For Constructing and Calculating Conveyors: Modular Belts
No ratings yet
Recommendations For Constructing and Calculating Conveyors: Modular Belts
20 pages
Textiles - Nonwovens: Belting
No ratings yet
Textiles - Nonwovens: Belting
8 pages
Conveour Belt
No ratings yet
Conveour Belt
10 pages
Forbo Belt Technical Information
No ratings yet
Forbo Belt Technical Information
8 pages
281 en
No ratings yet
281 en
20 pages
206 Fms Prolink Constructing and Calculating Conveyors en
No ratings yet
206 Fms Prolink Constructing and Calculating Conveyors en
16 pages
Conveyor Belting
No ratings yet
Conveyor Belting
5 pages
Belt Conveyor Types
No ratings yet
Belt Conveyor Types
7 pages
Data Sheet: E 3/1 U0/U2 Mt-Na-Haccp-Ff Blue Fda
No ratings yet
Data Sheet: E 3/1 U0/U2 Mt-Na-Haccp-Ff Blue Fda
4 pages
Belt Conveyor
No ratings yet
Belt Conveyor
8 pages
Corporate Image en
No ratings yet
Corporate Image en
8 pages
Forbo - Heavy-Duty Drives
No ratings yet
Forbo - Heavy-Duty Drives
4 pages
Recommendations For Constructing and Calculating Conveyors: Plastic Modular Belting
No ratings yet
Recommendations For Constructing and Calculating Conveyors: Plastic Modular Belting
16 pages
Belt Conveyor
No ratings yet
Belt Conveyor
34 pages
Technical Information 2: Special Features and Properties
No ratings yet
Technical Information 2: Special Features and Properties
20 pages
Data Sheet: E 3/1 U0/U2 GL-NA Amber FDA
No ratings yet
Data Sheet: E 3/1 U0/U2 GL-NA Amber FDA
4 pages
Conveyor Belt 1 of 2 F
No ratings yet
Conveyor Belt 1 of 2 F
94 pages
The Flexlink Product Range: Flexlink Products in This Catalogue
No ratings yet
The Flexlink Product Range: Flexlink Products in This Catalogue
6 pages
Dunlop Conveyor Belt Design Manual PDF
No ratings yet
Dunlop Conveyor Belt Design Manual PDF
17 pages
Project Report On Design of Belt Conveyor
65% (20)
Project Report On Design of Belt Conveyor
13 pages
Data Sheet: E 8/2 U0/V5H MT-SE Black
No ratings yet
Data Sheet: E 8/2 U0/V5H MT-SE Black
4 pages
CBG8144 en Solution Cement Industry
No ratings yet
CBG8144 en Solution Cement Industry
12 pages
Belt Conveyors - RBL
No ratings yet
Belt Conveyors - RBL
141 pages
Survey of Conveyor Belt
100% (1)
Survey of Conveyor Belt
5 pages
BMHE Lecture Notes 3 0
No ratings yet
BMHE Lecture Notes 3 0
18 pages
Manuale Generale Megalinear - 2024
No ratings yet
Manuale Generale Megalinear - 2024
146 pages
POSTERMtech
No ratings yet
POSTERMtech
2 pages
Manuale Nastri Megalinear
No ratings yet
Manuale Nastri Megalinear
30 pages
Content - Book On Belt Conveyors
0% (1)
Content - Book On Belt Conveyors
12 pages
10th Social EM 3rd Revision Exam 2023 Original Question Paper Thenkasi District English Medium PDF Download
No ratings yet
10th Social EM 3rd Revision Exam 2023 Original Question Paper Thenkasi District English Medium PDF Download
2 pages
CVP
No ratings yet
CVP
45 pages
Micro and Macro Dynamics of Stock Market by Anup Chowdhury
No ratings yet
Micro and Macro Dynamics of Stock Market by Anup Chowdhury
391 pages
Chap 09 TRADE TestBank
No ratings yet
Chap 09 TRADE TestBank
17 pages
STA 342-TESTING HYPOTHESIS-2-Test On Mean of A Normal Population (Single)
No ratings yet
STA 342-TESTING HYPOTHESIS-2-Test On Mean of A Normal Population (Single)
14 pages
Pay Slip
No ratings yet
Pay Slip
1 page
Analisis Rasio Keuangan - PT Blue Bird
No ratings yet
Analisis Rasio Keuangan - PT Blue Bird
8 pages
2 National Income Aggregate Notes 1728186376344
No ratings yet
2 National Income Aggregate Notes 1728186376344
13 pages
Msom 2019 0803
No ratings yet
Msom 2019 0803
10 pages
Economics 02 by Faisal Khan
No ratings yet
Economics 02 by Faisal Khan
5 pages
Industrial Revolution and Capitalism
No ratings yet
Industrial Revolution and Capitalism
6 pages
PE 443642601 CTOS SME Score Report Company Sample
No ratings yet
PE 443642601 CTOS SME Score Report Company Sample
5 pages
Product Review Flexible Endowment Plan (FEP)
No ratings yet
Product Review Flexible Endowment Plan (FEP)
12 pages
Presentation On:-Consumption Function: Presented By: - Ashpak Khan
No ratings yet
Presentation On:-Consumption Function: Presented By: - Ashpak Khan
22 pages
DURACHUTE Plastic Chute
No ratings yet
DURACHUTE Plastic Chute
2 pages
Order Form 2
No ratings yet
Order Form 2
1 page
NOV23
No ratings yet
NOV23
76 pages
Long Quiz 2 TVL
No ratings yet
Long Quiz 2 TVL
5 pages
Lesson 4: Investment Appraisal
No ratings yet
Lesson 4: Investment Appraisal
56 pages
Unit 5.4 Differences in Economic Development Between Countries
No ratings yet
Unit 5.4 Differences in Economic Development Between Countries
9 pages
Chime Statement
No ratings yet
Chime Statement
4 pages
Major and Minor Programmes Offered by FBE 2022-23 - v20220711
No ratings yet
Major and Minor Programmes Offered by FBE 2022-23 - v20220711
14 pages
ANS Hw6
No ratings yet
ANS Hw6
7 pages
Hsslive Xii Acc 3 Admission of A Partner Key
No ratings yet
Hsslive Xii Acc 3 Admission of A Partner Key
8 pages
Well Test Tools
No ratings yet
Well Test Tools
29 pages
Certificate
No ratings yet
Certificate
1 page
Game Theory Methods of Solving Game Problems
No ratings yet
Game Theory Methods of Solving Game Problems
32 pages